PHYSICAL HAZARD MANAGEMENT · PHYSICAL HAZARD MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW 301. Physical hazards in the work environment include noise. heat, cold. vibration, pressure. electricity and radiation.

Post on 12-Mar-2020

4 Views

Category:

Documents

0 Downloads

Preview:

Click to see full reader

Transcript

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

CHAPTER 3

PHYSICAL HAZARD MANAGEMENT

OVERVIEW

301 Physical hazards in the work environment include noise heat cold vibration pressure electricity and radiation This chapter provides Defence policy on all these issues with the exception of radiation which because of the nature of the hazard is covered by a separate (chapter 4) in DOHSMAN

302 Specific guidance on this chapter is contained in the following annexes

Annexes A Management of Risks Associated with Plant B Occupational Noise Management in the Defence Organisation C Electronic and Electrical Hazards D Safe Techniques for Welding and n nn

E Fire F Thermal

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manu I

ANNEXATO CHAPTER 3

MANAGEMENT OF RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH PLANT

SYNOPSIS Regulations to the OHS Act require tne Defence Organisation (as an employer) to create a safe workplace that is free from risks associated with plant - his is achieved through the risk management process

In addition the Regulations require employers to apply for a licence to operate certain types of plant The Defence Organisation is exempt from this provision (through the granting of a Joint Special Licence (JSL) by the Safely Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission) However the granting of the JSL is subject to a number of conditions being mel y Defence

The effective implementation of the requirements of this annex will ensure Defence meets its duty of care and joint special licence requirements

REFEREN CES

1 Defence

2 Other

Occupational Health and Safety (Commonwealth Employment) (National Standards) Regulations Part 4-Plant

3 Cross Reference

Chapter 1 annex B-Regulations and Codes of Practice

Chapter 1 annex H-Risk Management

AL1

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

AN NEXA TO CHAPTER 3

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY-MANAGEMENT OF RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH PLANT

INTRODUCTION

1 The Occupational Health and Safely (Commonwealth Employment) (National Standards) Regulations part 4-Plant (the Regula ions) came into effect on 1 July 1996 The Regulations require the Defence Organisation (as an employer) to create and mainlain a safe workplace that is free from risks associated with plant This is achieved through a process of systematically identifying hazards and assessing and controll ing risks

2 In add ition to imposing duties on employers the Regulations impose duties on manufacturers suppliers erectors installers and commissioners of plant as outlined below

B Manufacturers Manufacturers have a duty to identify hazards associated with the plant assess the risks of identified hazards el iminate the risks notify Ule person who commissions the plant of the risks and provide the employer with information concerning the safe use of the plant

b Suppliers Suppliers have a duty to eliminate or minimise the identified risks arising from the use of plant inform the employer of the safe use of the plant inspect and test leased plant keep records of such testing of leased plant and provide the employer with those records

c Erectors and installer Erectors and instaJlers of plant have a duty to identify hazards associated with plant assess the risk of Identified hazards and eliminate or minimise those risks

d Employers Employers have a duty to identify hazards relating to the use installation erection commissioning of plant assess the risks associated with identified hazards eliminate or minimise those risks maintain control measures implement safe systems of work prov ide and maintain personal protective equipment repair unsafe damaged plant store and dispose of plant in a safe manner provide training information and instruction to employees exposed to risk and to make available and keep records concerning tests maintenance and inspection of plant

3 The Regulations require employers to apply for a licence to operate the types of plant listed in appendix 1 The Regulations make provisions for the Department of Defence (000) and the Australian Defence Force (ADF) as joint licensees to apply separately for a joint special license (JSL) If granted the JSL exempts the Defence Organisation from the provis ions of Regulations 441 to 454 inclusive The granting of the JSL is subject to a number of conditions being placed upon and met by the Defence Organisation When granted a JSL is valid for four years Appendix 2 provides details of the provisions of Regulations 441 to 454 which boh the 000 and the ADF may be required to comply with should the jOint JSL be cancelled suspended or varied for any reason

AIM

4 The aim of this annex is to provide guidance to Program Managers to ensure that the Defence Organisation meets its obligations under the Plant Regulations and in particular fulfil the conditions imposed upon it for the granting of a JSL

AU

Public

a

B is at

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

3A-3

Director Defence Occupational Health and Safety

8 The Director Defence Occupational He Ith and Safety (DDOHS) is responsible for

a the coordination of retums which are required under the Regulations from Defence Estate Organisation (DEO) and Support Command Australia (SLAUST)

b the coord ination of any variations to the JSL

c provide information to the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC) on plant covered by the JSL as required under the Regulations

d provide advice to the responsible programs time frames for the provision of information required under the condilions of the JSL

Head Defence Estate Organisation

9 Head Defence Estate Organisation (HDEO) is responsible for those items of plant ind uded under the JSL arrangements which are Fixed Items of Plant which form part of the essential building services of building fabric at all establishments units and bases HDEO is responsib le for providing (for each establishmentluniUbase) the following information for plant and equipment for which they have management responsibility to DDOHS every twelve months

a contact officer details (appointment address and telephone number)

b number of plant items held by each establishmentunitlbase during the reporting periods

c number of new plant introduced into the workplace during the reporting period

d number of plant items modified during the reporting period

e number of plant items disposed of during the reporting eriod and

f number of plant registered during the reporting period (including details of the system of reg tration)

Commander Support Command Australia

10 Commander Support Command Australia (COMDSCAUSn is responsible for those items of plant included under the JSL arrange ents which are classed as being Mobile lIems of Plant at all ships establishments units and bases SCAUST is responsible for providing (for each shipeslablishmenUunitlbase) the following informallon for plant and equipment for which they have management responsibility 10 DDOHS every twelve months

a contact officer details (appointment address and telephone number)

b number of plant items held by each shipestablishmentiuniUbase dunng the reporting penods

c number of new plant Introduced into the workplace during the reporting period

d number of plant items modified during the reporting period

e number of plant items disposed of during the reporting period and

f number of plant registered during the reporting period (including details of the system of registration)

AL1

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

3A-4

Defence Istate Organisatlon and Commander Support Command Australia

11 DEO and SCAUST are responsible for establishing and implementing procedures that will ensure compliance with the Regulations an thiS annex DEO and SCAUST are to en ure that procedures include the following

a Plant subject to the JSL (Appendix 1 provides details of plant subject to JSL) DEO and SCAUST are responsible for

1) carrying out maintenance and testing inspections in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and relevant Australian Standards on the licensed plant a least once a year or sooner if a need is identified by fo ll owing a n as s essment u nd er t a ken In accordance wit h sub-subparagraph 12i

(2) keeping records of maintenance Inspections which afe earned out on licensed plant Tne records must include a statement to the effect that each item of plant has been maintained in a safe condition and is safe to operate

(3) establishing and maintaining a system within each Program for registering In-house plant designs The system for registering in-house plant designs is to make provisions for recording individual plant designs (including such things as technical speCifications and drawings) and design alterations Details of those items of plant requiring registration or notification of design are provided at appendix 3 As stated in subparagraph 12g HOPE is responsible for monitoring compliance with the Regulalions however the programs are to ensure that the system once established is audited annually In addition as part of the conditions of the JSL the SReC may audit the plant design registration system at a mutually convenient time

(4) keeping a register that contains records of how each item of licensed plant is used Appendix 4 provides details of the register The register must be updated at least every 12 months or whenever an item of plant is relocated modified etc

(5) notifying HDPE whenever licensed plant is altered relocated disposed of or if there is a change of ownership and

(6) notifying HOPE whenever new plant subject to the licensing provisions of the Regulations is acquired

Commandersmanagers

12 All plant With respect to all plant (ie as defined in paragraph 9 and including plant which is subject to a JSL) commandersmanagers are responsible for

a protecting the health and safety of employees and others operating the plant

b protecting the health and safety of those involved in commissioning and installing all plant

c ensuring that plant is decommissioned dismantled conSistent with provisions under the Regulations

and disposed of in a manner

d provide training for all those who

(1) operate maintain inspect or audit plant and

(2) train others to operate maintain inspect or audit plant

e developing safety procedures for individual items of plant

AL1

i

of

JSL

ltI

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

3A-6

1 Plant requiring licence in accordance with schedule 6 part 2 of the plant regulations 2 Plant licensing and design reglstrdtion respoflsibilitifs 3 Items of plant requiring registration or in accordance with schedule 6

part 1 of the regulations 4 Plant register 5 Occupational health and safety risk nrn 6 Plant monitoringaudit plan

AL1

1 ANNEXATO CHAPTER 3

20F

2 ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

of

Note

the OI5IPI81EJC on near

g

a lower

Al1

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

APPENDIX 3 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

ITEMS OF PLANT REQUIRING REGISTRATION OR NOTIFICATION OF DESIGN IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE 6 PART 1 OF THE REGULATIONS

Item No Description of Plant

1 Pressure equipment other than pressur piping thai have a hazard level of A B C or 0 determined in accordance with Australian Standards (AS) 3920 part 1 Pressure Equipment Manufacture-Assurance of Product Quality (ME121 Standard AMBSC)

2 Gas cylinders covered by AS 2030

3 Tower Cranes-I

4 Building maintenance units

5 Hoists with a platform movement in excess of 24 metres designed to lift people111

6 Work boxes suspended from cranes

7 Amusement structures covered by AS 3533 (Amusement Rides and Devices) other than class 1 structures

8 Prefabricated scaffolding

9 Boom-type elevating work platforms

10 Gantry Cranes)

(a) with a safe working load greater than 5 tonnes or

(b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goods lbl

11 Bridge cranes

(a) with a safe working load of 10 lannes or

(b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goodS(bl

12 Vehicle hoists)

13 Mast climbing work platforms)

14 Mobile cranes with a safe working load greater than 10 10nnesI

Notes

(a) For the purposes or licensing any reference to cranes and hoists in schedule 6 exclude those that are manually powered elevaling work platforms or tow trucks

(b) Dangerous goodS means dangerous goods as defined in the Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 5th edition published by the Federal Office of Road Safety in September 1992

AL1

Defence Occupational Health and Safe y Manual

3A3-2

Plant designs

1 Employers are not to use plant hsted In this appendix unless lhat plant tias a CUfrent reg istration number which is issued by the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC)

2 An employer may apply 10 the SReC for registration of the design of plant listed in this appendix This process invoives Ihe submission of a written application form which includes a representational drawing of the plant design a statement signed by or for Ihe manufacturer of the plant to the effect that the design of he plant complies with the provisions of the regu lations thai apply to manufacturers of plan and a statement by a design verifier wh ich states that this has been done

Nole

A design verifier is a competent independent person who Is responsible for advising whether the design of a plant complies with the provisIons or the regulations

3 Registration of a plant design is subject to the following conditions

a evidence of design registration is to be displayed on or near Ihe plant to which the design registration relates and

b the registration number must be provided to any person who deals with the employer in relation to the plant

4 The SRCC is to be notified whenever there is an alteration to the plant design and employees are not to use the item of plant until the SRCC has been notified However Ihe SRCC does not need to be notified of an afteration which has been carried out by a person administering a Staterremtory law that corresponds to the Act or the Regulations

AL1

IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

r-~N~lfI~

c

4

c

1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

or

AL1

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

3A5-2

c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

familiar with the

Step 2-risk assessment

6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

(1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

(2) consultation wilh employees

(3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

(4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

(5) maintenance logs of plant

(6) manuals provided with plant

(7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

(8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

(1) very likely-could happen frequently

(2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

(3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

(4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

(1) fatality

(2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

(3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

(4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

(5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

AL1

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

3A5-3

e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

Step 3-risk control

8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

(1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

(2) education and training of em ployees

(3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

(4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

(1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

(2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

(3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

(4) to supplement other control measures

AL1

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

3A5~

Step 4-monitoring and review

9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

b the design is revised or modified

c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

e the plant is moved

ownership of the plant changes

g there is a change to the workplace environment and

h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

AL1

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

Program Manufacturer

Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

Inspected by Date

Hazard and Source Comments

Al1

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

RISK TABLE

1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

LIKELIHOOD

Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

Other asset damage

MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

AL1

LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

Sitampllocahon

Program

Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

Compiled by

HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

LIKELIHOOD

Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

I Date

CONSEQUENCE

Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

RISK RATING

(Sea appendix 2)

Higtl Medium Low

CONTROL ACTION

1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

1 2 ~1

I

I 1 i

-g

~ Z -t xl

en raquo en en m en en

Z ~

-t ~ o xl

en I

-t

ALi

RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

REPORTING PERIOD

1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

I

tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

i(~l

I

-1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

Noles

Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

(b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

2971

(e) Tower eras

(n) IlUltflng maimenance units

Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

(f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

a iO ltgt IIgt

Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

PLANT

in

AS

Cross Reference

is to NI

B

at the or in the

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

38-2

f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

RESPONSIBILITIES

9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

Engineering controls

14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

Amber Zone~

of

Black time

or 115

A f4nwnninotinn

Extreme Zone

b

a

to

Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

38-6

34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

Compensation

35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

Education

36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

Operational areas

38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

Documentation

39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

b

Defence OccUiJational Manual

1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

NOISE

1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

nor shall include refresher on

c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

MUST BE WORN

EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

ANNEXBTO

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

(1) advise the employee of the test results

(2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

(3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

protection

(4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

387-2

d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

(1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

e Relest the Flr1r in six months

4 Tile referral crlleria are

a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

civilian document

Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

3 U RULE

1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

SPL (dB(A)) of

85 8 hours

a8 4 hours

91 2 hours

94 1 hour

97 30 minutes

100 15 minutes

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

rtwIrlv

manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

REFERENCES

1 Defence

MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

2 Other

3 Cross Reference

4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

Chapter 4 annex Radiation

AS

Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

WELDING

SYNOPSIS

REFERENCES

1 Defence

W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

2 Other

AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

3 Cross Reference

1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

FIRE SAFETY

SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

REFERENCES

1 Defence

MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

2 Other

AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

AS 3504-Fire Blankets

AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

AS 4067-Fire Prevention

AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

3 Cross Reference

Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

38-3

Administrative controls

17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

Personal protective equipment

18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

Noise assessments

23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

THERMAL CONDITIONS

SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

REFERENCES

1 Defence

DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

2 Other

and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

3 Cross Reference

8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

112

113

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

Section 1 - Overview

Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

bull increased health care and compensation

Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

Continued on next page

mAinArlA he risks to

means

the

I1RIIIrlrlll and the

118

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

Contents This chapter contains the following sections

Section Content

1 Overview

2 Specific responsibilities

3 Noise management principles

4 Impulse noise

5 Warning signs

6 The use of foam earplugs

7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

9 The three decibel rule

10 Reference material

The fnllnwinn

124

125

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

Employees Employees are responsible for

bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

Training and skilling

Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

and OHS skills

Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

131

132

133

134

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

Section 3 - Noise management principles

Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

Eng ineering controls

Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

Administrative controls

Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

bull regular audiometric examinations

Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

135

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

Noise assessments

Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

Hearing protection areas

136

Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

ConllmJ8o orl next page

137

138

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

Hearing protection areas

136 (continued)

A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

Audiometric examinations

Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

139

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

Audiometric eXaminations

138 (conlhued)

bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

Education

1310

Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

1312

141

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

Section 4 -Impulse noise

Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

151

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

Section 5 - Warning signs

Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

MUST BE W O R N

( A MBER ZONE)

HEARING PROTECTION AREA

EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

M UST BE W ORN

C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

E AH MUFFS ]

M UST BE WOAN

HEARING PROTECTION AREA

l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

161

162

163

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

164

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

FOR r shy

3

4 Hold II f fully_ncis

3

4 Hold

ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

IiudeT

Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

Continuod 0 next Pa(O

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

164 (conUnued)

-IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

) VISUA CH CK

6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

o ~Sati1h

s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

171

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

1 Toe(l __

- T 1at eI -

l

_~__ L-~~ ishy

~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

Continued on ne)( page

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

Form PM 139

171 (continued)

~clV1lmcnt of lin

Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

5 AmeoQlITir

bull

M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

181

and

no matter how

are trained

DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

the response button each time one of these it is

the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

ears with the ear and

the audiometer win

the mmr(

and the 500 to BODO Hz are

the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

c~vman form

and Services in audiometric

health that attendance

Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

after

500-8000 take no further

500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

check the noise exposure since the last was

are

audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

errIOIJVEeS are

take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

IF

Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

161 (conlinood)

should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

retest the Tlnt in six months

The referral criteria are

a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

is 15 dB or more at any

wax or if there is a or

thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

191

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

Section 9 - The three decibel rule

Three decibel rule

The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

85 8 hours

88 4 hours

91 2 hours

94 1 hour

97 30 minutes

100 15 minutes

1101

UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

Section 10 - Reference material

References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

12 Safety signs

13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

17 Noise awareness program

18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

19 OHS skills development training

20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

Related material

1102 (ool1linuen)

  • Part 1
  • Part 2
  • Part 3
  • Part 4
  • PArt 5

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manu I

    ANNEXATO CHAPTER 3

    MANAGEMENT OF RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH PLANT

    SYNOPSIS Regulations to the OHS Act require tne Defence Organisation (as an employer) to create a safe workplace that is free from risks associated with plant - his is achieved through the risk management process

    In addition the Regulations require employers to apply for a licence to operate certain types of plant The Defence Organisation is exempt from this provision (through the granting of a Joint Special Licence (JSL) by the Safely Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission) However the granting of the JSL is subject to a number of conditions being mel y Defence

    The effective implementation of the requirements of this annex will ensure Defence meets its duty of care and joint special licence requirements

    REFEREN CES

    1 Defence

    2 Other

    Occupational Health and Safety (Commonwealth Employment) (National Standards) Regulations Part 4-Plant

    3 Cross Reference

    Chapter 1 annex B-Regulations and Codes of Practice

    Chapter 1 annex H-Risk Management

    AL1

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    AN NEXA TO CHAPTER 3

    OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY-MANAGEMENT OF RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH PLANT

    INTRODUCTION

    1 The Occupational Health and Safely (Commonwealth Employment) (National Standards) Regulations part 4-Plant (the Regula ions) came into effect on 1 July 1996 The Regulations require the Defence Organisation (as an employer) to create and mainlain a safe workplace that is free from risks associated with plant This is achieved through a process of systematically identifying hazards and assessing and controll ing risks

    2 In add ition to imposing duties on employers the Regulations impose duties on manufacturers suppliers erectors installers and commissioners of plant as outlined below

    B Manufacturers Manufacturers have a duty to identify hazards associated with the plant assess the risks of identified hazards el iminate the risks notify Ule person who commissions the plant of the risks and provide the employer with information concerning the safe use of the plant

    b Suppliers Suppliers have a duty to eliminate or minimise the identified risks arising from the use of plant inform the employer of the safe use of the plant inspect and test leased plant keep records of such testing of leased plant and provide the employer with those records

    c Erectors and installer Erectors and instaJlers of plant have a duty to identify hazards associated with plant assess the risk of Identified hazards and eliminate or minimise those risks

    d Employers Employers have a duty to identify hazards relating to the use installation erection commissioning of plant assess the risks associated with identified hazards eliminate or minimise those risks maintain control measures implement safe systems of work prov ide and maintain personal protective equipment repair unsafe damaged plant store and dispose of plant in a safe manner provide training information and instruction to employees exposed to risk and to make available and keep records concerning tests maintenance and inspection of plant

    3 The Regulations require employers to apply for a licence to operate the types of plant listed in appendix 1 The Regulations make provisions for the Department of Defence (000) and the Australian Defence Force (ADF) as joint licensees to apply separately for a joint special license (JSL) If granted the JSL exempts the Defence Organisation from the provis ions of Regulations 441 to 454 inclusive The granting of the JSL is subject to a number of conditions being placed upon and met by the Defence Organisation When granted a JSL is valid for four years Appendix 2 provides details of the provisions of Regulations 441 to 454 which boh the 000 and the ADF may be required to comply with should the jOint JSL be cancelled suspended or varied for any reason

    AIM

    4 The aim of this annex is to provide guidance to Program Managers to ensure that the Defence Organisation meets its obligations under the Plant Regulations and in particular fulfil the conditions imposed upon it for the granting of a JSL

    AU

    Public

    a

    B is at

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    3A-3

    Director Defence Occupational Health and Safety

    8 The Director Defence Occupational He Ith and Safety (DDOHS) is responsible for

    a the coordination of retums which are required under the Regulations from Defence Estate Organisation (DEO) and Support Command Australia (SLAUST)

    b the coord ination of any variations to the JSL

    c provide information to the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC) on plant covered by the JSL as required under the Regulations

    d provide advice to the responsible programs time frames for the provision of information required under the condilions of the JSL

    Head Defence Estate Organisation

    9 Head Defence Estate Organisation (HDEO) is responsible for those items of plant ind uded under the JSL arrangements which are Fixed Items of Plant which form part of the essential building services of building fabric at all establishments units and bases HDEO is responsib le for providing (for each establishmentluniUbase) the following information for plant and equipment for which they have management responsibility to DDOHS every twelve months

    a contact officer details (appointment address and telephone number)

    b number of plant items held by each establishmentunitlbase during the reporting periods

    c number of new plant introduced into the workplace during the reporting period

    d number of plant items modified during the reporting period

    e number of plant items disposed of during the reporting eriod and

    f number of plant registered during the reporting period (including details of the system of reg tration)

    Commander Support Command Australia

    10 Commander Support Command Australia (COMDSCAUSn is responsible for those items of plant included under the JSL arrange ents which are classed as being Mobile lIems of Plant at all ships establishments units and bases SCAUST is responsible for providing (for each shipeslablishmenUunitlbase) the following informallon for plant and equipment for which they have management responsibility 10 DDOHS every twelve months

    a contact officer details (appointment address and telephone number)

    b number of plant items held by each shipestablishmentiuniUbase dunng the reporting penods

    c number of new plant Introduced into the workplace during the reporting period

    d number of plant items modified during the reporting period

    e number of plant items disposed of during the reporting period and

    f number of plant registered during the reporting period (including details of the system of registration)

    AL1

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    3A-4

    Defence Istate Organisatlon and Commander Support Command Australia

    11 DEO and SCAUST are responsible for establishing and implementing procedures that will ensure compliance with the Regulations an thiS annex DEO and SCAUST are to en ure that procedures include the following

    a Plant subject to the JSL (Appendix 1 provides details of plant subject to JSL) DEO and SCAUST are responsible for

    1) carrying out maintenance and testing inspections in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and relevant Australian Standards on the licensed plant a least once a year or sooner if a need is identified by fo ll owing a n as s essment u nd er t a ken In accordance wit h sub-subparagraph 12i

    (2) keeping records of maintenance Inspections which afe earned out on licensed plant Tne records must include a statement to the effect that each item of plant has been maintained in a safe condition and is safe to operate

    (3) establishing and maintaining a system within each Program for registering In-house plant designs The system for registering in-house plant designs is to make provisions for recording individual plant designs (including such things as technical speCifications and drawings) and design alterations Details of those items of plant requiring registration or notification of design are provided at appendix 3 As stated in subparagraph 12g HOPE is responsible for monitoring compliance with the Regulalions however the programs are to ensure that the system once established is audited annually In addition as part of the conditions of the JSL the SReC may audit the plant design registration system at a mutually convenient time

    (4) keeping a register that contains records of how each item of licensed plant is used Appendix 4 provides details of the register The register must be updated at least every 12 months or whenever an item of plant is relocated modified etc

    (5) notifying HDPE whenever licensed plant is altered relocated disposed of or if there is a change of ownership and

    (6) notifying HOPE whenever new plant subject to the licensing provisions of the Regulations is acquired

    Commandersmanagers

    12 All plant With respect to all plant (ie as defined in paragraph 9 and including plant which is subject to a JSL) commandersmanagers are responsible for

    a protecting the health and safety of employees and others operating the plant

    b protecting the health and safety of those involved in commissioning and installing all plant

    c ensuring that plant is decommissioned dismantled conSistent with provisions under the Regulations

    and disposed of in a manner

    d provide training for all those who

    (1) operate maintain inspect or audit plant and

    (2) train others to operate maintain inspect or audit plant

    e developing safety procedures for individual items of plant

    AL1

    i

    of

    JSL

    ltI

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    3A-6

    1 Plant requiring licence in accordance with schedule 6 part 2 of the plant regulations 2 Plant licensing and design reglstrdtion respoflsibilitifs 3 Items of plant requiring registration or in accordance with schedule 6

    part 1 of the regulations 4 Plant register 5 Occupational health and safety risk nrn 6 Plant monitoringaudit plan

    AL1

    1 ANNEXATO CHAPTER 3

    20F

    2 ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

    of

    Note

    the OI5IPI81EJC on near

    g

    a lower

    Al1

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    APPENDIX 3 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

    ITEMS OF PLANT REQUIRING REGISTRATION OR NOTIFICATION OF DESIGN IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE 6 PART 1 OF THE REGULATIONS

    Item No Description of Plant

    1 Pressure equipment other than pressur piping thai have a hazard level of A B C or 0 determined in accordance with Australian Standards (AS) 3920 part 1 Pressure Equipment Manufacture-Assurance of Product Quality (ME121 Standard AMBSC)

    2 Gas cylinders covered by AS 2030

    3 Tower Cranes-I

    4 Building maintenance units

    5 Hoists with a platform movement in excess of 24 metres designed to lift people111

    6 Work boxes suspended from cranes

    7 Amusement structures covered by AS 3533 (Amusement Rides and Devices) other than class 1 structures

    8 Prefabricated scaffolding

    9 Boom-type elevating work platforms

    10 Gantry Cranes)

    (a) with a safe working load greater than 5 tonnes or

    (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goods lbl

    11 Bridge cranes

    (a) with a safe working load of 10 lannes or

    (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goodS(bl

    12 Vehicle hoists)

    13 Mast climbing work platforms)

    14 Mobile cranes with a safe working load greater than 10 10nnesI

    Notes

    (a) For the purposes or licensing any reference to cranes and hoists in schedule 6 exclude those that are manually powered elevaling work platforms or tow trucks

    (b) Dangerous goodS means dangerous goods as defined in the Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 5th edition published by the Federal Office of Road Safety in September 1992

    AL1

    Defence Occupational Health and Safe y Manual

    3A3-2

    Plant designs

    1 Employers are not to use plant hsted In this appendix unless lhat plant tias a CUfrent reg istration number which is issued by the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC)

    2 An employer may apply 10 the SReC for registration of the design of plant listed in this appendix This process invoives Ihe submission of a written application form which includes a representational drawing of the plant design a statement signed by or for Ihe manufacturer of the plant to the effect that the design of he plant complies with the provisions of the regu lations thai apply to manufacturers of plan and a statement by a design verifier wh ich states that this has been done

    Nole

    A design verifier is a competent independent person who Is responsible for advising whether the design of a plant complies with the provisIons or the regulations

    3 Registration of a plant design is subject to the following conditions

    a evidence of design registration is to be displayed on or near Ihe plant to which the design registration relates and

    b the registration number must be provided to any person who deals with the employer in relation to the plant

    4 The SRCC is to be notified whenever there is an alteration to the plant design and employees are not to use the item of plant until the SRCC has been notified However Ihe SRCC does not need to be notified of an afteration which has been carried out by a person administering a Staterremtory law that corresponds to the Act or the Regulations

    AL1

    IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

    r-~N~lfI~

    c

    4

    c

    1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

    or

    AL1

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    3A5-2

    c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

    d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

    familiar with the

    Step 2-risk assessment

    6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

    a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

    (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

    (2) consultation wilh employees

    (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

    (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

    (5) maintenance logs of plant

    (6) manuals provided with plant

    (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

    (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

    b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

    c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

    (1) very likely-could happen frequently

    (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

    (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

    (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

    d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

    (1) fatality

    (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

    (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

    (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

    (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

    AL1

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    3A5-3

    e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

    7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

    Step 3-risk control

    8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

    a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

    b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

    c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

    d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

    (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

    (2) education and training of em ployees

    (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

    (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

    e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

    (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

    (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

    (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

    (4) to supplement other control measures

    AL1

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    3A5~

    Step 4-monitoring and review

    9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

    a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

    b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

    10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

    a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

    b the design is revised or modified

    c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

    d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

    e the plant is moved

    ownership of the plant changes

    g there is a change to the workplace environment and

    h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

    Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

    AL1

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

    PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

    UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

    Program Manufacturer

    Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

    Inspected by Date

    Hazard and Source Comments

    Al1

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

    RISK TABLE

    1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

    LIKELIHOOD

    Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

    Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

    MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

    Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

    Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

    Other asset damage

    MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

    2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

    AL1

    LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

    Sitampllocahon

    Program

    Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

    Compiled by

    HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

    LIKELIHOOD

    Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

    I Date

    CONSEQUENCE

    Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

    RISK RATING

    (Sea appendix 2)

    Higtl Medium Low

    CONTROL ACTION

    1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

    1 2 ~1

    I

    I 1 i

    -g

    ~ Z -t xl

    en raquo en en m en en

    Z ~

    -t ~ o xl

    en I

    -t

    ALi

    RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

    CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

    APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

    PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

    REPORTING PERIOD

    1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

    UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

    TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

    NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

    PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

    I

    tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

    PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

    i(~l

    I

    -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

    Noles

    Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

    (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

    2971

    (e) Tower eras

    (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

    Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

    (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

    ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

    a iO ltgt IIgt

    Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

    PLANT

    in

    AS

    Cross Reference

    is to NI

    B

    at the or in the

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    38-2

    f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

    g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

    h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

    8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

    RESPONSIBILITIES

    9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

    10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

    11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

    12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

    a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

    b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

    c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

    NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

    13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

    Engineering controls

    14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

    15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

    16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

    Amber Zone~

    of

    Black time

    or 115

    A f4nwnninotinn

    Extreme Zone

    b

    a

    to

    Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

    Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

    38-6

    34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

    Compensation

    35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

    Education

    36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

    37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

    Operational areas

    38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

    Documentation

    39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

    Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

    b

    Defence OccUiJational Manual

    1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

    NOISE

    1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

    a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

    shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

    nor shall include refresher on

    c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

    d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

    3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

    Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

    APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

    WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

    ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

    EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

    MUST BE WORN

    EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

    ANNEXBTO

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

    METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

    1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

    a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

    b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

    c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

    d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

    2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

    3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

    B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

    b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

    c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

    (1) advise the employee of the test results

    (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

    (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

    protection

    (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

    Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

    387-2

    d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

    (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

    civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

    e Relest the Flr1r in six months

    4 Tile referral crlleria are

    a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

    b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

    c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

    d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

    5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

    civilian document

    Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

    APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

    3 U RULE

    1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

    SPL (dB(A)) of

    85 8 hours

    a8 4 hours

    91 2 hours

    94 1 hour

    97 30 minutes

    100 15 minutes

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

    ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

    SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

    rtwIrlv

    manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

    REFERENCES

    1 Defence

    MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

    2 Other

    3 Cross Reference

    4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

    Chapter 4 annex Radiation

    AS

    Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

    WELDING

    SYNOPSIS

    REFERENCES

    1 Defence

    W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

    2 Other

    AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

    AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

    AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

    AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

    JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

    Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

    3 Cross Reference

    1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

    5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

    7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

    FIRE SAFETY

    SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

    REFERENCES

    1 Defence

    MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

    DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

    MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

    2 Other

    AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

    AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

    AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

    AS 3504-Fire Blankets

    AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

    AS 4067-Fire Prevention

    AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

    AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

    3 Cross Reference

    Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

    38-3

    Administrative controls

    17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

    Personal protective equipment

    18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

    19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

    a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

    b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

    c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

    20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

    21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

    22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

    Noise assessments

    23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

    24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

    a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

    b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

    c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

    d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

    Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

    11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

    THERMAL CONDITIONS

    SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

    environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

    REFERENCES

    1 Defence

    DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

    OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

    DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

    If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

    2 Other

    and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

    3 Cross Reference

    8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

    112

    113

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

    CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

    NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

    Section 1 - Overview

    Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

    Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

    Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

    Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

    Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

    Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

    bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

    bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

    bull increased health care and compensation

    Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

    For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

    Continued on next page

    mAinArlA he risks to

    means

    the

    I1RIIIrlrlll and the

    118

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

    Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

    117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

    Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

    Contents This chapter contains the following sections

    Section Content

    1 Overview

    2 Specific responsibilities

    3 Noise management principles

    4 Impulse noise

    5 Warning signs

    6 The use of foam earplugs

    7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

    8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

    9 The three decibel rule

    10 Reference material

    The fnllnwinn

    124

    125

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

    Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

    Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

    When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

    Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

    bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

    bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

    bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

    When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

    Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

    Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

    Employees Employees are responsible for

    bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

    bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

    bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

    Training and skilling

    Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

    The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

    course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

    Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

    and OHS skills

    Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

    costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

    131

    132

    133

    134

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

    Section 3 - Noise management principles

    Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

    Eng ineering controls

    Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

    For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

    Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

    Administrative controls

    Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

    Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

    Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

    The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

    bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

    bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

    bull regular audiometric examinations

    Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

    Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

    Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

    135

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

    Noise assessments

    Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

    Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

    bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

    bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

    bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

    bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

    Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

    Hearing protection areas

    136

    Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

    bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

    continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

    impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

    A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

    bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

    con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

    impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

    Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

    bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

    continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

    im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

    ConllmJ8o orl next page

    137

    138

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

    Hearing protection areas

    136 (continued)

    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

    bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

    continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

    impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

    The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

    Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

    The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

    The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

    Audiometric examinations

    Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

    bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

    bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

    Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

    ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

    139

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

    Audiometric eXaminations

    138 (conlhued)

    bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

    bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

    bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

    bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

    bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

    Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

    Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

    Education

    1310

    Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

    Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

    Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

    1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

    Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

    1312

    141

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

    Section 4 -Impulse noise

    Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

    This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

    bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

    bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

    bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

    bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

    151

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

    Section 5 - Warning signs

    Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

    HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

    MUST BE W O R N

    ( A MBER ZONE)

    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

    EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

    M UST BE W ORN

    C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

    r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

    E AH MUFFS ]

    M UST BE WOAN

    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

    l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

    MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

    ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

    161

    162

    163

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

    Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

    Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

    the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

    Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

    Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

    Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

    Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

    Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

    bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

    bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

    bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

    164

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

    Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

    FOR r shy

    3

    4 Hold II f fully_ncis

    3

    4 Hold

    ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

    IiudeT

    Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

    I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

    Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

    p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

    wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

    ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

    Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

    T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

    p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

    A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

    Continuod 0 next Pa(O

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

    Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

    164 (conUnued)

    -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

    ) VISUA CH CK

    6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

    rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

    o ~Sati1h

    s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

    Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

    bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

    171

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

    Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

    Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

    MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

    Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

    bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

    1 Toe(l __

    - T 1at eI -

    l

    _~__ L-~~ ishy

    ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

    AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

    ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

    Continued on ne)( page

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

    Form PM 139

    171 (continued)

    ~clV1lmcnt of lin

    Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

    5 AmeoQlITir

    bull

    M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

    181

    and

    no matter how

    are trained

    DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

    11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

    Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

    8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

    lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

    the response button each time one of these it is

    the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

    where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

    be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

    ears with the ear and

    the audiometer win

    the mmr(

    and the 500 to BODO Hz are

    the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

    c~vman form

    and Services in audiometric

    health that attendance

    Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

    recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

    ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

    such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

    it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

    If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

    after

    500-8000 take no further

    500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

    advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

    check the noise exposure since the last was

    are

    audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

    errIOIJVEeS are

    take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

    IF

    Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

    161 (conlinood)

    should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

    ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

    civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

    retest the Tlnt in six months

    The referral criteria are

    a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

    is 15 dB or more at any

    wax or if there is a or

    thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

    The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

    191

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

    Section 9 - The three decibel rule

    Three decibel rule

    The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

    SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

    85 8 hours

    88 4 hours

    91 2 hours

    94 1 hour

    97 30 minutes

    100 15 minutes

    1101

    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

    Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

    Section 10 - Reference material

    References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

    2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

    3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

    4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

    5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

    6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

    7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

    8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

    9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

    10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

    11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

    12 Safety signs

    13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

    14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

    15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

    16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

    17 Noise awareness program

    18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

    19 OHS skills development training

    20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

    21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

    Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

    1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

    AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

    ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

    Related material

    1102 (ool1linuen)

    • Part 1
    • Part 2
    • Part 3
    • Part 4
    • PArt 5

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      AN NEXA TO CHAPTER 3

      OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY-MANAGEMENT OF RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH PLANT

      INTRODUCTION

      1 The Occupational Health and Safely (Commonwealth Employment) (National Standards) Regulations part 4-Plant (the Regula ions) came into effect on 1 July 1996 The Regulations require the Defence Organisation (as an employer) to create and mainlain a safe workplace that is free from risks associated with plant This is achieved through a process of systematically identifying hazards and assessing and controll ing risks

      2 In add ition to imposing duties on employers the Regulations impose duties on manufacturers suppliers erectors installers and commissioners of plant as outlined below

      B Manufacturers Manufacturers have a duty to identify hazards associated with the plant assess the risks of identified hazards el iminate the risks notify Ule person who commissions the plant of the risks and provide the employer with information concerning the safe use of the plant

      b Suppliers Suppliers have a duty to eliminate or minimise the identified risks arising from the use of plant inform the employer of the safe use of the plant inspect and test leased plant keep records of such testing of leased plant and provide the employer with those records

      c Erectors and installer Erectors and instaJlers of plant have a duty to identify hazards associated with plant assess the risk of Identified hazards and eliminate or minimise those risks

      d Employers Employers have a duty to identify hazards relating to the use installation erection commissioning of plant assess the risks associated with identified hazards eliminate or minimise those risks maintain control measures implement safe systems of work prov ide and maintain personal protective equipment repair unsafe damaged plant store and dispose of plant in a safe manner provide training information and instruction to employees exposed to risk and to make available and keep records concerning tests maintenance and inspection of plant

      3 The Regulations require employers to apply for a licence to operate the types of plant listed in appendix 1 The Regulations make provisions for the Department of Defence (000) and the Australian Defence Force (ADF) as joint licensees to apply separately for a joint special license (JSL) If granted the JSL exempts the Defence Organisation from the provis ions of Regulations 441 to 454 inclusive The granting of the JSL is subject to a number of conditions being placed upon and met by the Defence Organisation When granted a JSL is valid for four years Appendix 2 provides details of the provisions of Regulations 441 to 454 which boh the 000 and the ADF may be required to comply with should the jOint JSL be cancelled suspended or varied for any reason

      AIM

      4 The aim of this annex is to provide guidance to Program Managers to ensure that the Defence Organisation meets its obligations under the Plant Regulations and in particular fulfil the conditions imposed upon it for the granting of a JSL

      AU

      Public

      a

      B is at

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      3A-3

      Director Defence Occupational Health and Safety

      8 The Director Defence Occupational He Ith and Safety (DDOHS) is responsible for

      a the coordination of retums which are required under the Regulations from Defence Estate Organisation (DEO) and Support Command Australia (SLAUST)

      b the coord ination of any variations to the JSL

      c provide information to the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC) on plant covered by the JSL as required under the Regulations

      d provide advice to the responsible programs time frames for the provision of information required under the condilions of the JSL

      Head Defence Estate Organisation

      9 Head Defence Estate Organisation (HDEO) is responsible for those items of plant ind uded under the JSL arrangements which are Fixed Items of Plant which form part of the essential building services of building fabric at all establishments units and bases HDEO is responsib le for providing (for each establishmentluniUbase) the following information for plant and equipment for which they have management responsibility to DDOHS every twelve months

      a contact officer details (appointment address and telephone number)

      b number of plant items held by each establishmentunitlbase during the reporting periods

      c number of new plant introduced into the workplace during the reporting period

      d number of plant items modified during the reporting period

      e number of plant items disposed of during the reporting eriod and

      f number of plant registered during the reporting period (including details of the system of reg tration)

      Commander Support Command Australia

      10 Commander Support Command Australia (COMDSCAUSn is responsible for those items of plant included under the JSL arrange ents which are classed as being Mobile lIems of Plant at all ships establishments units and bases SCAUST is responsible for providing (for each shipeslablishmenUunitlbase) the following informallon for plant and equipment for which they have management responsibility 10 DDOHS every twelve months

      a contact officer details (appointment address and telephone number)

      b number of plant items held by each shipestablishmentiuniUbase dunng the reporting penods

      c number of new plant Introduced into the workplace during the reporting period

      d number of plant items modified during the reporting period

      e number of plant items disposed of during the reporting period and

      f number of plant registered during the reporting period (including details of the system of registration)

      AL1

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      3A-4

      Defence Istate Organisatlon and Commander Support Command Australia

      11 DEO and SCAUST are responsible for establishing and implementing procedures that will ensure compliance with the Regulations an thiS annex DEO and SCAUST are to en ure that procedures include the following

      a Plant subject to the JSL (Appendix 1 provides details of plant subject to JSL) DEO and SCAUST are responsible for

      1) carrying out maintenance and testing inspections in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and relevant Australian Standards on the licensed plant a least once a year or sooner if a need is identified by fo ll owing a n as s essment u nd er t a ken In accordance wit h sub-subparagraph 12i

      (2) keeping records of maintenance Inspections which afe earned out on licensed plant Tne records must include a statement to the effect that each item of plant has been maintained in a safe condition and is safe to operate

      (3) establishing and maintaining a system within each Program for registering In-house plant designs The system for registering in-house plant designs is to make provisions for recording individual plant designs (including such things as technical speCifications and drawings) and design alterations Details of those items of plant requiring registration or notification of design are provided at appendix 3 As stated in subparagraph 12g HOPE is responsible for monitoring compliance with the Regulalions however the programs are to ensure that the system once established is audited annually In addition as part of the conditions of the JSL the SReC may audit the plant design registration system at a mutually convenient time

      (4) keeping a register that contains records of how each item of licensed plant is used Appendix 4 provides details of the register The register must be updated at least every 12 months or whenever an item of plant is relocated modified etc

      (5) notifying HDPE whenever licensed plant is altered relocated disposed of or if there is a change of ownership and

      (6) notifying HOPE whenever new plant subject to the licensing provisions of the Regulations is acquired

      Commandersmanagers

      12 All plant With respect to all plant (ie as defined in paragraph 9 and including plant which is subject to a JSL) commandersmanagers are responsible for

      a protecting the health and safety of employees and others operating the plant

      b protecting the health and safety of those involved in commissioning and installing all plant

      c ensuring that plant is decommissioned dismantled conSistent with provisions under the Regulations

      and disposed of in a manner

      d provide training for all those who

      (1) operate maintain inspect or audit plant and

      (2) train others to operate maintain inspect or audit plant

      e developing safety procedures for individual items of plant

      AL1

      i

      of

      JSL

      ltI

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      3A-6

      1 Plant requiring licence in accordance with schedule 6 part 2 of the plant regulations 2 Plant licensing and design reglstrdtion respoflsibilitifs 3 Items of plant requiring registration or in accordance with schedule 6

      part 1 of the regulations 4 Plant register 5 Occupational health and safety risk nrn 6 Plant monitoringaudit plan

      AL1

      1 ANNEXATO CHAPTER 3

      20F

      2 ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

      of

      Note

      the OI5IPI81EJC on near

      g

      a lower

      Al1

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      APPENDIX 3 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

      ITEMS OF PLANT REQUIRING REGISTRATION OR NOTIFICATION OF DESIGN IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE 6 PART 1 OF THE REGULATIONS

      Item No Description of Plant

      1 Pressure equipment other than pressur piping thai have a hazard level of A B C or 0 determined in accordance with Australian Standards (AS) 3920 part 1 Pressure Equipment Manufacture-Assurance of Product Quality (ME121 Standard AMBSC)

      2 Gas cylinders covered by AS 2030

      3 Tower Cranes-I

      4 Building maintenance units

      5 Hoists with a platform movement in excess of 24 metres designed to lift people111

      6 Work boxes suspended from cranes

      7 Amusement structures covered by AS 3533 (Amusement Rides and Devices) other than class 1 structures

      8 Prefabricated scaffolding

      9 Boom-type elevating work platforms

      10 Gantry Cranes)

      (a) with a safe working load greater than 5 tonnes or

      (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goods lbl

      11 Bridge cranes

      (a) with a safe working load of 10 lannes or

      (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goodS(bl

      12 Vehicle hoists)

      13 Mast climbing work platforms)

      14 Mobile cranes with a safe working load greater than 10 10nnesI

      Notes

      (a) For the purposes or licensing any reference to cranes and hoists in schedule 6 exclude those that are manually powered elevaling work platforms or tow trucks

      (b) Dangerous goodS means dangerous goods as defined in the Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 5th edition published by the Federal Office of Road Safety in September 1992

      AL1

      Defence Occupational Health and Safe y Manual

      3A3-2

      Plant designs

      1 Employers are not to use plant hsted In this appendix unless lhat plant tias a CUfrent reg istration number which is issued by the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC)

      2 An employer may apply 10 the SReC for registration of the design of plant listed in this appendix This process invoives Ihe submission of a written application form which includes a representational drawing of the plant design a statement signed by or for Ihe manufacturer of the plant to the effect that the design of he plant complies with the provisions of the regu lations thai apply to manufacturers of plan and a statement by a design verifier wh ich states that this has been done

      Nole

      A design verifier is a competent independent person who Is responsible for advising whether the design of a plant complies with the provisIons or the regulations

      3 Registration of a plant design is subject to the following conditions

      a evidence of design registration is to be displayed on or near Ihe plant to which the design registration relates and

      b the registration number must be provided to any person who deals with the employer in relation to the plant

      4 The SRCC is to be notified whenever there is an alteration to the plant design and employees are not to use the item of plant until the SRCC has been notified However Ihe SRCC does not need to be notified of an afteration which has been carried out by a person administering a Staterremtory law that corresponds to the Act or the Regulations

      AL1

      IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

      r-~N~lfI~

      c

      4

      c

      1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

      or

      AL1

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      3A5-2

      c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

      d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

      familiar with the

      Step 2-risk assessment

      6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

      a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

      (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

      (2) consultation wilh employees

      (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

      (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

      (5) maintenance logs of plant

      (6) manuals provided with plant

      (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

      (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

      b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

      c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

      (1) very likely-could happen frequently

      (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

      (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

      (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

      d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

      (1) fatality

      (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

      (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

      (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

      (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

      AL1

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      3A5-3

      e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

      7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

      Step 3-risk control

      8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

      a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

      b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

      c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

      d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

      (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

      (2) education and training of em ployees

      (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

      (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

      e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

      (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

      (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

      (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

      (4) to supplement other control measures

      AL1

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      3A5~

      Step 4-monitoring and review

      9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

      a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

      b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

      10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

      a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

      b the design is revised or modified

      c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

      d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

      e the plant is moved

      ownership of the plant changes

      g there is a change to the workplace environment and

      h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

      Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

      AL1

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

      PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

      UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

      Program Manufacturer

      Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

      Inspected by Date

      Hazard and Source Comments

      Al1

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

      RISK TABLE

      1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

      LIKELIHOOD

      Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

      Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

      MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

      Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

      Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

      Other asset damage

      MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

      2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

      AL1

      LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

      Sitampllocahon

      Program

      Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

      Compiled by

      HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

      LIKELIHOOD

      Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

      I Date

      CONSEQUENCE

      Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

      RISK RATING

      (Sea appendix 2)

      Higtl Medium Low

      CONTROL ACTION

      1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

      1 2 ~1

      I

      I 1 i

      -g

      ~ Z -t xl

      en raquo en en m en en

      Z ~

      -t ~ o xl

      en I

      -t

      ALi

      RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

      CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

      APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

      PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

      REPORTING PERIOD

      1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

      UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

      TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

      NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

      PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

      I

      tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

      PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

      i(~l

      I

      -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

      Noles

      Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

      (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

      2971

      (e) Tower eras

      (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

      Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

      (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

      ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

      a iO ltgt IIgt

      Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

      PLANT

      in

      AS

      Cross Reference

      is to NI

      B

      at the or in the

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      38-2

      f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

      g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

      h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

      8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

      RESPONSIBILITIES

      9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

      10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

      11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

      12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

      a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

      b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

      c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

      NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

      13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

      Engineering controls

      14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

      15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

      16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

      Amber Zone~

      of

      Black time

      or 115

      A f4nwnninotinn

      Extreme Zone

      b

      a

      to

      Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

      Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

      38-6

      34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

      Compensation

      35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

      Education

      36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

      37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

      Operational areas

      38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

      Documentation

      39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

      Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

      b

      Defence OccUiJational Manual

      1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

      NOISE

      1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

      a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

      shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

      nor shall include refresher on

      c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

      d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

      3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

      Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

      APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

      WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

      ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

      EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

      MUST BE WORN

      EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

      ANNEXBTO

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

      METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

      1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

      a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

      b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

      c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

      d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

      2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

      3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

      B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

      b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

      c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

      (1) advise the employee of the test results

      (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

      (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

      protection

      (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

      Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

      387-2

      d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

      (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

      civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

      e Relest the Flr1r in six months

      4 Tile referral crlleria are

      a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

      b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

      c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

      d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

      5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

      civilian document

      Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

      APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

      3 U RULE

      1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

      SPL (dB(A)) of

      85 8 hours

      a8 4 hours

      91 2 hours

      94 1 hour

      97 30 minutes

      100 15 minutes

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

      ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

      SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

      rtwIrlv

      manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

      REFERENCES

      1 Defence

      MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

      2 Other

      3 Cross Reference

      4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

      Chapter 4 annex Radiation

      AS

      Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

      WELDING

      SYNOPSIS

      REFERENCES

      1 Defence

      W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

      2 Other

      AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

      AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

      AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

      AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

      JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

      Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

      3 Cross Reference

      1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

      5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

      7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

      FIRE SAFETY

      SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

      REFERENCES

      1 Defence

      MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

      DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

      MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

      2 Other

      AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

      AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

      AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

      AS 3504-Fire Blankets

      AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

      AS 4067-Fire Prevention

      AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

      AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

      3 Cross Reference

      Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

      38-3

      Administrative controls

      17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

      Personal protective equipment

      18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

      19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

      a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

      b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

      c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

      20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

      21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

      22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

      Noise assessments

      23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

      24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

      a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

      b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

      c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

      d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

      Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

      11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

      THERMAL CONDITIONS

      SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

      environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

      REFERENCES

      1 Defence

      DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

      OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

      DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

      If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

      2 Other

      and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

      3 Cross Reference

      8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

      112

      113

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

      CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

      NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

      Section 1 - Overview

      Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

      Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

      Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

      Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

      Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

      Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

      bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

      bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

      bull increased health care and compensation

      Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

      For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

      Continued on next page

      mAinArlA he risks to

      means

      the

      I1RIIIrlrlll and the

      118

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

      Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

      117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

      Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

      Contents This chapter contains the following sections

      Section Content

      1 Overview

      2 Specific responsibilities

      3 Noise management principles

      4 Impulse noise

      5 Warning signs

      6 The use of foam earplugs

      7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

      8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

      9 The three decibel rule

      10 Reference material

      The fnllnwinn

      124

      125

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

      Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

      Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

      When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

      Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

      bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

      bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

      bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

      When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

      Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

      Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

      Employees Employees are responsible for

      bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

      bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

      bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

      Training and skilling

      Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

      The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

      course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

      Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

      and OHS skills

      Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

      costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

      131

      132

      133

      134

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

      Section 3 - Noise management principles

      Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

      Eng ineering controls

      Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

      For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

      Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

      Administrative controls

      Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

      Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

      Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

      The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

      bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

      bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

      bull regular audiometric examinations

      Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

      Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

      Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

      135

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

      Noise assessments

      Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

      Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

      bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

      bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

      bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

      bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

      Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

      Hearing protection areas

      136

      Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

      bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

      continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

      impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

      A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

      bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

      con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

      impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

      Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

      bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

      continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

      im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

      ConllmJ8o orl next page

      137

      138

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

      Hearing protection areas

      136 (continued)

      A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

      bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

      continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

      impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

      A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

      The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

      Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

      The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

      The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

      Audiometric examinations

      Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

      bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

      bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

      Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

      ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

      139

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

      Audiometric eXaminations

      138 (conlhued)

      bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

      bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

      bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

      bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

      bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

      Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

      Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

      Education

      1310

      Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

      Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

      Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

      1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

      Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

      1312

      141

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

      Section 4 -Impulse noise

      Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

      This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

      bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

      bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

      bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

      bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

      151

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

      Section 5 - Warning signs

      Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

      HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

      MUST BE W O R N

      ( A MBER ZONE)

      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

      EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

      M UST BE W ORN

      C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

      r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

      E AH MUFFS ]

      M UST BE WOAN

      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

      l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

      MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

      ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

      161

      162

      163

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

      Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

      Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

      the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

      Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

      Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

      Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

      Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

      Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

      bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

      bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

      bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

      164

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

      Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

      FOR r shy

      3

      4 Hold II f fully_ncis

      3

      4 Hold

      ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

      IiudeT

      Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

      I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

      Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

      p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

      wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

      ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

      Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

      T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

      p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

      A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

      Continuod 0 next Pa(O

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

      Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

      164 (conUnued)

      -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

      ) VISUA CH CK

      6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

      rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

      o ~Sati1h

      s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

      Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

      bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

      171

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

      Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

      Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

      MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

      Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

      bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

      1 Toe(l __

      - T 1at eI -

      l

      _~__ L-~~ ishy

      ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

      AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

      ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

      Continued on ne)( page

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

      Form PM 139

      171 (continued)

      ~clV1lmcnt of lin

      Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

      5 AmeoQlITir

      bull

      M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

      181

      and

      no matter how

      are trained

      DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

      11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

      Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

      8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

      lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

      the response button each time one of these it is

      the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

      where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

      be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

      ears with the ear and

      the audiometer win

      the mmr(

      and the 500 to BODO Hz are

      the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

      c~vman form

      and Services in audiometric

      health that attendance

      Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

      recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

      ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

      such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

      it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

      If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

      after

      500-8000 take no further

      500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

      advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

      check the noise exposure since the last was

      are

      audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

      errIOIJVEeS are

      take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

      IF

      Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

      161 (conlinood)

      should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

      ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

      civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

      retest the Tlnt in six months

      The referral criteria are

      a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

      is 15 dB or more at any

      wax or if there is a or

      thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

      The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

      191

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

      Section 9 - The three decibel rule

      Three decibel rule

      The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

      SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

      85 8 hours

      88 4 hours

      91 2 hours

      94 1 hour

      97 30 minutes

      100 15 minutes

      1101

      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

      Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

      Section 10 - Reference material

      References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

      2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

      3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

      4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

      5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

      6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

      7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

      8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

      9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

      10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

      11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

      12 Safety signs

      13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

      14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

      15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

      16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

      17 Noise awareness program

      18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

      19 OHS skills development training

      20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

      21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

      Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

      1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

      AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

      ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

      Related material

      1102 (ool1linuen)

      • Part 1
      • Part 2
      • Part 3
      • Part 4
      • PArt 5

        Public

        a

        B is at

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        3A-3

        Director Defence Occupational Health and Safety

        8 The Director Defence Occupational He Ith and Safety (DDOHS) is responsible for

        a the coordination of retums which are required under the Regulations from Defence Estate Organisation (DEO) and Support Command Australia (SLAUST)

        b the coord ination of any variations to the JSL

        c provide information to the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC) on plant covered by the JSL as required under the Regulations

        d provide advice to the responsible programs time frames for the provision of information required under the condilions of the JSL

        Head Defence Estate Organisation

        9 Head Defence Estate Organisation (HDEO) is responsible for those items of plant ind uded under the JSL arrangements which are Fixed Items of Plant which form part of the essential building services of building fabric at all establishments units and bases HDEO is responsib le for providing (for each establishmentluniUbase) the following information for plant and equipment for which they have management responsibility to DDOHS every twelve months

        a contact officer details (appointment address and telephone number)

        b number of plant items held by each establishmentunitlbase during the reporting periods

        c number of new plant introduced into the workplace during the reporting period

        d number of plant items modified during the reporting period

        e number of plant items disposed of during the reporting eriod and

        f number of plant registered during the reporting period (including details of the system of reg tration)

        Commander Support Command Australia

        10 Commander Support Command Australia (COMDSCAUSn is responsible for those items of plant included under the JSL arrange ents which are classed as being Mobile lIems of Plant at all ships establishments units and bases SCAUST is responsible for providing (for each shipeslablishmenUunitlbase) the following informallon for plant and equipment for which they have management responsibility 10 DDOHS every twelve months

        a contact officer details (appointment address and telephone number)

        b number of plant items held by each shipestablishmentiuniUbase dunng the reporting penods

        c number of new plant Introduced into the workplace during the reporting period

        d number of plant items modified during the reporting period

        e number of plant items disposed of during the reporting period and

        f number of plant registered during the reporting period (including details of the system of registration)

        AL1

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        3A-4

        Defence Istate Organisatlon and Commander Support Command Australia

        11 DEO and SCAUST are responsible for establishing and implementing procedures that will ensure compliance with the Regulations an thiS annex DEO and SCAUST are to en ure that procedures include the following

        a Plant subject to the JSL (Appendix 1 provides details of plant subject to JSL) DEO and SCAUST are responsible for

        1) carrying out maintenance and testing inspections in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and relevant Australian Standards on the licensed plant a least once a year or sooner if a need is identified by fo ll owing a n as s essment u nd er t a ken In accordance wit h sub-subparagraph 12i

        (2) keeping records of maintenance Inspections which afe earned out on licensed plant Tne records must include a statement to the effect that each item of plant has been maintained in a safe condition and is safe to operate

        (3) establishing and maintaining a system within each Program for registering In-house plant designs The system for registering in-house plant designs is to make provisions for recording individual plant designs (including such things as technical speCifications and drawings) and design alterations Details of those items of plant requiring registration or notification of design are provided at appendix 3 As stated in subparagraph 12g HOPE is responsible for monitoring compliance with the Regulalions however the programs are to ensure that the system once established is audited annually In addition as part of the conditions of the JSL the SReC may audit the plant design registration system at a mutually convenient time

        (4) keeping a register that contains records of how each item of licensed plant is used Appendix 4 provides details of the register The register must be updated at least every 12 months or whenever an item of plant is relocated modified etc

        (5) notifying HDPE whenever licensed plant is altered relocated disposed of or if there is a change of ownership and

        (6) notifying HOPE whenever new plant subject to the licensing provisions of the Regulations is acquired

        Commandersmanagers

        12 All plant With respect to all plant (ie as defined in paragraph 9 and including plant which is subject to a JSL) commandersmanagers are responsible for

        a protecting the health and safety of employees and others operating the plant

        b protecting the health and safety of those involved in commissioning and installing all plant

        c ensuring that plant is decommissioned dismantled conSistent with provisions under the Regulations

        and disposed of in a manner

        d provide training for all those who

        (1) operate maintain inspect or audit plant and

        (2) train others to operate maintain inspect or audit plant

        e developing safety procedures for individual items of plant

        AL1

        i

        of

        JSL

        ltI

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        3A-6

        1 Plant requiring licence in accordance with schedule 6 part 2 of the plant regulations 2 Plant licensing and design reglstrdtion respoflsibilitifs 3 Items of plant requiring registration or in accordance with schedule 6

        part 1 of the regulations 4 Plant register 5 Occupational health and safety risk nrn 6 Plant monitoringaudit plan

        AL1

        1 ANNEXATO CHAPTER 3

        20F

        2 ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

        of

        Note

        the OI5IPI81EJC on near

        g

        a lower

        Al1

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        APPENDIX 3 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

        ITEMS OF PLANT REQUIRING REGISTRATION OR NOTIFICATION OF DESIGN IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE 6 PART 1 OF THE REGULATIONS

        Item No Description of Plant

        1 Pressure equipment other than pressur piping thai have a hazard level of A B C or 0 determined in accordance with Australian Standards (AS) 3920 part 1 Pressure Equipment Manufacture-Assurance of Product Quality (ME121 Standard AMBSC)

        2 Gas cylinders covered by AS 2030

        3 Tower Cranes-I

        4 Building maintenance units

        5 Hoists with a platform movement in excess of 24 metres designed to lift people111

        6 Work boxes suspended from cranes

        7 Amusement structures covered by AS 3533 (Amusement Rides and Devices) other than class 1 structures

        8 Prefabricated scaffolding

        9 Boom-type elevating work platforms

        10 Gantry Cranes)

        (a) with a safe working load greater than 5 tonnes or

        (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goods lbl

        11 Bridge cranes

        (a) with a safe working load of 10 lannes or

        (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goodS(bl

        12 Vehicle hoists)

        13 Mast climbing work platforms)

        14 Mobile cranes with a safe working load greater than 10 10nnesI

        Notes

        (a) For the purposes or licensing any reference to cranes and hoists in schedule 6 exclude those that are manually powered elevaling work platforms or tow trucks

        (b) Dangerous goodS means dangerous goods as defined in the Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 5th edition published by the Federal Office of Road Safety in September 1992

        AL1

        Defence Occupational Health and Safe y Manual

        3A3-2

        Plant designs

        1 Employers are not to use plant hsted In this appendix unless lhat plant tias a CUfrent reg istration number which is issued by the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC)

        2 An employer may apply 10 the SReC for registration of the design of plant listed in this appendix This process invoives Ihe submission of a written application form which includes a representational drawing of the plant design a statement signed by or for Ihe manufacturer of the plant to the effect that the design of he plant complies with the provisions of the regu lations thai apply to manufacturers of plan and a statement by a design verifier wh ich states that this has been done

        Nole

        A design verifier is a competent independent person who Is responsible for advising whether the design of a plant complies with the provisIons or the regulations

        3 Registration of a plant design is subject to the following conditions

        a evidence of design registration is to be displayed on or near Ihe plant to which the design registration relates and

        b the registration number must be provided to any person who deals with the employer in relation to the plant

        4 The SRCC is to be notified whenever there is an alteration to the plant design and employees are not to use the item of plant until the SRCC has been notified However Ihe SRCC does not need to be notified of an afteration which has been carried out by a person administering a Staterremtory law that corresponds to the Act or the Regulations

        AL1

        IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

        r-~N~lfI~

        c

        4

        c

        1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

        or

        AL1

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        3A5-2

        c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

        d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

        familiar with the

        Step 2-risk assessment

        6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

        a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

        (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

        (2) consultation wilh employees

        (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

        (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

        (5) maintenance logs of plant

        (6) manuals provided with plant

        (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

        (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

        b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

        c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

        (1) very likely-could happen frequently

        (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

        (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

        (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

        d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

        (1) fatality

        (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

        (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

        (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

        (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

        AL1

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        3A5-3

        e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

        7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

        Step 3-risk control

        8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

        a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

        b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

        c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

        d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

        (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

        (2) education and training of em ployees

        (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

        (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

        e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

        (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

        (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

        (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

        (4) to supplement other control measures

        AL1

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        3A5~

        Step 4-monitoring and review

        9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

        a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

        b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

        10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

        a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

        b the design is revised or modified

        c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

        d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

        e the plant is moved

        ownership of the plant changes

        g there is a change to the workplace environment and

        h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

        Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

        AL1

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

        PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

        UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

        Program Manufacturer

        Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

        Inspected by Date

        Hazard and Source Comments

        Al1

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

        RISK TABLE

        1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

        LIKELIHOOD

        Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

        Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

        MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

        Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

        Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

        Other asset damage

        MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

        2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

        AL1

        LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

        Sitampllocahon

        Program

        Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

        Compiled by

        HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

        LIKELIHOOD

        Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

        I Date

        CONSEQUENCE

        Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

        RISK RATING

        (Sea appendix 2)

        Higtl Medium Low

        CONTROL ACTION

        1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

        1 2 ~1

        I

        I 1 i

        -g

        ~ Z -t xl

        en raquo en en m en en

        Z ~

        -t ~ o xl

        en I

        -t

        ALi

        RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

        CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

        APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

        PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

        REPORTING PERIOD

        1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

        UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

        TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

        NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

        PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

        I

        tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

        PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

        i(~l

        I

        -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

        Noles

        Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

        (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

        2971

        (e) Tower eras

        (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

        Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

        (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

        ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

        a iO ltgt IIgt

        Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

        PLANT

        in

        AS

        Cross Reference

        is to NI

        B

        at the or in the

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        38-2

        f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

        g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

        h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

        8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

        RESPONSIBILITIES

        9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

        10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

        11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

        12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

        a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

        b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

        c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

        NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

        13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

        Engineering controls

        14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

        15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

        16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

        Amber Zone~

        of

        Black time

        or 115

        A f4nwnninotinn

        Extreme Zone

        b

        a

        to

        Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

        Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

        38-6

        34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

        Compensation

        35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

        Education

        36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

        37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

        Operational areas

        38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

        Documentation

        39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

        Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

        b

        Defence OccUiJational Manual

        1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

        NOISE

        1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

        a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

        shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

        nor shall include refresher on

        c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

        d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

        3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

        Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

        APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

        WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

        ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

        EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

        MUST BE WORN

        EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

        ANNEXBTO

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

        METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

        1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

        a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

        b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

        c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

        d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

        2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

        3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

        B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

        b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

        c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

        (1) advise the employee of the test results

        (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

        (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

        protection

        (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

        Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

        387-2

        d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

        (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

        civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

        e Relest the Flr1r in six months

        4 Tile referral crlleria are

        a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

        b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

        c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

        d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

        5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

        civilian document

        Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

        APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

        3 U RULE

        1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

        SPL (dB(A)) of

        85 8 hours

        a8 4 hours

        91 2 hours

        94 1 hour

        97 30 minutes

        100 15 minutes

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

        ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

        SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

        rtwIrlv

        manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

        REFERENCES

        1 Defence

        MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

        2 Other

        3 Cross Reference

        4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

        Chapter 4 annex Radiation

        AS

        Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

        WELDING

        SYNOPSIS

        REFERENCES

        1 Defence

        W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

        2 Other

        AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

        AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

        AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

        AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

        JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

        Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

        3 Cross Reference

        1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

        5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

        7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

        FIRE SAFETY

        SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

        REFERENCES

        1 Defence

        MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

        DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

        MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

        2 Other

        AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

        AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

        AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

        AS 3504-Fire Blankets

        AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

        AS 4067-Fire Prevention

        AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

        AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

        3 Cross Reference

        Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

        38-3

        Administrative controls

        17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

        Personal protective equipment

        18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

        19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

        a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

        b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

        c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

        20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

        21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

        22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

        Noise assessments

        23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

        24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

        a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

        b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

        c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

        d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

        Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

        11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

        THERMAL CONDITIONS

        SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

        environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

        REFERENCES

        1 Defence

        DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

        OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

        DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

        If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

        2 Other

        and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

        3 Cross Reference

        8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

        112

        113

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

        CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

        NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

        Section 1 - Overview

        Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

        Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

        Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

        Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

        Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

        Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

        bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

        bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

        bull increased health care and compensation

        Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

        For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

        Continued on next page

        mAinArlA he risks to

        means

        the

        I1RIIIrlrlll and the

        118

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

        Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

        117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

        Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

        Contents This chapter contains the following sections

        Section Content

        1 Overview

        2 Specific responsibilities

        3 Noise management principles

        4 Impulse noise

        5 Warning signs

        6 The use of foam earplugs

        7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

        8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

        9 The three decibel rule

        10 Reference material

        The fnllnwinn

        124

        125

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

        Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

        Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

        When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

        Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

        bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

        bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

        bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

        When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

        Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

        Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

        Employees Employees are responsible for

        bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

        bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

        bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

        Training and skilling

        Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

        The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

        course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

        Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

        and OHS skills

        Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

        costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

        131

        132

        133

        134

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

        Section 3 - Noise management principles

        Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

        Eng ineering controls

        Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

        For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

        Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

        Administrative controls

        Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

        Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

        Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

        The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

        bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

        bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

        bull regular audiometric examinations

        Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

        Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

        Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

        135

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

        Noise assessments

        Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

        Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

        bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

        bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

        bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

        bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

        Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

        Hearing protection areas

        136

        Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

        bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

        continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

        impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

        A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

        bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

        con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

        impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

        Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

        bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

        continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

        im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

        ConllmJ8o orl next page

        137

        138

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

        Hearing protection areas

        136 (continued)

        A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

        bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

        continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

        impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

        A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

        The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

        Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

        The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

        The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

        Audiometric examinations

        Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

        bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

        bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

        Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

        ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

        139

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

        Audiometric eXaminations

        138 (conlhued)

        bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

        bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

        bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

        bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

        bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

        Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

        Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

        Education

        1310

        Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

        Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

        Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

        1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

        Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

        1312

        141

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

        Section 4 -Impulse noise

        Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

        This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

        bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

        bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

        bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

        bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

        151

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

        Section 5 - Warning signs

        Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

        HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

        MUST BE W O R N

        ( A MBER ZONE)

        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

        EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

        M UST BE W ORN

        C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

        r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

        E AH MUFFS ]

        M UST BE WOAN

        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

        l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

        MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

        ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

        161

        162

        163

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

        Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

        Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

        the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

        Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

        Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

        Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

        Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

        Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

        bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

        bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

        bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

        164

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

        Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

        FOR r shy

        3

        4 Hold II f fully_ncis

        3

        4 Hold

        ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

        IiudeT

        Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

        I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

        Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

        p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

        wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

        ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

        Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

        T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

        p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

        A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

        Continuod 0 next Pa(O

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

        Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

        164 (conUnued)

        -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

        ) VISUA CH CK

        6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

        rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

        o ~Sati1h

        s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

        Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

        bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

        171

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

        Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

        Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

        MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

        Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

        bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

        1 Toe(l __

        - T 1at eI -

        l

        _~__ L-~~ ishy

        ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

        AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

        ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

        Continued on ne)( page

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

        Form PM 139

        171 (continued)

        ~clV1lmcnt of lin

        Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

        5 AmeoQlITir

        bull

        M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

        181

        and

        no matter how

        are trained

        DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

        11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

        Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

        8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

        lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

        the response button each time one of these it is

        the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

        where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

        be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

        ears with the ear and

        the audiometer win

        the mmr(

        and the 500 to BODO Hz are

        the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

        c~vman form

        and Services in audiometric

        health that attendance

        Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

        recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

        ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

        such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

        it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

        If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

        after

        500-8000 take no further

        500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

        advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

        check the noise exposure since the last was

        are

        audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

        errIOIJVEeS are

        take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

        IF

        Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

        161 (conlinood)

        should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

        ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

        civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

        retest the Tlnt in six months

        The referral criteria are

        a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

        is 15 dB or more at any

        wax or if there is a or

        thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

        The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

        191

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

        Section 9 - The three decibel rule

        Three decibel rule

        The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

        SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

        85 8 hours

        88 4 hours

        91 2 hours

        94 1 hour

        97 30 minutes

        100 15 minutes

        1101

        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

        Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

        Section 10 - Reference material

        References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

        2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

        3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

        4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

        5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

        6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

        7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

        8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

        9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

        10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

        11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

        12 Safety signs

        13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

        14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

        15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

        16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

        17 Noise awareness program

        18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

        19 OHS skills development training

        20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

        21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

        Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

        1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

        AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

        ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

        Related material

        1102 (ool1linuen)

        • Part 1
        • Part 2
        • Part 3
        • Part 4
        • PArt 5

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          3A-3

          Director Defence Occupational Health and Safety

          8 The Director Defence Occupational He Ith and Safety (DDOHS) is responsible for

          a the coordination of retums which are required under the Regulations from Defence Estate Organisation (DEO) and Support Command Australia (SLAUST)

          b the coord ination of any variations to the JSL

          c provide information to the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC) on plant covered by the JSL as required under the Regulations

          d provide advice to the responsible programs time frames for the provision of information required under the condilions of the JSL

          Head Defence Estate Organisation

          9 Head Defence Estate Organisation (HDEO) is responsible for those items of plant ind uded under the JSL arrangements which are Fixed Items of Plant which form part of the essential building services of building fabric at all establishments units and bases HDEO is responsib le for providing (for each establishmentluniUbase) the following information for plant and equipment for which they have management responsibility to DDOHS every twelve months

          a contact officer details (appointment address and telephone number)

          b number of plant items held by each establishmentunitlbase during the reporting periods

          c number of new plant introduced into the workplace during the reporting period

          d number of plant items modified during the reporting period

          e number of plant items disposed of during the reporting eriod and

          f number of plant registered during the reporting period (including details of the system of reg tration)

          Commander Support Command Australia

          10 Commander Support Command Australia (COMDSCAUSn is responsible for those items of plant included under the JSL arrange ents which are classed as being Mobile lIems of Plant at all ships establishments units and bases SCAUST is responsible for providing (for each shipeslablishmenUunitlbase) the following informallon for plant and equipment for which they have management responsibility 10 DDOHS every twelve months

          a contact officer details (appointment address and telephone number)

          b number of plant items held by each shipestablishmentiuniUbase dunng the reporting penods

          c number of new plant Introduced into the workplace during the reporting period

          d number of plant items modified during the reporting period

          e number of plant items disposed of during the reporting period and

          f number of plant registered during the reporting period (including details of the system of registration)

          AL1

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          3A-4

          Defence Istate Organisatlon and Commander Support Command Australia

          11 DEO and SCAUST are responsible for establishing and implementing procedures that will ensure compliance with the Regulations an thiS annex DEO and SCAUST are to en ure that procedures include the following

          a Plant subject to the JSL (Appendix 1 provides details of plant subject to JSL) DEO and SCAUST are responsible for

          1) carrying out maintenance and testing inspections in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and relevant Australian Standards on the licensed plant a least once a year or sooner if a need is identified by fo ll owing a n as s essment u nd er t a ken In accordance wit h sub-subparagraph 12i

          (2) keeping records of maintenance Inspections which afe earned out on licensed plant Tne records must include a statement to the effect that each item of plant has been maintained in a safe condition and is safe to operate

          (3) establishing and maintaining a system within each Program for registering In-house plant designs The system for registering in-house plant designs is to make provisions for recording individual plant designs (including such things as technical speCifications and drawings) and design alterations Details of those items of plant requiring registration or notification of design are provided at appendix 3 As stated in subparagraph 12g HOPE is responsible for monitoring compliance with the Regulalions however the programs are to ensure that the system once established is audited annually In addition as part of the conditions of the JSL the SReC may audit the plant design registration system at a mutually convenient time

          (4) keeping a register that contains records of how each item of licensed plant is used Appendix 4 provides details of the register The register must be updated at least every 12 months or whenever an item of plant is relocated modified etc

          (5) notifying HDPE whenever licensed plant is altered relocated disposed of or if there is a change of ownership and

          (6) notifying HOPE whenever new plant subject to the licensing provisions of the Regulations is acquired

          Commandersmanagers

          12 All plant With respect to all plant (ie as defined in paragraph 9 and including plant which is subject to a JSL) commandersmanagers are responsible for

          a protecting the health and safety of employees and others operating the plant

          b protecting the health and safety of those involved in commissioning and installing all plant

          c ensuring that plant is decommissioned dismantled conSistent with provisions under the Regulations

          and disposed of in a manner

          d provide training for all those who

          (1) operate maintain inspect or audit plant and

          (2) train others to operate maintain inspect or audit plant

          e developing safety procedures for individual items of plant

          AL1

          i

          of

          JSL

          ltI

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          3A-6

          1 Plant requiring licence in accordance with schedule 6 part 2 of the plant regulations 2 Plant licensing and design reglstrdtion respoflsibilitifs 3 Items of plant requiring registration or in accordance with schedule 6

          part 1 of the regulations 4 Plant register 5 Occupational health and safety risk nrn 6 Plant monitoringaudit plan

          AL1

          1 ANNEXATO CHAPTER 3

          20F

          2 ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

          of

          Note

          the OI5IPI81EJC on near

          g

          a lower

          Al1

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          APPENDIX 3 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

          ITEMS OF PLANT REQUIRING REGISTRATION OR NOTIFICATION OF DESIGN IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE 6 PART 1 OF THE REGULATIONS

          Item No Description of Plant

          1 Pressure equipment other than pressur piping thai have a hazard level of A B C or 0 determined in accordance with Australian Standards (AS) 3920 part 1 Pressure Equipment Manufacture-Assurance of Product Quality (ME121 Standard AMBSC)

          2 Gas cylinders covered by AS 2030

          3 Tower Cranes-I

          4 Building maintenance units

          5 Hoists with a platform movement in excess of 24 metres designed to lift people111

          6 Work boxes suspended from cranes

          7 Amusement structures covered by AS 3533 (Amusement Rides and Devices) other than class 1 structures

          8 Prefabricated scaffolding

          9 Boom-type elevating work platforms

          10 Gantry Cranes)

          (a) with a safe working load greater than 5 tonnes or

          (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goods lbl

          11 Bridge cranes

          (a) with a safe working load of 10 lannes or

          (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goodS(bl

          12 Vehicle hoists)

          13 Mast climbing work platforms)

          14 Mobile cranes with a safe working load greater than 10 10nnesI

          Notes

          (a) For the purposes or licensing any reference to cranes and hoists in schedule 6 exclude those that are manually powered elevaling work platforms or tow trucks

          (b) Dangerous goodS means dangerous goods as defined in the Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 5th edition published by the Federal Office of Road Safety in September 1992

          AL1

          Defence Occupational Health and Safe y Manual

          3A3-2

          Plant designs

          1 Employers are not to use plant hsted In this appendix unless lhat plant tias a CUfrent reg istration number which is issued by the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC)

          2 An employer may apply 10 the SReC for registration of the design of plant listed in this appendix This process invoives Ihe submission of a written application form which includes a representational drawing of the plant design a statement signed by or for Ihe manufacturer of the plant to the effect that the design of he plant complies with the provisions of the regu lations thai apply to manufacturers of plan and a statement by a design verifier wh ich states that this has been done

          Nole

          A design verifier is a competent independent person who Is responsible for advising whether the design of a plant complies with the provisIons or the regulations

          3 Registration of a plant design is subject to the following conditions

          a evidence of design registration is to be displayed on or near Ihe plant to which the design registration relates and

          b the registration number must be provided to any person who deals with the employer in relation to the plant

          4 The SRCC is to be notified whenever there is an alteration to the plant design and employees are not to use the item of plant until the SRCC has been notified However Ihe SRCC does not need to be notified of an afteration which has been carried out by a person administering a Staterremtory law that corresponds to the Act or the Regulations

          AL1

          IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

          r-~N~lfI~

          c

          4

          c

          1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

          or

          AL1

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          3A5-2

          c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

          d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

          familiar with the

          Step 2-risk assessment

          6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

          a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

          (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

          (2) consultation wilh employees

          (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

          (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

          (5) maintenance logs of plant

          (6) manuals provided with plant

          (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

          (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

          b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

          c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

          (1) very likely-could happen frequently

          (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

          (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

          (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

          d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

          (1) fatality

          (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

          (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

          (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

          (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

          AL1

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          3A5-3

          e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

          7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

          Step 3-risk control

          8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

          a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

          b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

          c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

          d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

          (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

          (2) education and training of em ployees

          (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

          (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

          e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

          (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

          (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

          (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

          (4) to supplement other control measures

          AL1

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          3A5~

          Step 4-monitoring and review

          9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

          a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

          b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

          10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

          a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

          b the design is revised or modified

          c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

          d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

          e the plant is moved

          ownership of the plant changes

          g there is a change to the workplace environment and

          h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

          Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

          AL1

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

          PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

          UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

          Program Manufacturer

          Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

          Inspected by Date

          Hazard and Source Comments

          Al1

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

          RISK TABLE

          1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

          LIKELIHOOD

          Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

          Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

          MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

          Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

          Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

          Other asset damage

          MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

          2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

          AL1

          LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

          Sitampllocahon

          Program

          Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

          Compiled by

          HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

          LIKELIHOOD

          Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

          I Date

          CONSEQUENCE

          Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

          RISK RATING

          (Sea appendix 2)

          Higtl Medium Low

          CONTROL ACTION

          1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

          1 2 ~1

          I

          I 1 i

          -g

          ~ Z -t xl

          en raquo en en m en en

          Z ~

          -t ~ o xl

          en I

          -t

          ALi

          RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

          CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

          APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

          PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

          REPORTING PERIOD

          1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

          UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

          TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

          NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

          PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

          I

          tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

          PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

          i(~l

          I

          -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

          Noles

          Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

          (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

          2971

          (e) Tower eras

          (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

          Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

          (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

          ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

          a iO ltgt IIgt

          Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

          PLANT

          in

          AS

          Cross Reference

          is to NI

          B

          at the or in the

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          38-2

          f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

          g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

          h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

          8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

          RESPONSIBILITIES

          9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

          10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

          11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

          12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

          a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

          b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

          c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

          NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

          13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

          Engineering controls

          14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

          15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

          16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

          Amber Zone~

          of

          Black time

          or 115

          A f4nwnninotinn

          Extreme Zone

          b

          a

          to

          Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

          Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

          38-6

          34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

          Compensation

          35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

          Education

          36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

          37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

          Operational areas

          38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

          Documentation

          39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

          Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

          b

          Defence OccUiJational Manual

          1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

          NOISE

          1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

          a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

          shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

          nor shall include refresher on

          c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

          d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

          3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

          Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

          APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

          WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

          ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

          EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

          MUST BE WORN

          EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

          ANNEXBTO

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

          METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

          1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

          a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

          b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

          c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

          d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

          2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

          3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

          B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

          b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

          c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

          (1) advise the employee of the test results

          (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

          (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

          protection

          (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

          Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

          387-2

          d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

          (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

          civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

          e Relest the Flr1r in six months

          4 Tile referral crlleria are

          a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

          b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

          c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

          d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

          5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

          civilian document

          Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

          APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

          3 U RULE

          1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

          SPL (dB(A)) of

          85 8 hours

          a8 4 hours

          91 2 hours

          94 1 hour

          97 30 minutes

          100 15 minutes

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

          ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

          SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

          rtwIrlv

          manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

          REFERENCES

          1 Defence

          MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

          2 Other

          3 Cross Reference

          4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

          Chapter 4 annex Radiation

          AS

          Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

          WELDING

          SYNOPSIS

          REFERENCES

          1 Defence

          W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

          2 Other

          AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

          AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

          AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

          AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

          JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

          Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

          3 Cross Reference

          1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

          5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

          7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

          FIRE SAFETY

          SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

          REFERENCES

          1 Defence

          MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

          DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

          MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

          2 Other

          AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

          AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

          AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

          AS 3504-Fire Blankets

          AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

          AS 4067-Fire Prevention

          AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

          AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

          3 Cross Reference

          Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

          38-3

          Administrative controls

          17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

          Personal protective equipment

          18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

          19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

          a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

          b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

          c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

          20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

          21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

          22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

          Noise assessments

          23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

          24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

          a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

          b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

          c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

          d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

          Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

          11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

          THERMAL CONDITIONS

          SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

          environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

          REFERENCES

          1 Defence

          DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

          OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

          DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

          If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

          2 Other

          and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

          3 Cross Reference

          8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

          112

          113

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

          CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

          NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

          Section 1 - Overview

          Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

          Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

          Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

          Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

          Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

          Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

          bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

          bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

          bull increased health care and compensation

          Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

          For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

          Continued on next page

          mAinArlA he risks to

          means

          the

          I1RIIIrlrlll and the

          118

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

          Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

          117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

          Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

          Contents This chapter contains the following sections

          Section Content

          1 Overview

          2 Specific responsibilities

          3 Noise management principles

          4 Impulse noise

          5 Warning signs

          6 The use of foam earplugs

          7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

          8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

          9 The three decibel rule

          10 Reference material

          The fnllnwinn

          124

          125

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

          Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

          Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

          When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

          Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

          bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

          bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

          bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

          When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

          Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

          Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

          Employees Employees are responsible for

          bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

          bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

          bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

          Training and skilling

          Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

          The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

          course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

          Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

          and OHS skills

          Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

          costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

          131

          132

          133

          134

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

          Section 3 - Noise management principles

          Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

          Eng ineering controls

          Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

          For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

          Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

          Administrative controls

          Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

          Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

          Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

          The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

          bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

          bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

          bull regular audiometric examinations

          Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

          Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

          Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

          135

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

          Noise assessments

          Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

          Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

          bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

          bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

          bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

          bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

          Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

          Hearing protection areas

          136

          Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

          bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

          continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

          impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

          A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

          bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

          con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

          impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

          Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

          bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

          continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

          im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

          ConllmJ8o orl next page

          137

          138

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

          Hearing protection areas

          136 (continued)

          A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

          bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

          continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

          impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

          A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

          The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

          Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

          The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

          The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

          Audiometric examinations

          Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

          bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

          bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

          Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

          ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

          139

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

          Audiometric eXaminations

          138 (conlhued)

          bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

          bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

          bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

          bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

          bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

          Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

          Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

          Education

          1310

          Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

          Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

          Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

          1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

          Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

          1312

          141

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

          Section 4 -Impulse noise

          Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

          This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

          bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

          bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

          bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

          bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

          151

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

          Section 5 - Warning signs

          Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

          HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

          MUST BE W O R N

          ( A MBER ZONE)

          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

          EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

          M UST BE W ORN

          C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

          r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

          E AH MUFFS ]

          M UST BE WOAN

          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

          l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

          MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

          ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

          161

          162

          163

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

          Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

          Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

          the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

          Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

          Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

          Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

          Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

          Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

          bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

          bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

          bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

          164

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

          Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

          FOR r shy

          3

          4 Hold II f fully_ncis

          3

          4 Hold

          ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

          IiudeT

          Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

          I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

          Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

          p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

          wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

          ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

          Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

          T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

          p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

          A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

          Continuod 0 next Pa(O

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

          Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

          164 (conUnued)

          -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

          ) VISUA CH CK

          6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

          rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

          o ~Sati1h

          s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

          Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

          bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

          171

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

          Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

          Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

          MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

          Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

          bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

          1 Toe(l __

          - T 1at eI -

          l

          _~__ L-~~ ishy

          ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

          AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

          ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

          Continued on ne)( page

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

          Form PM 139

          171 (continued)

          ~clV1lmcnt of lin

          Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

          5 AmeoQlITir

          bull

          M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

          181

          and

          no matter how

          are trained

          DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

          11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

          Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

          8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

          lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

          the response button each time one of these it is

          the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

          where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

          be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

          ears with the ear and

          the audiometer win

          the mmr(

          and the 500 to BODO Hz are

          the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

          c~vman form

          and Services in audiometric

          health that attendance

          Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

          recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

          ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

          such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

          it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

          If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

          after

          500-8000 take no further

          500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

          advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

          check the noise exposure since the last was

          are

          audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

          errIOIJVEeS are

          take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

          IF

          Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

          161 (conlinood)

          should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

          ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

          civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

          retest the Tlnt in six months

          The referral criteria are

          a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

          is 15 dB or more at any

          wax or if there is a or

          thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

          The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

          191

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

          Section 9 - The three decibel rule

          Three decibel rule

          The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

          SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

          85 8 hours

          88 4 hours

          91 2 hours

          94 1 hour

          97 30 minutes

          100 15 minutes

          1101

          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

          Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

          Section 10 - Reference material

          References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

          2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

          3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

          4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

          5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

          6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

          7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

          8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

          9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

          10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

          11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

          12 Safety signs

          13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

          14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

          15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

          16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

          17 Noise awareness program

          18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

          19 OHS skills development training

          20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

          21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

          Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

          1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

          AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

          ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

          Related material

          1102 (ool1linuen)

          • Part 1
          • Part 2
          • Part 3
          • Part 4
          • PArt 5

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            3A-4

            Defence Istate Organisatlon and Commander Support Command Australia

            11 DEO and SCAUST are responsible for establishing and implementing procedures that will ensure compliance with the Regulations an thiS annex DEO and SCAUST are to en ure that procedures include the following

            a Plant subject to the JSL (Appendix 1 provides details of plant subject to JSL) DEO and SCAUST are responsible for

            1) carrying out maintenance and testing inspections in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and relevant Australian Standards on the licensed plant a least once a year or sooner if a need is identified by fo ll owing a n as s essment u nd er t a ken In accordance wit h sub-subparagraph 12i

            (2) keeping records of maintenance Inspections which afe earned out on licensed plant Tne records must include a statement to the effect that each item of plant has been maintained in a safe condition and is safe to operate

            (3) establishing and maintaining a system within each Program for registering In-house plant designs The system for registering in-house plant designs is to make provisions for recording individual plant designs (including such things as technical speCifications and drawings) and design alterations Details of those items of plant requiring registration or notification of design are provided at appendix 3 As stated in subparagraph 12g HOPE is responsible for monitoring compliance with the Regulalions however the programs are to ensure that the system once established is audited annually In addition as part of the conditions of the JSL the SReC may audit the plant design registration system at a mutually convenient time

            (4) keeping a register that contains records of how each item of licensed plant is used Appendix 4 provides details of the register The register must be updated at least every 12 months or whenever an item of plant is relocated modified etc

            (5) notifying HDPE whenever licensed plant is altered relocated disposed of or if there is a change of ownership and

            (6) notifying HOPE whenever new plant subject to the licensing provisions of the Regulations is acquired

            Commandersmanagers

            12 All plant With respect to all plant (ie as defined in paragraph 9 and including plant which is subject to a JSL) commandersmanagers are responsible for

            a protecting the health and safety of employees and others operating the plant

            b protecting the health and safety of those involved in commissioning and installing all plant

            c ensuring that plant is decommissioned dismantled conSistent with provisions under the Regulations

            and disposed of in a manner

            d provide training for all those who

            (1) operate maintain inspect or audit plant and

            (2) train others to operate maintain inspect or audit plant

            e developing safety procedures for individual items of plant

            AL1

            i

            of

            JSL

            ltI

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            3A-6

            1 Plant requiring licence in accordance with schedule 6 part 2 of the plant regulations 2 Plant licensing and design reglstrdtion respoflsibilitifs 3 Items of plant requiring registration or in accordance with schedule 6

            part 1 of the regulations 4 Plant register 5 Occupational health and safety risk nrn 6 Plant monitoringaudit plan

            AL1

            1 ANNEXATO CHAPTER 3

            20F

            2 ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

            of

            Note

            the OI5IPI81EJC on near

            g

            a lower

            Al1

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            APPENDIX 3 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

            ITEMS OF PLANT REQUIRING REGISTRATION OR NOTIFICATION OF DESIGN IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE 6 PART 1 OF THE REGULATIONS

            Item No Description of Plant

            1 Pressure equipment other than pressur piping thai have a hazard level of A B C or 0 determined in accordance with Australian Standards (AS) 3920 part 1 Pressure Equipment Manufacture-Assurance of Product Quality (ME121 Standard AMBSC)

            2 Gas cylinders covered by AS 2030

            3 Tower Cranes-I

            4 Building maintenance units

            5 Hoists with a platform movement in excess of 24 metres designed to lift people111

            6 Work boxes suspended from cranes

            7 Amusement structures covered by AS 3533 (Amusement Rides and Devices) other than class 1 structures

            8 Prefabricated scaffolding

            9 Boom-type elevating work platforms

            10 Gantry Cranes)

            (a) with a safe working load greater than 5 tonnes or

            (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goods lbl

            11 Bridge cranes

            (a) with a safe working load of 10 lannes or

            (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goodS(bl

            12 Vehicle hoists)

            13 Mast climbing work platforms)

            14 Mobile cranes with a safe working load greater than 10 10nnesI

            Notes

            (a) For the purposes or licensing any reference to cranes and hoists in schedule 6 exclude those that are manually powered elevaling work platforms or tow trucks

            (b) Dangerous goodS means dangerous goods as defined in the Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 5th edition published by the Federal Office of Road Safety in September 1992

            AL1

            Defence Occupational Health and Safe y Manual

            3A3-2

            Plant designs

            1 Employers are not to use plant hsted In this appendix unless lhat plant tias a CUfrent reg istration number which is issued by the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC)

            2 An employer may apply 10 the SReC for registration of the design of plant listed in this appendix This process invoives Ihe submission of a written application form which includes a representational drawing of the plant design a statement signed by or for Ihe manufacturer of the plant to the effect that the design of he plant complies with the provisions of the regu lations thai apply to manufacturers of plan and a statement by a design verifier wh ich states that this has been done

            Nole

            A design verifier is a competent independent person who Is responsible for advising whether the design of a plant complies with the provisIons or the regulations

            3 Registration of a plant design is subject to the following conditions

            a evidence of design registration is to be displayed on or near Ihe plant to which the design registration relates and

            b the registration number must be provided to any person who deals with the employer in relation to the plant

            4 The SRCC is to be notified whenever there is an alteration to the plant design and employees are not to use the item of plant until the SRCC has been notified However Ihe SRCC does not need to be notified of an afteration which has been carried out by a person administering a Staterremtory law that corresponds to the Act or the Regulations

            AL1

            IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

            r-~N~lfI~

            c

            4

            c

            1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

            or

            AL1

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            3A5-2

            c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

            d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

            familiar with the

            Step 2-risk assessment

            6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

            a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

            (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

            (2) consultation wilh employees

            (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

            (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

            (5) maintenance logs of plant

            (6) manuals provided with plant

            (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

            (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

            b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

            c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

            (1) very likely-could happen frequently

            (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

            (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

            (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

            d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

            (1) fatality

            (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

            (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

            (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

            (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

            AL1

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            3A5-3

            e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

            7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

            Step 3-risk control

            8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

            a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

            b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

            c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

            d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

            (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

            (2) education and training of em ployees

            (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

            (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

            e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

            (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

            (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

            (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

            (4) to supplement other control measures

            AL1

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            3A5~

            Step 4-monitoring and review

            9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

            a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

            b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

            10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

            a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

            b the design is revised or modified

            c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

            d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

            e the plant is moved

            ownership of the plant changes

            g there is a change to the workplace environment and

            h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

            Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

            AL1

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

            PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

            UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

            Program Manufacturer

            Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

            Inspected by Date

            Hazard and Source Comments

            Al1

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

            RISK TABLE

            1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

            LIKELIHOOD

            Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

            Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

            MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

            Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

            Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

            Other asset damage

            MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

            2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

            AL1

            LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

            Sitampllocahon

            Program

            Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

            Compiled by

            HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

            LIKELIHOOD

            Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

            I Date

            CONSEQUENCE

            Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

            RISK RATING

            (Sea appendix 2)

            Higtl Medium Low

            CONTROL ACTION

            1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

            1 2 ~1

            I

            I 1 i

            -g

            ~ Z -t xl

            en raquo en en m en en

            Z ~

            -t ~ o xl

            en I

            -t

            ALi

            RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

            CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

            APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

            PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

            REPORTING PERIOD

            1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

            UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

            TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

            NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

            PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

            I

            tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

            PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

            i(~l

            I

            -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

            Noles

            Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

            (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

            2971

            (e) Tower eras

            (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

            Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

            (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

            ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

            a iO ltgt IIgt

            Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

            PLANT

            in

            AS

            Cross Reference

            is to NI

            B

            at the or in the

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            38-2

            f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

            g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

            h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

            8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

            RESPONSIBILITIES

            9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

            10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

            11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

            12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

            a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

            b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

            c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

            NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

            13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

            Engineering controls

            14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

            15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

            16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

            Amber Zone~

            of

            Black time

            or 115

            A f4nwnninotinn

            Extreme Zone

            b

            a

            to

            Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

            Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

            38-6

            34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

            Compensation

            35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

            Education

            36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

            37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

            Operational areas

            38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

            Documentation

            39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

            Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

            b

            Defence OccUiJational Manual

            1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

            NOISE

            1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

            a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

            shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

            nor shall include refresher on

            c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

            d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

            3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

            Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

            APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

            WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

            ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

            EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

            MUST BE WORN

            EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

            ANNEXBTO

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

            METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

            1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

            a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

            b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

            c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

            d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

            2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

            3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

            B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

            b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

            c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

            (1) advise the employee of the test results

            (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

            (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

            protection

            (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

            Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

            387-2

            d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

            (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

            civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

            e Relest the Flr1r in six months

            4 Tile referral crlleria are

            a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

            b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

            c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

            d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

            5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

            civilian document

            Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

            APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

            3 U RULE

            1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

            SPL (dB(A)) of

            85 8 hours

            a8 4 hours

            91 2 hours

            94 1 hour

            97 30 minutes

            100 15 minutes

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

            ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

            SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

            rtwIrlv

            manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

            REFERENCES

            1 Defence

            MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

            2 Other

            3 Cross Reference

            4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

            Chapter 4 annex Radiation

            AS

            Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

            WELDING

            SYNOPSIS

            REFERENCES

            1 Defence

            W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

            2 Other

            AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

            AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

            AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

            AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

            JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

            Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

            3 Cross Reference

            1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

            5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

            7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

            FIRE SAFETY

            SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

            REFERENCES

            1 Defence

            MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

            DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

            MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

            2 Other

            AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

            AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

            AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

            AS 3504-Fire Blankets

            AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

            AS 4067-Fire Prevention

            AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

            AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

            3 Cross Reference

            Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

            38-3

            Administrative controls

            17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

            Personal protective equipment

            18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

            19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

            a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

            b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

            c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

            20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

            21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

            22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

            Noise assessments

            23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

            24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

            a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

            b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

            c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

            d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

            Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

            11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

            THERMAL CONDITIONS

            SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

            environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

            REFERENCES

            1 Defence

            DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

            OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

            DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

            If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

            2 Other

            and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

            3 Cross Reference

            8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

            112

            113

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

            CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

            NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

            Section 1 - Overview

            Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

            Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

            Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

            Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

            Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

            Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

            bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

            bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

            bull increased health care and compensation

            Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

            For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

            Continued on next page

            mAinArlA he risks to

            means

            the

            I1RIIIrlrlll and the

            118

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

            Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

            117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

            Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

            Contents This chapter contains the following sections

            Section Content

            1 Overview

            2 Specific responsibilities

            3 Noise management principles

            4 Impulse noise

            5 Warning signs

            6 The use of foam earplugs

            7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

            8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

            9 The three decibel rule

            10 Reference material

            The fnllnwinn

            124

            125

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

            Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

            Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

            When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

            Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

            bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

            bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

            bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

            When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

            Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

            Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

            Employees Employees are responsible for

            bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

            bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

            bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

            Training and skilling

            Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

            The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

            course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

            Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

            and OHS skills

            Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

            costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

            131

            132

            133

            134

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

            Section 3 - Noise management principles

            Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

            Eng ineering controls

            Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

            For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

            Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

            Administrative controls

            Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

            Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

            Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

            The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

            bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

            bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

            bull regular audiometric examinations

            Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

            Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

            Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

            135

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

            Noise assessments

            Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

            Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

            bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

            bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

            bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

            bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

            Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

            Hearing protection areas

            136

            Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

            bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

            continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

            impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

            A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

            bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

            con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

            impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

            Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

            bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

            continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

            im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

            ConllmJ8o orl next page

            137

            138

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

            Hearing protection areas

            136 (continued)

            A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

            bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

            continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

            impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

            A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

            The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

            Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

            The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

            The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

            Audiometric examinations

            Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

            bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

            bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

            Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

            ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

            139

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

            Audiometric eXaminations

            138 (conlhued)

            bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

            bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

            bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

            bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

            bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

            Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

            Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

            Education

            1310

            Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

            Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

            Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

            1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

            Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

            1312

            141

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

            Section 4 -Impulse noise

            Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

            This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

            bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

            bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

            bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

            bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

            151

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

            Section 5 - Warning signs

            Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

            HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

            MUST BE W O R N

            ( A MBER ZONE)

            HEARING PROTECTION AREA

            EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

            M UST BE W ORN

            C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

            r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

            E AH MUFFS ]

            M UST BE WOAN

            HEARING PROTECTION AREA

            l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

            MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

            ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

            161

            162

            163

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

            Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

            Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

            the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

            Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

            Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

            Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

            Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

            Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

            bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

            bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

            bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

            164

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

            Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

            FOR r shy

            3

            4 Hold II f fully_ncis

            3

            4 Hold

            ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

            IiudeT

            Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

            I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

            Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

            p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

            wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

            ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

            Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

            T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

            p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

            A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

            Continuod 0 next Pa(O

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

            Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

            164 (conUnued)

            -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

            ) VISUA CH CK

            6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

            rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

            o ~Sati1h

            s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

            Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

            bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

            171

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

            Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

            Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

            MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

            Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

            bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

            1 Toe(l __

            - T 1at eI -

            l

            _~__ L-~~ ishy

            ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

            AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

            ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

            Continued on ne)( page

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

            Form PM 139

            171 (continued)

            ~clV1lmcnt of lin

            Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

            5 AmeoQlITir

            bull

            M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

            181

            and

            no matter how

            are trained

            DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

            11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

            Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

            8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

            lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

            the response button each time one of these it is

            the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

            where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

            be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

            ears with the ear and

            the audiometer win

            the mmr(

            and the 500 to BODO Hz are

            the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

            c~vman form

            and Services in audiometric

            health that attendance

            Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

            recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

            ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

            such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

            it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

            If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

            after

            500-8000 take no further

            500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

            advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

            check the noise exposure since the last was

            are

            audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

            errIOIJVEeS are

            take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

            IF

            Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

            161 (conlinood)

            should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

            ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

            civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

            retest the Tlnt in six months

            The referral criteria are

            a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

            is 15 dB or more at any

            wax or if there is a or

            thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

            The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

            191

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

            Section 9 - The three decibel rule

            Three decibel rule

            The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

            SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

            85 8 hours

            88 4 hours

            91 2 hours

            94 1 hour

            97 30 minutes

            100 15 minutes

            1101

            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

            Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

            Section 10 - Reference material

            References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

            2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

            3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

            4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

            5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

            6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

            7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

            8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

            9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

            10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

            11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

            12 Safety signs

            13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

            14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

            15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

            16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

            17 Noise awareness program

            18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

            19 OHS skills development training

            20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

            21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

            Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

            1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

            AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

            ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

            Related material

            1102 (ool1linuen)

            • Part 1
            • Part 2
            • Part 3
            • Part 4
            • PArt 5

              i

              of

              JSL

              ltI

              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

              3A-6

              1 Plant requiring licence in accordance with schedule 6 part 2 of the plant regulations 2 Plant licensing and design reglstrdtion respoflsibilitifs 3 Items of plant requiring registration or in accordance with schedule 6

              part 1 of the regulations 4 Plant register 5 Occupational health and safety risk nrn 6 Plant monitoringaudit plan

              AL1

              1 ANNEXATO CHAPTER 3

              20F

              2 ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

              of

              Note

              the OI5IPI81EJC on near

              g

              a lower

              Al1

              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

              APPENDIX 3 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

              ITEMS OF PLANT REQUIRING REGISTRATION OR NOTIFICATION OF DESIGN IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE 6 PART 1 OF THE REGULATIONS

              Item No Description of Plant

              1 Pressure equipment other than pressur piping thai have a hazard level of A B C or 0 determined in accordance with Australian Standards (AS) 3920 part 1 Pressure Equipment Manufacture-Assurance of Product Quality (ME121 Standard AMBSC)

              2 Gas cylinders covered by AS 2030

              3 Tower Cranes-I

              4 Building maintenance units

              5 Hoists with a platform movement in excess of 24 metres designed to lift people111

              6 Work boxes suspended from cranes

              7 Amusement structures covered by AS 3533 (Amusement Rides and Devices) other than class 1 structures

              8 Prefabricated scaffolding

              9 Boom-type elevating work platforms

              10 Gantry Cranes)

              (a) with a safe working load greater than 5 tonnes or

              (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goods lbl

              11 Bridge cranes

              (a) with a safe working load of 10 lannes or

              (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goodS(bl

              12 Vehicle hoists)

              13 Mast climbing work platforms)

              14 Mobile cranes with a safe working load greater than 10 10nnesI

              Notes

              (a) For the purposes or licensing any reference to cranes and hoists in schedule 6 exclude those that are manually powered elevaling work platforms or tow trucks

              (b) Dangerous goodS means dangerous goods as defined in the Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 5th edition published by the Federal Office of Road Safety in September 1992

              AL1

              Defence Occupational Health and Safe y Manual

              3A3-2

              Plant designs

              1 Employers are not to use plant hsted In this appendix unless lhat plant tias a CUfrent reg istration number which is issued by the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC)

              2 An employer may apply 10 the SReC for registration of the design of plant listed in this appendix This process invoives Ihe submission of a written application form which includes a representational drawing of the plant design a statement signed by or for Ihe manufacturer of the plant to the effect that the design of he plant complies with the provisions of the regu lations thai apply to manufacturers of plan and a statement by a design verifier wh ich states that this has been done

              Nole

              A design verifier is a competent independent person who Is responsible for advising whether the design of a plant complies with the provisIons or the regulations

              3 Registration of a plant design is subject to the following conditions

              a evidence of design registration is to be displayed on or near Ihe plant to which the design registration relates and

              b the registration number must be provided to any person who deals with the employer in relation to the plant

              4 The SRCC is to be notified whenever there is an alteration to the plant design and employees are not to use the item of plant until the SRCC has been notified However Ihe SRCC does not need to be notified of an afteration which has been carried out by a person administering a Staterremtory law that corresponds to the Act or the Regulations

              AL1

              IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

              r-~N~lfI~

              c

              4

              c

              1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

              or

              AL1

              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

              3A5-2

              c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

              d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

              familiar with the

              Step 2-risk assessment

              6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

              a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

              (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

              (2) consultation wilh employees

              (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

              (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

              (5) maintenance logs of plant

              (6) manuals provided with plant

              (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

              (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

              b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

              c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

              (1) very likely-could happen frequently

              (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

              (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

              (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

              d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

              (1) fatality

              (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

              (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

              (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

              (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

              AL1

              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

              3A5-3

              e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

              7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

              Step 3-risk control

              8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

              a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

              b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

              c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

              d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

              (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

              (2) education and training of em ployees

              (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

              (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

              e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

              (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

              (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

              (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

              (4) to supplement other control measures

              AL1

              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

              3A5~

              Step 4-monitoring and review

              9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

              a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

              b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

              10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

              a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

              b the design is revised or modified

              c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

              d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

              e the plant is moved

              ownership of the plant changes

              g there is a change to the workplace environment and

              h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

              Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

              AL1

              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

              ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

              PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

              UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

              Program Manufacturer

              Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

              Inspected by Date

              Hazard and Source Comments

              Al1

              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

              ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

              RISK TABLE

              1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

              LIKELIHOOD

              Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

              Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

              MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

              Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

              Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

              Other asset damage

              MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

              2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

              AL1

              LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

              Sitampllocahon

              Program

              Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

              Compiled by

              HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

              LIKELIHOOD

              Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

              I Date

              CONSEQUENCE

              Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

              RISK RATING

              (Sea appendix 2)

              Higtl Medium Low

              CONTROL ACTION

              1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

              1 2 ~1

              I

              I 1 i

              -g

              ~ Z -t xl

              en raquo en en m en en

              Z ~

              -t ~ o xl

              en I

              -t

              ALi

              RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

              CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

              APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

              PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

              REPORTING PERIOD

              1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

              UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

              TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

              NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

              PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

              I

              tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

              PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

              i(~l

              I

              -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

              Noles

              Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

              (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

              2971

              (e) Tower eras

              (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

              Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

              (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

              ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

              a iO ltgt IIgt

              Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

              PLANT

              in

              AS

              Cross Reference

              is to NI

              B

              at the or in the

              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

              38-2

              f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

              g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

              h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

              8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

              RESPONSIBILITIES

              9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

              10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

              11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

              12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

              a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

              b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

              c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

              NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

              13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

              Engineering controls

              14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

              15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

              16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

              Amber Zone~

              of

              Black time

              or 115

              A f4nwnninotinn

              Extreme Zone

              b

              a

              to

              Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

              Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

              38-6

              34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

              Compensation

              35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

              Education

              36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

              37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

              Operational areas

              38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

              Documentation

              39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

              Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

              b

              Defence OccUiJational Manual

              1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

              NOISE

              1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

              a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

              shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

              nor shall include refresher on

              c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

              d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

              3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

              Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

              APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

              WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

              ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

              EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

              MUST BE WORN

              EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

              ANNEXBTO

              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

              APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

              METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

              1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

              a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

              b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

              c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

              d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

              2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

              3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

              B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

              b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

              c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

              (1) advise the employee of the test results

              (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

              (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

              protection

              (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

              Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

              387-2

              d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

              (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

              civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

              e Relest the Flr1r in six months

              4 Tile referral crlleria are

              a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

              b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

              c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

              d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

              5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

              civilian document

              Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

              APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

              3 U RULE

              1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

              SPL (dB(A)) of

              85 8 hours

              a8 4 hours

              91 2 hours

              94 1 hour

              97 30 minutes

              100 15 minutes

              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

              ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

              ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

              SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

              rtwIrlv

              manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

              REFERENCES

              1 Defence

              MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

              2 Other

              3 Cross Reference

              4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

              Chapter 4 annex Radiation

              AS

              Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

              WELDING

              SYNOPSIS

              REFERENCES

              1 Defence

              W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

              2 Other

              AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

              AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

              AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

              AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

              JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

              Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

              3 Cross Reference

              1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

              5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

              7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

              ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

              FIRE SAFETY

              SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

              REFERENCES

              1 Defence

              MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

              DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

              MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

              2 Other

              AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

              AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

              AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

              AS 3504-Fire Blankets

              AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

              AS 4067-Fire Prevention

              AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

              AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

              3 Cross Reference

              Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

              38-3

              Administrative controls

              17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

              Personal protective equipment

              18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

              19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

              a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

              b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

              c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

              20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

              21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

              22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

              Noise assessments

              23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

              24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

              a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

              b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

              c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

              d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

              Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

              11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

              THERMAL CONDITIONS

              SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

              environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

              REFERENCES

              1 Defence

              DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

              OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

              DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

              If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

              2 Other

              and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

              3 Cross Reference

              8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

              112

              113

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

              CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

              NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

              Section 1 - Overview

              Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

              Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

              Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

              Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

              Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

              Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

              bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

              bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

              bull increased health care and compensation

              Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

              For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

              Continued on next page

              mAinArlA he risks to

              means

              the

              I1RIIIrlrlll and the

              118

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

              Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

              117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

              Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

              Contents This chapter contains the following sections

              Section Content

              1 Overview

              2 Specific responsibilities

              3 Noise management principles

              4 Impulse noise

              5 Warning signs

              6 The use of foam earplugs

              7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

              8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

              9 The three decibel rule

              10 Reference material

              The fnllnwinn

              124

              125

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

              Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

              Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

              When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

              Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

              bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

              bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

              bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

              When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

              Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

              Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

              Employees Employees are responsible for

              bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

              bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

              bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

              Training and skilling

              Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

              The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

              course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

              Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

              and OHS skills

              Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

              costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

              131

              132

              133

              134

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

              Section 3 - Noise management principles

              Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

              Eng ineering controls

              Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

              For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

              Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

              Administrative controls

              Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

              Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

              Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

              The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

              bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

              bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

              bull regular audiometric examinations

              Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

              Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

              Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

              135

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

              Noise assessments

              Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

              Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

              bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

              bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

              bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

              bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

              Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

              Hearing protection areas

              136

              Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

              bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

              continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

              impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

              A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

              bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

              con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

              impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

              Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

              bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

              continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

              im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

              ConllmJ8o orl next page

              137

              138

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

              Hearing protection areas

              136 (continued)

              A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

              bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

              continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

              impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

              A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

              The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

              Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

              The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

              The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

              Audiometric examinations

              Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

              bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

              bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

              Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

              ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

              139

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

              Audiometric eXaminations

              138 (conlhued)

              bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

              bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

              bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

              bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

              bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

              Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

              Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

              Education

              1310

              Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

              Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

              Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

              1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

              Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

              1312

              141

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

              Section 4 -Impulse noise

              Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

              This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

              bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

              bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

              bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

              bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

              151

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

              Section 5 - Warning signs

              Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

              HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

              MUST BE W O R N

              ( A MBER ZONE)

              HEARING PROTECTION AREA

              EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

              M UST BE W ORN

              C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

              r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

              E AH MUFFS ]

              M UST BE WOAN

              HEARING PROTECTION AREA

              l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

              MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

              ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

              161

              162

              163

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

              Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

              Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

              the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

              Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

              Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

              Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

              Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

              Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

              bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

              bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

              bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

              164

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

              Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

              FOR r shy

              3

              4 Hold II f fully_ncis

              3

              4 Hold

              ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

              IiudeT

              Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

              I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

              Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

              p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

              wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

              ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

              Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

              T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

              p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

              A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

              Continuod 0 next Pa(O

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

              Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

              164 (conUnued)

              -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

              ) VISUA CH CK

              6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

              rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

              o ~Sati1h

              s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

              Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

              bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

              171

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

              Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

              Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

              MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

              Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

              bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

              1 Toe(l __

              - T 1at eI -

              l

              _~__ L-~~ ishy

              ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

              AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

              ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

              Continued on ne)( page

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

              Form PM 139

              171 (continued)

              ~clV1lmcnt of lin

              Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

              5 AmeoQlITir

              bull

              M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

              181

              and

              no matter how

              are trained

              DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

              11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

              Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

              8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

              lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

              the response button each time one of these it is

              the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

              where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

              be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

              ears with the ear and

              the audiometer win

              the mmr(

              and the 500 to BODO Hz are

              the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

              c~vman form

              and Services in audiometric

              health that attendance

              Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

              recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

              ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

              such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

              it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

              If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

              after

              500-8000 take no further

              500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

              advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

              check the noise exposure since the last was

              are

              audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

              errIOIJVEeS are

              take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

              IF

              Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

              161 (conlinood)

              should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

              ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

              civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

              retest the Tlnt in six months

              The referral criteria are

              a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

              is 15 dB or more at any

              wax or if there is a or

              thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

              The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

              191

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

              Section 9 - The three decibel rule

              Three decibel rule

              The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

              SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

              85 8 hours

              88 4 hours

              91 2 hours

              94 1 hour

              97 30 minutes

              100 15 minutes

              1101

              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

              Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

              Section 10 - Reference material

              References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

              2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

              3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

              4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

              5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

              6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

              7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

              8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

              9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

              10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

              11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

              12 Safety signs

              13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

              14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

              15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

              16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

              17 Noise awareness program

              18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

              19 OHS skills development training

              20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

              21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

              Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

              1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

              AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

              ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

              Related material

              1102 (ool1linuen)

              • Part 1
              • Part 2
              • Part 3
              • Part 4
              • PArt 5

                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                3A-6

                1 Plant requiring licence in accordance with schedule 6 part 2 of the plant regulations 2 Plant licensing and design reglstrdtion respoflsibilitifs 3 Items of plant requiring registration or in accordance with schedule 6

                part 1 of the regulations 4 Plant register 5 Occupational health and safety risk nrn 6 Plant monitoringaudit plan

                AL1

                1 ANNEXATO CHAPTER 3

                20F

                2 ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                of

                Note

                the OI5IPI81EJC on near

                g

                a lower

                Al1

                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                APPENDIX 3 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                ITEMS OF PLANT REQUIRING REGISTRATION OR NOTIFICATION OF DESIGN IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE 6 PART 1 OF THE REGULATIONS

                Item No Description of Plant

                1 Pressure equipment other than pressur piping thai have a hazard level of A B C or 0 determined in accordance with Australian Standards (AS) 3920 part 1 Pressure Equipment Manufacture-Assurance of Product Quality (ME121 Standard AMBSC)

                2 Gas cylinders covered by AS 2030

                3 Tower Cranes-I

                4 Building maintenance units

                5 Hoists with a platform movement in excess of 24 metres designed to lift people111

                6 Work boxes suspended from cranes

                7 Amusement structures covered by AS 3533 (Amusement Rides and Devices) other than class 1 structures

                8 Prefabricated scaffolding

                9 Boom-type elevating work platforms

                10 Gantry Cranes)

                (a) with a safe working load greater than 5 tonnes or

                (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goods lbl

                11 Bridge cranes

                (a) with a safe working load of 10 lannes or

                (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goodS(bl

                12 Vehicle hoists)

                13 Mast climbing work platforms)

                14 Mobile cranes with a safe working load greater than 10 10nnesI

                Notes

                (a) For the purposes or licensing any reference to cranes and hoists in schedule 6 exclude those that are manually powered elevaling work platforms or tow trucks

                (b) Dangerous goodS means dangerous goods as defined in the Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 5th edition published by the Federal Office of Road Safety in September 1992

                AL1

                Defence Occupational Health and Safe y Manual

                3A3-2

                Plant designs

                1 Employers are not to use plant hsted In this appendix unless lhat plant tias a CUfrent reg istration number which is issued by the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC)

                2 An employer may apply 10 the SReC for registration of the design of plant listed in this appendix This process invoives Ihe submission of a written application form which includes a representational drawing of the plant design a statement signed by or for Ihe manufacturer of the plant to the effect that the design of he plant complies with the provisions of the regu lations thai apply to manufacturers of plan and a statement by a design verifier wh ich states that this has been done

                Nole

                A design verifier is a competent independent person who Is responsible for advising whether the design of a plant complies with the provisIons or the regulations

                3 Registration of a plant design is subject to the following conditions

                a evidence of design registration is to be displayed on or near Ihe plant to which the design registration relates and

                b the registration number must be provided to any person who deals with the employer in relation to the plant

                4 The SRCC is to be notified whenever there is an alteration to the plant design and employees are not to use the item of plant until the SRCC has been notified However Ihe SRCC does not need to be notified of an afteration which has been carried out by a person administering a Staterremtory law that corresponds to the Act or the Regulations

                AL1

                IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

                r-~N~lfI~

                c

                4

                c

                1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

                or

                AL1

                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                3A5-2

                c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

                d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

                familiar with the

                Step 2-risk assessment

                6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

                a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

                (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

                (2) consultation wilh employees

                (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

                (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

                (5) maintenance logs of plant

                (6) manuals provided with plant

                (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

                (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

                b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

                c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

                (1) very likely-could happen frequently

                (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

                (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

                (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

                d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

                (1) fatality

                (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

                (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

                (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

                (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

                AL1

                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                3A5-3

                e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

                7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

                Step 3-risk control

                8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

                a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

                b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

                c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

                d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

                (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

                (2) education and training of em ployees

                (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

                (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

                e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

                (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

                (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

                (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

                (4) to supplement other control measures

                AL1

                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                3A5~

                Step 4-monitoring and review

                9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

                a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

                b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

                10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

                a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

                b the design is revised or modified

                c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

                d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

                e the plant is moved

                ownership of the plant changes

                g there is a change to the workplace environment and

                h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

                Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

                AL1

                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

                UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

                Program Manufacturer

                Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

                Inspected by Date

                Hazard and Source Comments

                Al1

                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                RISK TABLE

                1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

                LIKELIHOOD

                Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

                Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

                Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

                Other asset damage

                MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

                2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

                AL1

                LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                Sitampllocahon

                Program

                Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                Compiled by

                HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                LIKELIHOOD

                Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                I Date

                CONSEQUENCE

                Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                RISK RATING

                (Sea appendix 2)

                Higtl Medium Low

                CONTROL ACTION

                1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                1 2 ~1

                I

                I 1 i

                -g

                ~ Z -t xl

                en raquo en en m en en

                Z ~

                -t ~ o xl

                en I

                -t

                ALi

                RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                REPORTING PERIOD

                1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                I

                tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                i(~l

                I

                -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                Noles

                Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                2971

                (e) Tower eras

                (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                a iO ltgt IIgt

                Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                PLANT

                in

                AS

                Cross Reference

                is to NI

                B

                at the or in the

                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                38-2

                f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                RESPONSIBILITIES

                9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                Engineering controls

                14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                Amber Zone~

                of

                Black time

                or 115

                A f4nwnninotinn

                Extreme Zone

                b

                a

                to

                Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                38-6

                34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                Compensation

                35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                Education

                36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                Operational areas

                38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                Documentation

                39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                b

                Defence OccUiJational Manual

                1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                NOISE

                1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                nor shall include refresher on

                c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                MUST BE WORN

                EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                ANNEXBTO

                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                (1) advise the employee of the test results

                (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                protection

                (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                387-2

                d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                4 Tile referral crlleria are

                a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                civilian document

                Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                3 U RULE

                1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                SPL (dB(A)) of

                85 8 hours

                a8 4 hours

                91 2 hours

                94 1 hour

                97 30 minutes

                100 15 minutes

                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                rtwIrlv

                manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                REFERENCES

                1 Defence

                MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                2 Other

                3 Cross Reference

                4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                AS

                Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                WELDING

                SYNOPSIS

                REFERENCES

                1 Defence

                W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                2 Other

                AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                3 Cross Reference

                1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                FIRE SAFETY

                SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                REFERENCES

                1 Defence

                MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                2 Other

                AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                3 Cross Reference

                Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                38-3

                Administrative controls

                17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                Personal protective equipment

                18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                Noise assessments

                23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                THERMAL CONDITIONS

                SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                REFERENCES

                1 Defence

                DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                2 Other

                and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                3 Cross Reference

                8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                112

                113

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                Section 1 - Overview

                Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                bull increased health care and compensation

                Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                Continued on next page

                mAinArlA he risks to

                means

                the

                I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                118

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                Section Content

                1 Overview

                2 Specific responsibilities

                3 Noise management principles

                4 Impulse noise

                5 Warning signs

                6 The use of foam earplugs

                7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                9 The three decibel rule

                10 Reference material

                The fnllnwinn

                124

                125

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                Employees Employees are responsible for

                bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                Training and skilling

                Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                and OHS skills

                Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                131

                132

                133

                134

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                Section 3 - Noise management principles

                Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                Eng ineering controls

                Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                Administrative controls

                Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                bull regular audiometric examinations

                Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                135

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                Noise assessments

                Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                Hearing protection areas

                136

                Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                ConllmJ8o orl next page

                137

                138

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                Hearing protection areas

                136 (continued)

                A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                Audiometric examinations

                Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                139

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                Audiometric eXaminations

                138 (conlhued)

                bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                Education

                1310

                Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                1312

                141

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                Section 4 -Impulse noise

                Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                151

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                Section 5 - Warning signs

                Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                MUST BE W O R N

                ( A MBER ZONE)

                HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                M UST BE W ORN

                C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                E AH MUFFS ]

                M UST BE WOAN

                HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                161

                162

                163

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                164

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                FOR r shy

                3

                4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                3

                4 Hold

                ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                IiudeT

                Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                164 (conUnued)

                -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                ) VISUA CH CK

                6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                o ~Sati1h

                s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                171

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                1 Toe(l __

                - T 1at eI -

                l

                _~__ L-~~ ishy

                ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                Continued on ne)( page

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                Form PM 139

                171 (continued)

                ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                5 AmeoQlITir

                bull

                M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                181

                and

                no matter how

                are trained

                DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                the response button each time one of these it is

                the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                ears with the ear and

                the audiometer win

                the mmr(

                and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                c~vman form

                and Services in audiometric

                health that attendance

                Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                after

                500-8000 take no further

                500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                check the noise exposure since the last was

                are

                audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                errIOIJVEeS are

                take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                IF

                Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                161 (conlinood)

                should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                retest the Tlnt in six months

                The referral criteria are

                a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                is 15 dB or more at any

                wax or if there is a or

                thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                191

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                Three decibel rule

                The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                85 8 hours

                88 4 hours

                91 2 hours

                94 1 hour

                97 30 minutes

                100 15 minutes

                1101

                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                Section 10 - Reference material

                References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                12 Safety signs

                13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                17 Noise awareness program

                18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                19 OHS skills development training

                20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                Related material

                1102 (ool1linuen)

                • Part 1
                • Part 2
                • Part 3
                • Part 4
                • PArt 5

                  1 ANNEXATO CHAPTER 3

                  20F

                  2 ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                  of

                  Note

                  the OI5IPI81EJC on near

                  g

                  a lower

                  Al1

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                  APPENDIX 3 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                  ITEMS OF PLANT REQUIRING REGISTRATION OR NOTIFICATION OF DESIGN IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE 6 PART 1 OF THE REGULATIONS

                  Item No Description of Plant

                  1 Pressure equipment other than pressur piping thai have a hazard level of A B C or 0 determined in accordance with Australian Standards (AS) 3920 part 1 Pressure Equipment Manufacture-Assurance of Product Quality (ME121 Standard AMBSC)

                  2 Gas cylinders covered by AS 2030

                  3 Tower Cranes-I

                  4 Building maintenance units

                  5 Hoists with a platform movement in excess of 24 metres designed to lift people111

                  6 Work boxes suspended from cranes

                  7 Amusement structures covered by AS 3533 (Amusement Rides and Devices) other than class 1 structures

                  8 Prefabricated scaffolding

                  9 Boom-type elevating work platforms

                  10 Gantry Cranes)

                  (a) with a safe working load greater than 5 tonnes or

                  (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goods lbl

                  11 Bridge cranes

                  (a) with a safe working load of 10 lannes or

                  (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goodS(bl

                  12 Vehicle hoists)

                  13 Mast climbing work platforms)

                  14 Mobile cranes with a safe working load greater than 10 10nnesI

                  Notes

                  (a) For the purposes or licensing any reference to cranes and hoists in schedule 6 exclude those that are manually powered elevaling work platforms or tow trucks

                  (b) Dangerous goodS means dangerous goods as defined in the Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 5th edition published by the Federal Office of Road Safety in September 1992

                  AL1

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safe y Manual

                  3A3-2

                  Plant designs

                  1 Employers are not to use plant hsted In this appendix unless lhat plant tias a CUfrent reg istration number which is issued by the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC)

                  2 An employer may apply 10 the SReC for registration of the design of plant listed in this appendix This process invoives Ihe submission of a written application form which includes a representational drawing of the plant design a statement signed by or for Ihe manufacturer of the plant to the effect that the design of he plant complies with the provisions of the regu lations thai apply to manufacturers of plan and a statement by a design verifier wh ich states that this has been done

                  Nole

                  A design verifier is a competent independent person who Is responsible for advising whether the design of a plant complies with the provisIons or the regulations

                  3 Registration of a plant design is subject to the following conditions

                  a evidence of design registration is to be displayed on or near Ihe plant to which the design registration relates and

                  b the registration number must be provided to any person who deals with the employer in relation to the plant

                  4 The SRCC is to be notified whenever there is an alteration to the plant design and employees are not to use the item of plant until the SRCC has been notified However Ihe SRCC does not need to be notified of an afteration which has been carried out by a person administering a Staterremtory law that corresponds to the Act or the Regulations

                  AL1

                  IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

                  r-~N~lfI~

                  c

                  4

                  c

                  1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

                  or

                  AL1

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                  3A5-2

                  c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

                  d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

                  familiar with the

                  Step 2-risk assessment

                  6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

                  a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

                  (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

                  (2) consultation wilh employees

                  (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

                  (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

                  (5) maintenance logs of plant

                  (6) manuals provided with plant

                  (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

                  (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

                  b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

                  c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

                  (1) very likely-could happen frequently

                  (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

                  (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

                  (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

                  d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

                  (1) fatality

                  (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

                  (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

                  (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

                  (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

                  AL1

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                  3A5-3

                  e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

                  7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

                  Step 3-risk control

                  8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

                  a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

                  b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

                  c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

                  d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

                  (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

                  (2) education and training of em ployees

                  (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

                  (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

                  e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

                  (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

                  (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

                  (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

                  (4) to supplement other control measures

                  AL1

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                  3A5~

                  Step 4-monitoring and review

                  9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

                  a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

                  b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

                  10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

                  a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

                  b the design is revised or modified

                  c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

                  d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

                  e the plant is moved

                  ownership of the plant changes

                  g there is a change to the workplace environment and

                  h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

                  Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

                  AL1

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                  ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                  PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

                  UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

                  Program Manufacturer

                  Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

                  Inspected by Date

                  Hazard and Source Comments

                  Al1

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                  ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                  RISK TABLE

                  1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

                  LIKELIHOOD

                  Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

                  Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                  MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                  Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

                  Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

                  Other asset damage

                  MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

                  2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

                  AL1

                  LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                  Sitampllocahon

                  Program

                  Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                  Compiled by

                  HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                  LIKELIHOOD

                  Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                  I Date

                  CONSEQUENCE

                  Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                  RISK RATING

                  (Sea appendix 2)

                  Higtl Medium Low

                  CONTROL ACTION

                  1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                  1 2 ~1

                  I

                  I 1 i

                  -g

                  ~ Z -t xl

                  en raquo en en m en en

                  Z ~

                  -t ~ o xl

                  en I

                  -t

                  ALi

                  RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                  CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                  APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                  PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                  REPORTING PERIOD

                  1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                  UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                  TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                  NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                  PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                  I

                  tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                  PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                  i(~l

                  I

                  -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                  Noles

                  Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                  (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                  2971

                  (e) Tower eras

                  (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                  Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                  (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                  ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                  a iO ltgt IIgt

                  Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                  PLANT

                  in

                  AS

                  Cross Reference

                  is to NI

                  B

                  at the or in the

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                  38-2

                  f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                  g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                  h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                  8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                  RESPONSIBILITIES

                  9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                  10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                  11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                  12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                  a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                  b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                  c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                  NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                  13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                  Engineering controls

                  14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                  15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                  16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                  Amber Zone~

                  of

                  Black time

                  or 115

                  A f4nwnninotinn

                  Extreme Zone

                  b

                  a

                  to

                  Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                  Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                  38-6

                  34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                  Compensation

                  35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                  Education

                  36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                  37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                  Operational areas

                  38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                  Documentation

                  39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                  Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                  b

                  Defence OccUiJational Manual

                  1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                  NOISE

                  1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                  a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                  shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                  nor shall include refresher on

                  c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                  d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                  3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                  APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                  WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                  ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                  EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                  MUST BE WORN

                  EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                  ANNEXBTO

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                  APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                  METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                  1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                  a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                  b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                  c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                  d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                  2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                  3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                  B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                  b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                  c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                  (1) advise the employee of the test results

                  (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                  (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                  protection

                  (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                  Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                  387-2

                  d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                  (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                  civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                  e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                  4 Tile referral crlleria are

                  a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                  b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                  c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                  d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                  5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                  civilian document

                  Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                  APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                  3 U RULE

                  1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                  SPL (dB(A)) of

                  85 8 hours

                  a8 4 hours

                  91 2 hours

                  94 1 hour

                  97 30 minutes

                  100 15 minutes

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                  ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                  ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                  SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                  rtwIrlv

                  manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                  REFERENCES

                  1 Defence

                  MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                  2 Other

                  3 Cross Reference

                  4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                  Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                  AS

                  Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                  WELDING

                  SYNOPSIS

                  REFERENCES

                  1 Defence

                  W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                  2 Other

                  AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                  AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                  AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                  AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                  JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                  Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                  3 Cross Reference

                  1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                  5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                  7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                  ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                  FIRE SAFETY

                  SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                  REFERENCES

                  1 Defence

                  MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                  DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                  MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                  2 Other

                  AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                  AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                  AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                  AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                  AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                  AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                  AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                  AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                  3 Cross Reference

                  Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                  38-3

                  Administrative controls

                  17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                  Personal protective equipment

                  18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                  19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                  a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                  b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                  c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                  20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                  21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                  22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                  Noise assessments

                  23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                  24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                  a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                  b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                  c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                  d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                  Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                  11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                  THERMAL CONDITIONS

                  SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                  environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                  REFERENCES

                  1 Defence

                  DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                  OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                  DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                  If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                  2 Other

                  and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                  3 Cross Reference

                  8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                  112

                  113

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                  CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                  NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                  Section 1 - Overview

                  Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                  Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                  Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                  Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                  Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                  Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                  bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                  bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                  bull increased health care and compensation

                  Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                  For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                  Continued on next page

                  mAinArlA he risks to

                  means

                  the

                  I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                  118

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                  Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                  117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                  Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                  Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                  Section Content

                  1 Overview

                  2 Specific responsibilities

                  3 Noise management principles

                  4 Impulse noise

                  5 Warning signs

                  6 The use of foam earplugs

                  7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                  8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                  9 The three decibel rule

                  10 Reference material

                  The fnllnwinn

                  124

                  125

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                  Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                  Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                  When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                  Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                  bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                  bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                  bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                  When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                  Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                  Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                  Employees Employees are responsible for

                  bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                  bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                  bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                  Training and skilling

                  Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                  The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                  course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                  Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                  and OHS skills

                  Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                  costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                  131

                  132

                  133

                  134

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                  Section 3 - Noise management principles

                  Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                  Eng ineering controls

                  Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                  For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                  Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                  Administrative controls

                  Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                  Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                  Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                  The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                  bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                  bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                  bull regular audiometric examinations

                  Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                  Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                  Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                  135

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                  Noise assessments

                  Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                  Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                  bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                  bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                  bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                  bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                  Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                  Hearing protection areas

                  136

                  Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                  bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                  continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                  impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                  A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                  bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                  con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                  impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                  Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                  bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                  continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                  im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                  ConllmJ8o orl next page

                  137

                  138

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                  Hearing protection areas

                  136 (continued)

                  A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                  bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                  continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                  impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                  A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                  The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                  Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                  The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                  The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                  Audiometric examinations

                  Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                  bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                  bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                  Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                  ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                  139

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                  Audiometric eXaminations

                  138 (conlhued)

                  bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                  bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                  bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                  bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                  bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                  Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                  Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                  Education

                  1310

                  Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                  Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                  Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                  1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                  Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                  1312

                  141

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                  Section 4 -Impulse noise

                  Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                  This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                  bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                  bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                  bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                  bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                  151

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                  Section 5 - Warning signs

                  Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                  HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                  MUST BE W O R N

                  ( A MBER ZONE)

                  HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                  EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                  M UST BE W ORN

                  C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                  r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                  E AH MUFFS ]

                  M UST BE WOAN

                  HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                  l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                  MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                  ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                  161

                  162

                  163

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                  Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                  Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                  the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                  Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                  Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                  Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                  Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                  Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                  bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                  bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                  bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                  164

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                  Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                  FOR r shy

                  3

                  4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                  3

                  4 Hold

                  ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                  IiudeT

                  Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                  I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                  Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                  p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                  wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                  ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                  Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                  T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                  p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                  A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                  Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                  Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                  164 (conUnued)

                  -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                  ) VISUA CH CK

                  6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                  rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                  o ~Sati1h

                  s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                  Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                  bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                  171

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                  Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                  Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                  MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                  Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                  bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                  1 Toe(l __

                  - T 1at eI -

                  l

                  _~__ L-~~ ishy

                  ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                  AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                  ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                  Continued on ne)( page

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                  Form PM 139

                  171 (continued)

                  ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                  Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                  5 AmeoQlITir

                  bull

                  M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                  181

                  and

                  no matter how

                  are trained

                  DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                  11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                  Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                  8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                  lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                  the response button each time one of these it is

                  the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                  where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                  be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                  ears with the ear and

                  the audiometer win

                  the mmr(

                  and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                  the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                  c~vman form

                  and Services in audiometric

                  health that attendance

                  Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                  recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                  ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                  such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                  it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                  If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                  after

                  500-8000 take no further

                  500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                  advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                  check the noise exposure since the last was

                  are

                  audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                  errIOIJVEeS are

                  take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                  IF

                  Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                  161 (conlinood)

                  should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                  ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                  civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                  retest the Tlnt in six months

                  The referral criteria are

                  a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                  is 15 dB or more at any

                  wax or if there is a or

                  thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                  The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                  191

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                  Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                  Three decibel rule

                  The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                  SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                  85 8 hours

                  88 4 hours

                  91 2 hours

                  94 1 hour

                  97 30 minutes

                  100 15 minutes

                  1101

                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                  Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                  Section 10 - Reference material

                  References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                  2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                  3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                  4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                  5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                  6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                  7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                  8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                  9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                  10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                  11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                  12 Safety signs

                  13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                  14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                  15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                  16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                  17 Noise awareness program

                  18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                  19 OHS skills development training

                  20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                  21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                  Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                  1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                  AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                  ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                  Related material

                  1102 (ool1linuen)

                  • Part 1
                  • Part 2
                  • Part 3
                  • Part 4
                  • PArt 5

                    2 ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                    of

                    Note

                    the OI5IPI81EJC on near

                    g

                    a lower

                    Al1

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                    APPENDIX 3 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                    ITEMS OF PLANT REQUIRING REGISTRATION OR NOTIFICATION OF DESIGN IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE 6 PART 1 OF THE REGULATIONS

                    Item No Description of Plant

                    1 Pressure equipment other than pressur piping thai have a hazard level of A B C or 0 determined in accordance with Australian Standards (AS) 3920 part 1 Pressure Equipment Manufacture-Assurance of Product Quality (ME121 Standard AMBSC)

                    2 Gas cylinders covered by AS 2030

                    3 Tower Cranes-I

                    4 Building maintenance units

                    5 Hoists with a platform movement in excess of 24 metres designed to lift people111

                    6 Work boxes suspended from cranes

                    7 Amusement structures covered by AS 3533 (Amusement Rides and Devices) other than class 1 structures

                    8 Prefabricated scaffolding

                    9 Boom-type elevating work platforms

                    10 Gantry Cranes)

                    (a) with a safe working load greater than 5 tonnes or

                    (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goods lbl

                    11 Bridge cranes

                    (a) with a safe working load of 10 lannes or

                    (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goodS(bl

                    12 Vehicle hoists)

                    13 Mast climbing work platforms)

                    14 Mobile cranes with a safe working load greater than 10 10nnesI

                    Notes

                    (a) For the purposes or licensing any reference to cranes and hoists in schedule 6 exclude those that are manually powered elevaling work platforms or tow trucks

                    (b) Dangerous goodS means dangerous goods as defined in the Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 5th edition published by the Federal Office of Road Safety in September 1992

                    AL1

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safe y Manual

                    3A3-2

                    Plant designs

                    1 Employers are not to use plant hsted In this appendix unless lhat plant tias a CUfrent reg istration number which is issued by the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC)

                    2 An employer may apply 10 the SReC for registration of the design of plant listed in this appendix This process invoives Ihe submission of a written application form which includes a representational drawing of the plant design a statement signed by or for Ihe manufacturer of the plant to the effect that the design of he plant complies with the provisions of the regu lations thai apply to manufacturers of plan and a statement by a design verifier wh ich states that this has been done

                    Nole

                    A design verifier is a competent independent person who Is responsible for advising whether the design of a plant complies with the provisIons or the regulations

                    3 Registration of a plant design is subject to the following conditions

                    a evidence of design registration is to be displayed on or near Ihe plant to which the design registration relates and

                    b the registration number must be provided to any person who deals with the employer in relation to the plant

                    4 The SRCC is to be notified whenever there is an alteration to the plant design and employees are not to use the item of plant until the SRCC has been notified However Ihe SRCC does not need to be notified of an afteration which has been carried out by a person administering a Staterremtory law that corresponds to the Act or the Regulations

                    AL1

                    IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

                    r-~N~lfI~

                    c

                    4

                    c

                    1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

                    or

                    AL1

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                    3A5-2

                    c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

                    d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

                    familiar with the

                    Step 2-risk assessment

                    6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

                    a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

                    (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

                    (2) consultation wilh employees

                    (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

                    (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

                    (5) maintenance logs of plant

                    (6) manuals provided with plant

                    (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

                    (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

                    b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

                    c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

                    (1) very likely-could happen frequently

                    (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

                    (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

                    (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

                    d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

                    (1) fatality

                    (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

                    (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

                    (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

                    (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

                    AL1

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                    3A5-3

                    e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

                    7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

                    Step 3-risk control

                    8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

                    a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

                    b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

                    c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

                    d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

                    (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

                    (2) education and training of em ployees

                    (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

                    (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

                    e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

                    (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

                    (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

                    (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

                    (4) to supplement other control measures

                    AL1

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                    3A5~

                    Step 4-monitoring and review

                    9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

                    a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

                    b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

                    10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

                    a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

                    b the design is revised or modified

                    c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

                    d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

                    e the plant is moved

                    ownership of the plant changes

                    g there is a change to the workplace environment and

                    h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

                    Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

                    AL1

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                    ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                    PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

                    UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

                    Program Manufacturer

                    Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

                    Inspected by Date

                    Hazard and Source Comments

                    Al1

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                    ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                    RISK TABLE

                    1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

                    LIKELIHOOD

                    Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

                    Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                    MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                    Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

                    Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

                    Other asset damage

                    MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

                    2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

                    AL1

                    LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                    Sitampllocahon

                    Program

                    Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                    Compiled by

                    HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                    LIKELIHOOD

                    Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                    I Date

                    CONSEQUENCE

                    Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                    RISK RATING

                    (Sea appendix 2)

                    Higtl Medium Low

                    CONTROL ACTION

                    1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                    1 2 ~1

                    I

                    I 1 i

                    -g

                    ~ Z -t xl

                    en raquo en en m en en

                    Z ~

                    -t ~ o xl

                    en I

                    -t

                    ALi

                    RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                    CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                    APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                    PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                    REPORTING PERIOD

                    1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                    UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                    TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                    NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                    PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                    I

                    tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                    PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                    i(~l

                    I

                    -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                    Noles

                    Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                    (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                    2971

                    (e) Tower eras

                    (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                    Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                    (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                    ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                    a iO ltgt IIgt

                    Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                    PLANT

                    in

                    AS

                    Cross Reference

                    is to NI

                    B

                    at the or in the

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                    38-2

                    f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                    g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                    h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                    8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                    RESPONSIBILITIES

                    9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                    10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                    11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                    12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                    a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                    b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                    c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                    NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                    13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                    Engineering controls

                    14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                    15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                    16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                    Amber Zone~

                    of

                    Black time

                    or 115

                    A f4nwnninotinn

                    Extreme Zone

                    b

                    a

                    to

                    Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                    Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                    38-6

                    34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                    Compensation

                    35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                    Education

                    36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                    37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                    Operational areas

                    38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                    Documentation

                    39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                    Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                    b

                    Defence OccUiJational Manual

                    1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                    NOISE

                    1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                    a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                    shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                    nor shall include refresher on

                    c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                    d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                    3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                    APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                    WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                    ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                    EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                    MUST BE WORN

                    EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                    ANNEXBTO

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                    APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                    METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                    1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                    a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                    b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                    c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                    d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                    2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                    3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                    B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                    b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                    c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                    (1) advise the employee of the test results

                    (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                    (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                    protection

                    (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                    Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                    387-2

                    d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                    (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                    civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                    e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                    4 Tile referral crlleria are

                    a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                    b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                    c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                    d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                    5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                    civilian document

                    Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                    APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                    3 U RULE

                    1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                    SPL (dB(A)) of

                    85 8 hours

                    a8 4 hours

                    91 2 hours

                    94 1 hour

                    97 30 minutes

                    100 15 minutes

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                    ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                    ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                    SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                    rtwIrlv

                    manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                    REFERENCES

                    1 Defence

                    MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                    2 Other

                    3 Cross Reference

                    4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                    Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                    AS

                    Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                    WELDING

                    SYNOPSIS

                    REFERENCES

                    1 Defence

                    W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                    2 Other

                    AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                    AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                    AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                    AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                    JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                    Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                    3 Cross Reference

                    1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                    5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                    7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                    ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                    FIRE SAFETY

                    SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                    REFERENCES

                    1 Defence

                    MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                    DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                    MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                    2 Other

                    AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                    AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                    AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                    AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                    AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                    AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                    AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                    AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                    3 Cross Reference

                    Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                    38-3

                    Administrative controls

                    17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                    Personal protective equipment

                    18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                    19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                    a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                    b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                    c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                    20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                    21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                    22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                    Noise assessments

                    23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                    24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                    a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                    b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                    c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                    d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                    Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                    11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                    THERMAL CONDITIONS

                    SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                    environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                    REFERENCES

                    1 Defence

                    DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                    OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                    DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                    If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                    2 Other

                    and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                    3 Cross Reference

                    8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                    112

                    113

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                    CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                    NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                    Section 1 - Overview

                    Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                    Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                    Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                    Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                    Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                    Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                    bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                    bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                    bull increased health care and compensation

                    Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                    For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                    Continued on next page

                    mAinArlA he risks to

                    means

                    the

                    I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                    118

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                    Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                    117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                    Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                    Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                    Section Content

                    1 Overview

                    2 Specific responsibilities

                    3 Noise management principles

                    4 Impulse noise

                    5 Warning signs

                    6 The use of foam earplugs

                    7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                    8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                    9 The three decibel rule

                    10 Reference material

                    The fnllnwinn

                    124

                    125

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                    Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                    Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                    When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                    Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                    bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                    bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                    bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                    When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                    Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                    Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                    Employees Employees are responsible for

                    bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                    bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                    bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                    Training and skilling

                    Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                    The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                    course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                    Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                    and OHS skills

                    Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                    costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                    131

                    132

                    133

                    134

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                    Section 3 - Noise management principles

                    Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                    Eng ineering controls

                    Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                    For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                    Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                    Administrative controls

                    Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                    Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                    Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                    The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                    bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                    bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                    bull regular audiometric examinations

                    Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                    Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                    Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                    135

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                    Noise assessments

                    Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                    Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                    bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                    bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                    bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                    bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                    Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                    Hearing protection areas

                    136

                    Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                    bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                    continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                    impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                    A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                    bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                    con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                    impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                    Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                    bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                    continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                    im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                    ConllmJ8o orl next page

                    137

                    138

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                    Hearing protection areas

                    136 (continued)

                    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                    bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                    continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                    impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                    The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                    Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                    The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                    The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                    Audiometric examinations

                    Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                    bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                    bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                    Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                    ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                    139

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                    Audiometric eXaminations

                    138 (conlhued)

                    bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                    bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                    bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                    bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                    bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                    Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                    Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                    Education

                    1310

                    Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                    Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                    Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                    1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                    Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                    1312

                    141

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                    Section 4 -Impulse noise

                    Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                    This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                    bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                    bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                    bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                    bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                    151

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                    Section 5 - Warning signs

                    Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                    HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                    MUST BE W O R N

                    ( A MBER ZONE)

                    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                    EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                    M UST BE W ORN

                    C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                    r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                    E AH MUFFS ]

                    M UST BE WOAN

                    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                    l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                    MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                    ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                    161

                    162

                    163

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                    Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                    Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                    the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                    Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                    Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                    Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                    Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                    Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                    bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                    bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                    bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                    164

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                    Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                    FOR r shy

                    3

                    4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                    3

                    4 Hold

                    ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                    IiudeT

                    Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                    I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                    Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                    p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                    wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                    ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                    Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                    T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                    p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                    A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                    Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                    Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                    164 (conUnued)

                    -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                    ) VISUA CH CK

                    6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                    rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                    o ~Sati1h

                    s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                    Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                    bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                    171

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                    Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                    Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                    MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                    Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                    bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                    1 Toe(l __

                    - T 1at eI -

                    l

                    _~__ L-~~ ishy

                    ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                    AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                    ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                    Continued on ne)( page

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                    Form PM 139

                    171 (continued)

                    ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                    Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                    5 AmeoQlITir

                    bull

                    M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                    181

                    and

                    no matter how

                    are trained

                    DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                    11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                    Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                    8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                    lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                    the response button each time one of these it is

                    the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                    where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                    be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                    ears with the ear and

                    the audiometer win

                    the mmr(

                    and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                    the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                    c~vman form

                    and Services in audiometric

                    health that attendance

                    Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                    recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                    ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                    such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                    it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                    If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                    after

                    500-8000 take no further

                    500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                    advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                    check the noise exposure since the last was

                    are

                    audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                    errIOIJVEeS are

                    take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                    IF

                    Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                    161 (conlinood)

                    should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                    ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                    civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                    retest the Tlnt in six months

                    The referral criteria are

                    a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                    is 15 dB or more at any

                    wax or if there is a or

                    thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                    The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                    191

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                    Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                    Three decibel rule

                    The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                    SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                    85 8 hours

                    88 4 hours

                    91 2 hours

                    94 1 hour

                    97 30 minutes

                    100 15 minutes

                    1101

                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                    Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                    Section 10 - Reference material

                    References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                    2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                    3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                    4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                    5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                    6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                    7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                    8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                    9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                    10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                    11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                    12 Safety signs

                    13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                    14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                    15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                    16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                    17 Noise awareness program

                    18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                    19 OHS skills development training

                    20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                    21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                    Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                    1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                    AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                    ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                    Related material

                    1102 (ool1linuen)

                    • Part 1
                    • Part 2
                    • Part 3
                    • Part 4
                    • PArt 5

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                      APPENDIX 3 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                      ITEMS OF PLANT REQUIRING REGISTRATION OR NOTIFICATION OF DESIGN IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE 6 PART 1 OF THE REGULATIONS

                      Item No Description of Plant

                      1 Pressure equipment other than pressur piping thai have a hazard level of A B C or 0 determined in accordance with Australian Standards (AS) 3920 part 1 Pressure Equipment Manufacture-Assurance of Product Quality (ME121 Standard AMBSC)

                      2 Gas cylinders covered by AS 2030

                      3 Tower Cranes-I

                      4 Building maintenance units

                      5 Hoists with a platform movement in excess of 24 metres designed to lift people111

                      6 Work boxes suspended from cranes

                      7 Amusement structures covered by AS 3533 (Amusement Rides and Devices) other than class 1 structures

                      8 Prefabricated scaffolding

                      9 Boom-type elevating work platforms

                      10 Gantry Cranes)

                      (a) with a safe working load greater than 5 tonnes or

                      (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goods lbl

                      11 Bridge cranes

                      (a) with a safe working load of 10 lannes or

                      (b) designed to handle molten metal or dangerous goodS(bl

                      12 Vehicle hoists)

                      13 Mast climbing work platforms)

                      14 Mobile cranes with a safe working load greater than 10 10nnesI

                      Notes

                      (a) For the purposes or licensing any reference to cranes and hoists in schedule 6 exclude those that are manually powered elevaling work platforms or tow trucks

                      (b) Dangerous goodS means dangerous goods as defined in the Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road and Rail 5th edition published by the Federal Office of Road Safety in September 1992

                      AL1

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safe y Manual

                      3A3-2

                      Plant designs

                      1 Employers are not to use plant hsted In this appendix unless lhat plant tias a CUfrent reg istration number which is issued by the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC)

                      2 An employer may apply 10 the SReC for registration of the design of plant listed in this appendix This process invoives Ihe submission of a written application form which includes a representational drawing of the plant design a statement signed by or for Ihe manufacturer of the plant to the effect that the design of he plant complies with the provisions of the regu lations thai apply to manufacturers of plan and a statement by a design verifier wh ich states that this has been done

                      Nole

                      A design verifier is a competent independent person who Is responsible for advising whether the design of a plant complies with the provisIons or the regulations

                      3 Registration of a plant design is subject to the following conditions

                      a evidence of design registration is to be displayed on or near Ihe plant to which the design registration relates and

                      b the registration number must be provided to any person who deals with the employer in relation to the plant

                      4 The SRCC is to be notified whenever there is an alteration to the plant design and employees are not to use the item of plant until the SRCC has been notified However Ihe SRCC does not need to be notified of an afteration which has been carried out by a person administering a Staterremtory law that corresponds to the Act or the Regulations

                      AL1

                      IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

                      r-~N~lfI~

                      c

                      4

                      c

                      1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

                      or

                      AL1

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                      3A5-2

                      c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

                      d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

                      familiar with the

                      Step 2-risk assessment

                      6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

                      a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

                      (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

                      (2) consultation wilh employees

                      (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

                      (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

                      (5) maintenance logs of plant

                      (6) manuals provided with plant

                      (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

                      (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

                      b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

                      c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

                      (1) very likely-could happen frequently

                      (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

                      (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

                      (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

                      d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

                      (1) fatality

                      (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

                      (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

                      (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

                      (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

                      AL1

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                      3A5-3

                      e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

                      7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

                      Step 3-risk control

                      8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

                      a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

                      b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

                      c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

                      d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

                      (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

                      (2) education and training of em ployees

                      (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

                      (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

                      e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

                      (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

                      (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

                      (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

                      (4) to supplement other control measures

                      AL1

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                      3A5~

                      Step 4-monitoring and review

                      9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

                      a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

                      b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

                      10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

                      a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

                      b the design is revised or modified

                      c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

                      d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

                      e the plant is moved

                      ownership of the plant changes

                      g there is a change to the workplace environment and

                      h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

                      Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

                      AL1

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                      ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                      PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

                      UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

                      Program Manufacturer

                      Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

                      Inspected by Date

                      Hazard and Source Comments

                      Al1

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                      ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                      RISK TABLE

                      1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

                      LIKELIHOOD

                      Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

                      Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                      MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                      Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

                      Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

                      Other asset damage

                      MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

                      2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

                      AL1

                      LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                      Sitampllocahon

                      Program

                      Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                      Compiled by

                      HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                      LIKELIHOOD

                      Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                      I Date

                      CONSEQUENCE

                      Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                      RISK RATING

                      (Sea appendix 2)

                      Higtl Medium Low

                      CONTROL ACTION

                      1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                      1 2 ~1

                      I

                      I 1 i

                      -g

                      ~ Z -t xl

                      en raquo en en m en en

                      Z ~

                      -t ~ o xl

                      en I

                      -t

                      ALi

                      RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                      CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                      APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                      PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                      REPORTING PERIOD

                      1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                      UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                      TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                      NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                      PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                      I

                      tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                      PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                      i(~l

                      I

                      -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                      Noles

                      Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                      (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                      2971

                      (e) Tower eras

                      (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                      Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                      (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                      ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                      a iO ltgt IIgt

                      Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                      PLANT

                      in

                      AS

                      Cross Reference

                      is to NI

                      B

                      at the or in the

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                      38-2

                      f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                      g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                      h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                      8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                      RESPONSIBILITIES

                      9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                      10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                      11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                      12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                      a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                      b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                      c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                      NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                      13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                      Engineering controls

                      14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                      15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                      16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                      Amber Zone~

                      of

                      Black time

                      or 115

                      A f4nwnninotinn

                      Extreme Zone

                      b

                      a

                      to

                      Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                      Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                      38-6

                      34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                      Compensation

                      35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                      Education

                      36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                      37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                      Operational areas

                      38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                      Documentation

                      39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                      Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                      b

                      Defence OccUiJational Manual

                      1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                      NOISE

                      1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                      a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                      shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                      nor shall include refresher on

                      c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                      d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                      3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                      APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                      WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                      ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                      EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                      MUST BE WORN

                      EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                      ANNEXBTO

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                      APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                      METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                      1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                      a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                      b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                      c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                      d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                      2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                      3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                      B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                      b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                      c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                      (1) advise the employee of the test results

                      (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                      (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                      protection

                      (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                      Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                      387-2

                      d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                      (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                      civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                      e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                      4 Tile referral crlleria are

                      a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                      b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                      c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                      d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                      5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                      civilian document

                      Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                      APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                      3 U RULE

                      1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                      SPL (dB(A)) of

                      85 8 hours

                      a8 4 hours

                      91 2 hours

                      94 1 hour

                      97 30 minutes

                      100 15 minutes

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                      ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                      ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                      SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                      rtwIrlv

                      manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                      REFERENCES

                      1 Defence

                      MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                      2 Other

                      3 Cross Reference

                      4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                      Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                      AS

                      Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                      WELDING

                      SYNOPSIS

                      REFERENCES

                      1 Defence

                      W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                      2 Other

                      AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                      AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                      AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                      AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                      JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                      Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                      3 Cross Reference

                      1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                      5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                      7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                      ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                      FIRE SAFETY

                      SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                      REFERENCES

                      1 Defence

                      MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                      DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                      MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                      2 Other

                      AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                      AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                      AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                      AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                      AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                      AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                      AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                      AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                      3 Cross Reference

                      Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                      38-3

                      Administrative controls

                      17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                      Personal protective equipment

                      18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                      19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                      a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                      b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                      c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                      20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                      21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                      22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                      Noise assessments

                      23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                      24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                      a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                      b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                      c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                      d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                      Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                      11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                      THERMAL CONDITIONS

                      SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                      environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                      REFERENCES

                      1 Defence

                      DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                      OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                      DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                      If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                      2 Other

                      and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                      3 Cross Reference

                      8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                      112

                      113

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                      CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                      NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                      Section 1 - Overview

                      Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                      Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                      Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                      Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                      Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                      Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                      bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                      bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                      bull increased health care and compensation

                      Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                      For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                      Continued on next page

                      mAinArlA he risks to

                      means

                      the

                      I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                      118

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                      Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                      117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                      Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                      Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                      Section Content

                      1 Overview

                      2 Specific responsibilities

                      3 Noise management principles

                      4 Impulse noise

                      5 Warning signs

                      6 The use of foam earplugs

                      7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                      8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                      9 The three decibel rule

                      10 Reference material

                      The fnllnwinn

                      124

                      125

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                      Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                      Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                      When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                      Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                      bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                      bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                      bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                      When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                      Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                      Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                      Employees Employees are responsible for

                      bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                      bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                      bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                      Training and skilling

                      Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                      The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                      course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                      Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                      and OHS skills

                      Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                      costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                      131

                      132

                      133

                      134

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                      Section 3 - Noise management principles

                      Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                      Eng ineering controls

                      Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                      For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                      Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                      Administrative controls

                      Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                      Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                      Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                      The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                      bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                      bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                      bull regular audiometric examinations

                      Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                      Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                      Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                      135

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                      Noise assessments

                      Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                      Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                      bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                      bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                      bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                      bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                      Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                      Hearing protection areas

                      136

                      Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                      bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                      continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                      impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                      A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                      bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                      con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                      impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                      Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                      bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                      continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                      im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                      ConllmJ8o orl next page

                      137

                      138

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                      Hearing protection areas

                      136 (continued)

                      A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                      bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                      continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                      impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                      A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                      The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                      Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                      The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                      The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                      Audiometric examinations

                      Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                      bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                      bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                      Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                      ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                      139

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                      Audiometric eXaminations

                      138 (conlhued)

                      bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                      bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                      bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                      bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                      bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                      Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                      Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                      Education

                      1310

                      Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                      Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                      Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                      1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                      Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                      1312

                      141

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                      Section 4 -Impulse noise

                      Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                      This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                      bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                      bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                      bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                      bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                      151

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                      Section 5 - Warning signs

                      Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                      HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                      MUST BE W O R N

                      ( A MBER ZONE)

                      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                      EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                      M UST BE W ORN

                      C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                      r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                      E AH MUFFS ]

                      M UST BE WOAN

                      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                      l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                      MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                      ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                      161

                      162

                      163

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                      Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                      Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                      the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                      Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                      Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                      Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                      Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                      Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                      bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                      bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                      bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                      164

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                      Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                      FOR r shy

                      3

                      4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                      3

                      4 Hold

                      ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                      IiudeT

                      Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                      I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                      Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                      p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                      wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                      ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                      Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                      T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                      p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                      A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                      Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                      Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                      164 (conUnued)

                      -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                      ) VISUA CH CK

                      6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                      rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                      o ~Sati1h

                      s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                      Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                      bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                      171

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                      Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                      Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                      MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                      Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                      bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                      1 Toe(l __

                      - T 1at eI -

                      l

                      _~__ L-~~ ishy

                      ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                      AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                      ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                      Continued on ne)( page

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                      Form PM 139

                      171 (continued)

                      ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                      Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                      5 AmeoQlITir

                      bull

                      M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                      181

                      and

                      no matter how

                      are trained

                      DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                      11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                      Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                      8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                      lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                      the response button each time one of these it is

                      the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                      where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                      be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                      ears with the ear and

                      the audiometer win

                      the mmr(

                      and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                      the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                      c~vman form

                      and Services in audiometric

                      health that attendance

                      Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                      recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                      ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                      such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                      it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                      If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                      after

                      500-8000 take no further

                      500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                      advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                      check the noise exposure since the last was

                      are

                      audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                      errIOIJVEeS are

                      take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                      IF

                      Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                      161 (conlinood)

                      should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                      ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                      civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                      retest the Tlnt in six months

                      The referral criteria are

                      a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                      is 15 dB or more at any

                      wax or if there is a or

                      thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                      The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                      191

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                      Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                      Three decibel rule

                      The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                      SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                      85 8 hours

                      88 4 hours

                      91 2 hours

                      94 1 hour

                      97 30 minutes

                      100 15 minutes

                      1101

                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                      Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                      Section 10 - Reference material

                      References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                      2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                      3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                      4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                      5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                      6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                      7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                      8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                      9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                      10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                      11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                      12 Safety signs

                      13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                      14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                      15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                      16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                      17 Noise awareness program

                      18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                      19 OHS skills development training

                      20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                      21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                      Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                      1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                      AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                      ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                      Related material

                      1102 (ool1linuen)

                      • Part 1
                      • Part 2
                      • Part 3
                      • Part 4
                      • PArt 5

                        Defence Occupational Health and Safe y Manual

                        3A3-2

                        Plant designs

                        1 Employers are not to use plant hsted In this appendix unless lhat plant tias a CUfrent reg istration number which is issued by the Safety Rehabilitation and Compensation Commission (SRCC)

                        2 An employer may apply 10 the SReC for registration of the design of plant listed in this appendix This process invoives Ihe submission of a written application form which includes a representational drawing of the plant design a statement signed by or for Ihe manufacturer of the plant to the effect that the design of he plant complies with the provisions of the regu lations thai apply to manufacturers of plan and a statement by a design verifier wh ich states that this has been done

                        Nole

                        A design verifier is a competent independent person who Is responsible for advising whether the design of a plant complies with the provisIons or the regulations

                        3 Registration of a plant design is subject to the following conditions

                        a evidence of design registration is to be displayed on or near Ihe plant to which the design registration relates and

                        b the registration number must be provided to any person who deals with the employer in relation to the plant

                        4 The SRCC is to be notified whenever there is an alteration to the plant design and employees are not to use the item of plant until the SRCC has been notified However Ihe SRCC does not need to be notified of an afteration which has been carried out by a person administering a Staterremtory law that corresponds to the Act or the Regulations

                        AL1

                        IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

                        r-~N~lfI~

                        c

                        4

                        c

                        1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

                        or

                        AL1

                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                        3A5-2

                        c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

                        d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

                        familiar with the

                        Step 2-risk assessment

                        6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

                        a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

                        (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

                        (2) consultation wilh employees

                        (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

                        (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

                        (5) maintenance logs of plant

                        (6) manuals provided with plant

                        (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

                        (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

                        b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

                        c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

                        (1) very likely-could happen frequently

                        (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

                        (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

                        (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

                        d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

                        (1) fatality

                        (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

                        (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

                        (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

                        (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

                        AL1

                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                        3A5-3

                        e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

                        7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

                        Step 3-risk control

                        8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

                        a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

                        b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

                        c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

                        d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

                        (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

                        (2) education and training of em ployees

                        (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

                        (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

                        e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

                        (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

                        (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

                        (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

                        (4) to supplement other control measures

                        AL1

                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                        3A5~

                        Step 4-monitoring and review

                        9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

                        a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

                        b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

                        10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

                        a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

                        b the design is revised or modified

                        c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

                        d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

                        e the plant is moved

                        ownership of the plant changes

                        g there is a change to the workplace environment and

                        h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

                        Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

                        AL1

                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                        ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                        PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

                        UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

                        Program Manufacturer

                        Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

                        Inspected by Date

                        Hazard and Source Comments

                        Al1

                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                        ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                        RISK TABLE

                        1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

                        LIKELIHOOD

                        Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

                        Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                        MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                        Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

                        Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

                        Other asset damage

                        MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

                        2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

                        AL1

                        LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                        Sitampllocahon

                        Program

                        Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                        Compiled by

                        HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                        LIKELIHOOD

                        Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                        I Date

                        CONSEQUENCE

                        Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                        RISK RATING

                        (Sea appendix 2)

                        Higtl Medium Low

                        CONTROL ACTION

                        1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                        1 2 ~1

                        I

                        I 1 i

                        -g

                        ~ Z -t xl

                        en raquo en en m en en

                        Z ~

                        -t ~ o xl

                        en I

                        -t

                        ALi

                        RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                        CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                        APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                        PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                        REPORTING PERIOD

                        1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                        UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                        TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                        NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                        PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                        I

                        tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                        PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                        i(~l

                        I

                        -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                        Noles

                        Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                        (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                        2971

                        (e) Tower eras

                        (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                        Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                        (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                        ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                        a iO ltgt IIgt

                        Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                        PLANT

                        in

                        AS

                        Cross Reference

                        is to NI

                        B

                        at the or in the

                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                        38-2

                        f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                        g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                        h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                        8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                        RESPONSIBILITIES

                        9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                        10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                        11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                        12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                        a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                        b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                        c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                        NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                        13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                        Engineering controls

                        14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                        15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                        16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                        Amber Zone~

                        of

                        Black time

                        or 115

                        A f4nwnninotinn

                        Extreme Zone

                        b

                        a

                        to

                        Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                        Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                        38-6

                        34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                        Compensation

                        35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                        Education

                        36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                        37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                        Operational areas

                        38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                        Documentation

                        39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                        Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                        b

                        Defence OccUiJational Manual

                        1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                        NOISE

                        1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                        a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                        shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                        nor shall include refresher on

                        c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                        d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                        3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                        Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                        APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                        WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                        ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                        EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                        MUST BE WORN

                        EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                        ANNEXBTO

                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                        APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                        METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                        1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                        a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                        b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                        c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                        d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                        2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                        3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                        B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                        b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                        c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                        (1) advise the employee of the test results

                        (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                        (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                        protection

                        (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                        Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                        387-2

                        d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                        (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                        civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                        e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                        4 Tile referral crlleria are

                        a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                        b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                        c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                        d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                        5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                        civilian document

                        Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                        APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                        3 U RULE

                        1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                        SPL (dB(A)) of

                        85 8 hours

                        a8 4 hours

                        91 2 hours

                        94 1 hour

                        97 30 minutes

                        100 15 minutes

                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                        ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                        ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                        SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                        rtwIrlv

                        manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                        REFERENCES

                        1 Defence

                        MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                        2 Other

                        3 Cross Reference

                        4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                        Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                        AS

                        Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                        WELDING

                        SYNOPSIS

                        REFERENCES

                        1 Defence

                        W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                        2 Other

                        AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                        AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                        AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                        AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                        JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                        Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                        3 Cross Reference

                        1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                        5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                        7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                        ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                        FIRE SAFETY

                        SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                        REFERENCES

                        1 Defence

                        MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                        DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                        MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                        2 Other

                        AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                        AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                        AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                        AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                        AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                        AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                        AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                        AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                        3 Cross Reference

                        Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                        38-3

                        Administrative controls

                        17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                        Personal protective equipment

                        18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                        19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                        a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                        b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                        c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                        20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                        21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                        22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                        Noise assessments

                        23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                        24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                        a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                        b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                        c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                        d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                        Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                        11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                        THERMAL CONDITIONS

                        SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                        environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                        REFERENCES

                        1 Defence

                        DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                        OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                        DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                        If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                        2 Other

                        and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                        3 Cross Reference

                        8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                        112

                        113

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                        CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                        NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                        Section 1 - Overview

                        Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                        Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                        Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                        Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                        Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                        Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                        bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                        bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                        bull increased health care and compensation

                        Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                        For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                        Continued on next page

                        mAinArlA he risks to

                        means

                        the

                        I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                        118

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                        Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                        117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                        Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                        Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                        Section Content

                        1 Overview

                        2 Specific responsibilities

                        3 Noise management principles

                        4 Impulse noise

                        5 Warning signs

                        6 The use of foam earplugs

                        7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                        8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                        9 The three decibel rule

                        10 Reference material

                        The fnllnwinn

                        124

                        125

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                        Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                        Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                        When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                        Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                        bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                        bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                        bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                        When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                        Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                        Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                        Employees Employees are responsible for

                        bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                        bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                        bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                        Training and skilling

                        Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                        The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                        course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                        Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                        and OHS skills

                        Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                        costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                        131

                        132

                        133

                        134

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                        Section 3 - Noise management principles

                        Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                        Eng ineering controls

                        Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                        For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                        Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                        Administrative controls

                        Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                        Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                        Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                        The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                        bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                        bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                        bull regular audiometric examinations

                        Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                        Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                        Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                        135

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                        Noise assessments

                        Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                        Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                        bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                        bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                        bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                        bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                        Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                        Hearing protection areas

                        136

                        Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                        bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                        continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                        impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                        A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                        bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                        con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                        impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                        Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                        bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                        continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                        im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                        ConllmJ8o orl next page

                        137

                        138

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                        Hearing protection areas

                        136 (continued)

                        A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                        bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                        continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                        impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                        A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                        The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                        Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                        The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                        The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                        Audiometric examinations

                        Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                        bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                        bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                        Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                        ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                        139

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                        Audiometric eXaminations

                        138 (conlhued)

                        bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                        bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                        bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                        bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                        bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                        Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                        Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                        Education

                        1310

                        Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                        Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                        Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                        1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                        Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                        1312

                        141

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                        Section 4 -Impulse noise

                        Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                        This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                        bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                        bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                        bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                        bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                        151

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                        Section 5 - Warning signs

                        Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                        HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                        MUST BE W O R N

                        ( A MBER ZONE)

                        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                        EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                        M UST BE W ORN

                        C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                        r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                        E AH MUFFS ]

                        M UST BE WOAN

                        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                        l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                        MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                        ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                        161

                        162

                        163

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                        Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                        Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                        the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                        Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                        Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                        Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                        Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                        Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                        bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                        bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                        bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                        164

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                        Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                        FOR r shy

                        3

                        4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                        3

                        4 Hold

                        ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                        IiudeT

                        Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                        I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                        Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                        p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                        wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                        ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                        Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                        T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                        p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                        A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                        Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                        Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                        164 (conUnued)

                        -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                        ) VISUA CH CK

                        6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                        rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                        o ~Sati1h

                        s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                        Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                        bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                        171

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                        Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                        Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                        MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                        Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                        bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                        1 Toe(l __

                        - T 1at eI -

                        l

                        _~__ L-~~ ishy

                        ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                        AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                        ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                        Continued on ne)( page

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                        Form PM 139

                        171 (continued)

                        ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                        Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                        5 AmeoQlITir

                        bull

                        M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                        181

                        and

                        no matter how

                        are trained

                        DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                        11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                        Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                        8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                        lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                        the response button each time one of these it is

                        the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                        where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                        be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                        ears with the ear and

                        the audiometer win

                        the mmr(

                        and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                        the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                        c~vman form

                        and Services in audiometric

                        health that attendance

                        Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                        recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                        ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                        such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                        it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                        If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                        after

                        500-8000 take no further

                        500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                        advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                        check the noise exposure since the last was

                        are

                        audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                        errIOIJVEeS are

                        take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                        IF

                        Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                        161 (conlinood)

                        should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                        ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                        civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                        retest the Tlnt in six months

                        The referral criteria are

                        a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                        is 15 dB or more at any

                        wax or if there is a or

                        thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                        The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                        191

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                        Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                        Three decibel rule

                        The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                        SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                        85 8 hours

                        88 4 hours

                        91 2 hours

                        94 1 hour

                        97 30 minutes

                        100 15 minutes

                        1101

                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                        Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                        Section 10 - Reference material

                        References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                        2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                        3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                        4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                        5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                        6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                        7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                        8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                        9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                        10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                        11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                        12 Safety signs

                        13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                        14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                        15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                        16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                        17 Noise awareness program

                        18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                        19 OHS skills development training

                        20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                        21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                        Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                        1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                        AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                        ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                        Related material

                        1102 (ool1linuen)

                        • Part 1
                        • Part 2
                        • Part 3
                        • Part 4
                        • PArt 5

                          IyenblyenIIIM mmlOllllllllll liIIlII Il~

                          r-~N~lfI~

                          c

                          4

                          c

                          1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

                          or

                          AL1

                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                          3A5-2

                          c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

                          d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

                          familiar with the

                          Step 2-risk assessment

                          6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

                          a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

                          (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

                          (2) consultation wilh employees

                          (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

                          (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

                          (5) maintenance logs of plant

                          (6) manuals provided with plant

                          (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

                          (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

                          b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

                          c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

                          (1) very likely-could happen frequently

                          (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

                          (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

                          (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

                          d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

                          (1) fatality

                          (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

                          (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

                          (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

                          (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

                          AL1

                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                          3A5-3

                          e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

                          7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

                          Step 3-risk control

                          8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

                          a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

                          b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

                          c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

                          d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

                          (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

                          (2) education and training of em ployees

                          (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

                          (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

                          e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

                          (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

                          (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

                          (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

                          (4) to supplement other control measures

                          AL1

                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                          3A5~

                          Step 4-monitoring and review

                          9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

                          a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

                          b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

                          10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

                          a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

                          b the design is revised or modified

                          c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

                          d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

                          e the plant is moved

                          ownership of the plant changes

                          g there is a change to the workplace environment and

                          h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

                          Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

                          AL1

                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                          ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                          PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

                          UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

                          Program Manufacturer

                          Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

                          Inspected by Date

                          Hazard and Source Comments

                          Al1

                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                          ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                          RISK TABLE

                          1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

                          LIKELIHOOD

                          Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

                          Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                          MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                          Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

                          Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

                          Other asset damage

                          MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

                          2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

                          AL1

                          LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                          Sitampllocahon

                          Program

                          Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                          Compiled by

                          HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                          LIKELIHOOD

                          Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                          I Date

                          CONSEQUENCE

                          Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                          RISK RATING

                          (Sea appendix 2)

                          Higtl Medium Low

                          CONTROL ACTION

                          1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                          1 2 ~1

                          I

                          I 1 i

                          -g

                          ~ Z -t xl

                          en raquo en en m en en

                          Z ~

                          -t ~ o xl

                          en I

                          -t

                          ALi

                          RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                          CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                          APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                          PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                          REPORTING PERIOD

                          1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                          UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                          TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                          NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                          PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                          I

                          tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                          PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                          i(~l

                          I

                          -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                          Noles

                          Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                          (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                          2971

                          (e) Tower eras

                          (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                          Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                          (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                          ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                          a iO ltgt IIgt

                          Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                          PLANT

                          in

                          AS

                          Cross Reference

                          is to NI

                          B

                          at the or in the

                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                          38-2

                          f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                          g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                          h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                          8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                          RESPONSIBILITIES

                          9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                          10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                          11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                          12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                          a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                          b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                          c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                          NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                          13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                          Engineering controls

                          14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                          15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                          16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                          Amber Zone~

                          of

                          Black time

                          or 115

                          A f4nwnninotinn

                          Extreme Zone

                          b

                          a

                          to

                          Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                          Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                          38-6

                          34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                          Compensation

                          35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                          Education

                          36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                          37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                          Operational areas

                          38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                          Documentation

                          39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                          Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                          b

                          Defence OccUiJational Manual

                          1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                          NOISE

                          1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                          a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                          shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                          nor shall include refresher on

                          c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                          d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                          3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                          Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                          APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                          WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                          ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                          EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                          MUST BE WORN

                          EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                          ANNEXBTO

                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                          APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                          METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                          1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                          a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                          b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                          c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                          d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                          2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                          3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                          B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                          b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                          c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                          (1) advise the employee of the test results

                          (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                          (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                          protection

                          (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                          Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                          387-2

                          d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                          (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                          civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                          e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                          4 Tile referral crlleria are

                          a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                          b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                          c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                          d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                          5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                          civilian document

                          Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                          APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                          3 U RULE

                          1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                          SPL (dB(A)) of

                          85 8 hours

                          a8 4 hours

                          91 2 hours

                          94 1 hour

                          97 30 minutes

                          100 15 minutes

                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                          ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                          ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                          SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                          rtwIrlv

                          manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                          REFERENCES

                          1 Defence

                          MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                          2 Other

                          3 Cross Reference

                          4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                          Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                          AS

                          Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                          WELDING

                          SYNOPSIS

                          REFERENCES

                          1 Defence

                          W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                          2 Other

                          AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                          AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                          AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                          AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                          JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                          Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                          3 Cross Reference

                          1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                          5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                          7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                          ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                          FIRE SAFETY

                          SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                          REFERENCES

                          1 Defence

                          MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                          DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                          MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                          2 Other

                          AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                          AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                          AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                          AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                          AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                          AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                          AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                          AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                          3 Cross Reference

                          Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                          38-3

                          Administrative controls

                          17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                          Personal protective equipment

                          18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                          19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                          a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                          b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                          c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                          20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                          21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                          22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                          Noise assessments

                          23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                          24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                          a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                          b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                          c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                          d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                          Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                          11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                          THERMAL CONDITIONS

                          SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                          environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                          REFERENCES

                          1 Defence

                          DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                          OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                          DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                          If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                          2 Other

                          and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                          3 Cross Reference

                          8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                          112

                          113

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                          CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                          NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                          Section 1 - Overview

                          Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                          Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                          Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                          Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                          Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                          Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                          bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                          bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                          bull increased health care and compensation

                          Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                          For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                          Continued on next page

                          mAinArlA he risks to

                          means

                          the

                          I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                          118

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                          Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                          117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                          Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                          Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                          Section Content

                          1 Overview

                          2 Specific responsibilities

                          3 Noise management principles

                          4 Impulse noise

                          5 Warning signs

                          6 The use of foam earplugs

                          7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                          8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                          9 The three decibel rule

                          10 Reference material

                          The fnllnwinn

                          124

                          125

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                          Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                          Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                          When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                          Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                          bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                          bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                          bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                          When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                          Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                          Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                          Employees Employees are responsible for

                          bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                          bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                          bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                          Training and skilling

                          Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                          The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                          course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                          Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                          and OHS skills

                          Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                          costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                          131

                          132

                          133

                          134

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                          Section 3 - Noise management principles

                          Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                          Eng ineering controls

                          Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                          For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                          Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                          Administrative controls

                          Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                          Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                          Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                          The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                          bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                          bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                          bull regular audiometric examinations

                          Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                          Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                          Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                          135

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                          Noise assessments

                          Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                          Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                          bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                          bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                          bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                          bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                          Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                          Hearing protection areas

                          136

                          Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                          bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                          continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                          impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                          A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                          bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                          con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                          impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                          Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                          bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                          continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                          im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                          ConllmJ8o orl next page

                          137

                          138

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                          Hearing protection areas

                          136 (continued)

                          A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                          bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                          continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                          impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                          A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                          The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                          Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                          The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                          The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                          Audiometric examinations

                          Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                          bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                          bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                          Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                          ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                          139

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                          Audiometric eXaminations

                          138 (conlhued)

                          bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                          bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                          bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                          bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                          bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                          Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                          Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                          Education

                          1310

                          Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                          Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                          Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                          1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                          Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                          1312

                          141

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                          Section 4 -Impulse noise

                          Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                          This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                          bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                          bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                          bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                          bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                          151

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                          Section 5 - Warning signs

                          Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                          HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                          MUST BE W O R N

                          ( A MBER ZONE)

                          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                          EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                          M UST BE W ORN

                          C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                          r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                          E AH MUFFS ]

                          M UST BE WOAN

                          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                          l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                          MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                          ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                          161

                          162

                          163

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                          Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                          Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                          the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                          Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                          Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                          Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                          Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                          Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                          bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                          bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                          bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                          164

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                          Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                          FOR r shy

                          3

                          4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                          3

                          4 Hold

                          ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                          IiudeT

                          Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                          I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                          Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                          p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                          wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                          ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                          Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                          T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                          p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                          A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                          Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                          Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                          164 (conUnued)

                          -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                          ) VISUA CH CK

                          6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                          rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                          o ~Sati1h

                          s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                          Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                          bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                          171

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                          Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                          Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                          MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                          Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                          bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                          1 Toe(l __

                          - T 1at eI -

                          l

                          _~__ L-~~ ishy

                          ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                          AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                          ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                          Continued on ne)( page

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                          Form PM 139

                          171 (continued)

                          ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                          Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                          5 AmeoQlITir

                          bull

                          M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                          181

                          and

                          no matter how

                          are trained

                          DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                          11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                          Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                          8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                          lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                          the response button each time one of these it is

                          the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                          where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                          be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                          ears with the ear and

                          the audiometer win

                          the mmr(

                          and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                          the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                          c~vman form

                          and Services in audiometric

                          health that attendance

                          Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                          recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                          ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                          such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                          it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                          If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                          after

                          500-8000 take no further

                          500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                          advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                          check the noise exposure since the last was

                          are

                          audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                          errIOIJVEeS are

                          take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                          IF

                          Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                          161 (conlinood)

                          should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                          ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                          civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                          retest the Tlnt in six months

                          The referral criteria are

                          a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                          is 15 dB or more at any

                          wax or if there is a or

                          thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                          The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                          191

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                          Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                          Three decibel rule

                          The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                          SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                          85 8 hours

                          88 4 hours

                          91 2 hours

                          94 1 hour

                          97 30 minutes

                          100 15 minutes

                          1101

                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                          Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                          Section 10 - Reference material

                          References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                          2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                          3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                          4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                          5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                          6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                          7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                          8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                          9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                          10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                          11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                          12 Safety signs

                          13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                          14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                          15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                          16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                          17 Noise awareness program

                          18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                          19 OHS skills development training

                          20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                          21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                          Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                          1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                          AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                          ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                          Related material

                          1102 (ool1linuen)

                          • Part 1
                          • Part 2
                          • Part 3
                          • Part 4
                          • PArt 5

                            c

                            4

                            c

                            1-hazard Idlll1ntlllClIII(1II

                            or

                            AL1

                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                            3A5-2

                            c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

                            d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

                            familiar with the

                            Step 2-risk assessment

                            6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

                            a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

                            (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

                            (2) consultation wilh employees

                            (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

                            (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

                            (5) maintenance logs of plant

                            (6) manuals provided with plant

                            (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

                            (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

                            b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

                            c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

                            (1) very likely-could happen frequently

                            (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

                            (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

                            (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

                            d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

                            (1) fatality

                            (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

                            (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

                            (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

                            (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

                            AL1

                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                            3A5-3

                            e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

                            7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

                            Step 3-risk control

                            8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

                            a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

                            b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

                            c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

                            d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

                            (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

                            (2) education and training of em ployees

                            (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

                            (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

                            e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

                            (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

                            (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

                            (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

                            (4) to supplement other control measures

                            AL1

                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                            3A5~

                            Step 4-monitoring and review

                            9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

                            a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

                            b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

                            10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

                            a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

                            b the design is revised or modified

                            c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

                            d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

                            e the plant is moved

                            ownership of the plant changes

                            g there is a change to the workplace environment and

                            h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

                            Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

                            AL1

                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                            ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                            PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

                            UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

                            Program Manufacturer

                            Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

                            Inspected by Date

                            Hazard and Source Comments

                            Al1

                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                            ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                            RISK TABLE

                            1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

                            LIKELIHOOD

                            Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

                            Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                            MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                            Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

                            Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

                            Other asset damage

                            MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

                            2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

                            AL1

                            LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                            Sitampllocahon

                            Program

                            Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                            Compiled by

                            HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                            LIKELIHOOD

                            Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                            I Date

                            CONSEQUENCE

                            Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                            RISK RATING

                            (Sea appendix 2)

                            Higtl Medium Low

                            CONTROL ACTION

                            1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                            1 2 ~1

                            I

                            I 1 i

                            -g

                            ~ Z -t xl

                            en raquo en en m en en

                            Z ~

                            -t ~ o xl

                            en I

                            -t

                            ALi

                            RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                            CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                            APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                            PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                            REPORTING PERIOD

                            1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                            UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                            TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                            NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                            PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                            I

                            tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                            PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                            i(~l

                            I

                            -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                            Noles

                            Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                            (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                            2971

                            (e) Tower eras

                            (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                            Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                            (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                            ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                            a iO ltgt IIgt

                            Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                            PLANT

                            in

                            AS

                            Cross Reference

                            is to NI

                            B

                            at the or in the

                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                            38-2

                            f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                            g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                            h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                            8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                            RESPONSIBILITIES

                            9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                            10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                            11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                            12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                            a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                            b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                            c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                            NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                            13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                            Engineering controls

                            14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                            15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                            16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                            Amber Zone~

                            of

                            Black time

                            or 115

                            A f4nwnninotinn

                            Extreme Zone

                            b

                            a

                            to

                            Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                            Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                            38-6

                            34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                            Compensation

                            35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                            Education

                            36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                            37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                            Operational areas

                            38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                            Documentation

                            39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                            Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                            b

                            Defence OccUiJational Manual

                            1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                            NOISE

                            1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                            a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                            shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                            nor shall include refresher on

                            c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                            d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                            3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                            Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                            APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                            WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                            ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                            EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                            MUST BE WORN

                            EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                            ANNEXBTO

                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                            APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                            METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                            1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                            a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                            b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                            c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                            d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                            2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                            3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                            B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                            b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                            c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                            (1) advise the employee of the test results

                            (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                            (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                            protection

                            (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                            Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                            387-2

                            d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                            (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                            civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                            e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                            4 Tile referral crlleria are

                            a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                            b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                            c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                            d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                            5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                            civilian document

                            Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                            APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                            3 U RULE

                            1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                            SPL (dB(A)) of

                            85 8 hours

                            a8 4 hours

                            91 2 hours

                            94 1 hour

                            97 30 minutes

                            100 15 minutes

                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                            ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                            ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                            SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                            rtwIrlv

                            manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                            REFERENCES

                            1 Defence

                            MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                            2 Other

                            3 Cross Reference

                            4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                            Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                            AS

                            Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                            WELDING

                            SYNOPSIS

                            REFERENCES

                            1 Defence

                            W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                            2 Other

                            AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                            AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                            AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                            AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                            JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                            Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                            3 Cross Reference

                            1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                            5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                            7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                            ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                            FIRE SAFETY

                            SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                            REFERENCES

                            1 Defence

                            MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                            DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                            MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                            2 Other

                            AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                            AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                            AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                            AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                            AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                            AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                            AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                            AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                            3 Cross Reference

                            Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                            38-3

                            Administrative controls

                            17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                            Personal protective equipment

                            18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                            19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                            a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                            b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                            c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                            20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                            21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                            22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                            Noise assessments

                            23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                            24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                            a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                            b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                            c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                            d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                            Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                            11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                            THERMAL CONDITIONS

                            SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                            environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                            REFERENCES

                            1 Defence

                            DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                            OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                            DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                            If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                            2 Other

                            and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                            3 Cross Reference

                            8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                            112

                            113

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                            CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                            NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                            Section 1 - Overview

                            Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                            Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                            Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                            Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                            Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                            Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                            bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                            bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                            bull increased health care and compensation

                            Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                            For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                            Continued on next page

                            mAinArlA he risks to

                            means

                            the

                            I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                            118

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                            Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                            117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                            Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                            Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                            Section Content

                            1 Overview

                            2 Specific responsibilities

                            3 Noise management principles

                            4 Impulse noise

                            5 Warning signs

                            6 The use of foam earplugs

                            7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                            8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                            9 The three decibel rule

                            10 Reference material

                            The fnllnwinn

                            124

                            125

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                            Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                            Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                            When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                            Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                            bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                            bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                            bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                            When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                            Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                            Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                            Employees Employees are responsible for

                            bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                            bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                            bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                            Training and skilling

                            Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                            The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                            course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                            Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                            and OHS skills

                            Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                            costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                            131

                            132

                            133

                            134

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                            Section 3 - Noise management principles

                            Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                            Eng ineering controls

                            Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                            For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                            Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                            Administrative controls

                            Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                            Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                            Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                            The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                            bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                            bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                            bull regular audiometric examinations

                            Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                            Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                            Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                            135

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                            Noise assessments

                            Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                            Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                            bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                            bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                            bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                            bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                            Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                            Hearing protection areas

                            136

                            Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                            bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                            continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                            impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                            A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                            bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                            con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                            impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                            Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                            bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                            continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                            im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                            ConllmJ8o orl next page

                            137

                            138

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                            Hearing protection areas

                            136 (continued)

                            A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                            bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                            continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                            impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                            A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                            The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                            Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                            The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                            The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                            Audiometric examinations

                            Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                            bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                            bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                            Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                            ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                            139

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                            Audiometric eXaminations

                            138 (conlhued)

                            bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                            bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                            bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                            bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                            bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                            Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                            Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                            Education

                            1310

                            Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                            Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                            Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                            1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                            Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                            1312

                            141

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                            Section 4 -Impulse noise

                            Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                            This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                            bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                            bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                            bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                            bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                            151

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                            Section 5 - Warning signs

                            Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                            HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                            MUST BE W O R N

                            ( A MBER ZONE)

                            HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                            EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                            M UST BE W ORN

                            C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                            r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                            E AH MUFFS ]

                            M UST BE WOAN

                            HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                            l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                            MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                            ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                            161

                            162

                            163

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                            Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                            Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                            the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                            Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                            Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                            Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                            Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                            Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                            bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                            bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                            bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                            164

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                            Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                            FOR r shy

                            3

                            4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                            3

                            4 Hold

                            ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                            IiudeT

                            Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                            I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                            Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                            p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                            wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                            ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                            Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                            T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                            p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                            A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                            Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                            Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                            164 (conUnued)

                            -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                            ) VISUA CH CK

                            6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                            rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                            o ~Sati1h

                            s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                            Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                            bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                            171

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                            Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                            Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                            MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                            Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                            bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                            1 Toe(l __

                            - T 1at eI -

                            l

                            _~__ L-~~ ishy

                            ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                            AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                            ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                            Continued on ne)( page

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                            Form PM 139

                            171 (continued)

                            ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                            Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                            5 AmeoQlITir

                            bull

                            M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                            181

                            and

                            no matter how

                            are trained

                            DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                            11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                            Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                            8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                            lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                            the response button each time one of these it is

                            the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                            where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                            be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                            ears with the ear and

                            the audiometer win

                            the mmr(

                            and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                            the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                            c~vman form

                            and Services in audiometric

                            health that attendance

                            Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                            recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                            ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                            such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                            it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                            If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                            after

                            500-8000 take no further

                            500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                            advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                            check the noise exposure since the last was

                            are

                            audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                            errIOIJVEeS are

                            take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                            IF

                            Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                            161 (conlinood)

                            should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                            ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                            civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                            retest the Tlnt in six months

                            The referral criteria are

                            a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                            is 15 dB or more at any

                            wax or if there is a or

                            thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                            The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                            191

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                            Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                            Three decibel rule

                            The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                            SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                            85 8 hours

                            88 4 hours

                            91 2 hours

                            94 1 hour

                            97 30 minutes

                            100 15 minutes

                            1101

                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                            Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                            Section 10 - Reference material

                            References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                            2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                            3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                            4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                            5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                            6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                            7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                            8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                            9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                            10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                            11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                            12 Safety signs

                            13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                            14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                            15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                            16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                            17 Noise awareness program

                            18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                            19 OHS skills development training

                            20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                            21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                            Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                            1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                            AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                            ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                            Related material

                            1102 (ool1linuen)

                            • Part 1
                            • Part 2
                            • Part 3
                            • Part 4
                            • PArt 5

                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                              3A5-2

                              c conducting a workplace audit using a plant hazard inspection worksheet (refer to enclosure 1) The audit should focus not only on hazards associated with the Item of plant but also the system of work and

                              d seeking the views of employees who work with plant as they are hazards associated with the particular item of plant they operate

                              familiar with the

                              Step 2-risk assessment

                              6 If during step 1 a potentially hazardous event or situation is identified which may arise from plant In the workplace these are to be assessed to determine the risk posed by each hazard This is achieved by

                              a gathering information about each hazard idenli led Source of infonnalion include

                              (1 ) observation of the workplace system of work etc

                              (2) consultation wilh employees

                              (3) accidenVincident compensation and first aid records

                              (4) report (eg Hazard Reports) from employees or supervisors

                              (5) maintenance logs of plant

                              (6) manuals provided with plant

                              (7) articles in Occupational Health and Safety newslettersmagazines and

                              (8) other agencies (eg Worksafe Australia Comcare Australia manufacturer etc)

                              b detennining how many people are exposed 10 each hazard and for how long

                              c assessing the likelihood that the hazard will occur within the life of the plant The likelihood may be defined as

                              (1) very likely-could happen frequently

                              (2) likely-coutd happen occasionally

                              (3) unlikely-could happen but only rarely and

                              (4) highly unlikely~ould happen but probably never will

                              d assessing the consequence of a hazardous event or situation The consequence may inclUde any of the following

                              (1) fatality

                              (2) major injuries (nonnally irreversible injury or damage to health)

                              (3) minor injuries (normally reversible injury or damage to health requiring several days off work)

                              (4) negligible injuries (first aid) and

                              (5) damage to a sets (ie buildings other pi nt and eqUipment)

                              AL1

                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                              3A5-3

                              e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

                              7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

                              Step 3-risk control

                              8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

                              a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

                              b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

                              c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

                              d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

                              (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

                              (2) education and training of em ployees

                              (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

                              (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

                              e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

                              (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

                              (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

                              (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

                              (4) to supplement other control measures

                              AL1

                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                              3A5~

                              Step 4-monitoring and review

                              9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

                              a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

                              b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

                              10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

                              a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

                              b the design is revised or modified

                              c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

                              d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

                              e the plant is moved

                              ownership of the plant changes

                              g there is a change to the workplace environment and

                              h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

                              Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

                              AL1

                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                              ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                              PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

                              UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

                              Program Manufacturer

                              Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

                              Inspected by Date

                              Hazard and Source Comments

                              Al1

                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                              ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                              RISK TABLE

                              1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

                              LIKELIHOOD

                              Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

                              Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                              MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                              Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

                              Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

                              Other asset damage

                              MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

                              2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

                              AL1

                              LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                              Sitampllocahon

                              Program

                              Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                              Compiled by

                              HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                              LIKELIHOOD

                              Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                              I Date

                              CONSEQUENCE

                              Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                              RISK RATING

                              (Sea appendix 2)

                              Higtl Medium Low

                              CONTROL ACTION

                              1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                              1 2 ~1

                              I

                              I 1 i

                              -g

                              ~ Z -t xl

                              en raquo en en m en en

                              Z ~

                              -t ~ o xl

                              en I

                              -t

                              ALi

                              RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                              CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                              APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                              PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                              REPORTING PERIOD

                              1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                              UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                              TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                              NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                              PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                              I

                              tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                              PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                              i(~l

                              I

                              -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                              Noles

                              Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                              (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                              2971

                              (e) Tower eras

                              (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                              Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                              (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                              ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                              a iO ltgt IIgt

                              Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                              PLANT

                              in

                              AS

                              Cross Reference

                              is to NI

                              B

                              at the or in the

                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                              38-2

                              f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                              g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                              h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                              8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                              RESPONSIBILITIES

                              9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                              10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                              11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                              12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                              a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                              b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                              c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                              NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                              13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                              Engineering controls

                              14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                              15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                              16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                              Amber Zone~

                              of

                              Black time

                              or 115

                              A f4nwnninotinn

                              Extreme Zone

                              b

                              a

                              to

                              Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                              Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                              38-6

                              34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                              Compensation

                              35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                              Education

                              36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                              37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                              Operational areas

                              38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                              Documentation

                              39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                              Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                              b

                              Defence OccUiJational Manual

                              1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                              NOISE

                              1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                              a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                              shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                              nor shall include refresher on

                              c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                              d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                              3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                              Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                              APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                              WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                              ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                              EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                              MUST BE WORN

                              EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                              ANNEXBTO

                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                              APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                              METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                              1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                              a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                              b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                              c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                              d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                              2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                              3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                              B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                              b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                              c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                              (1) advise the employee of the test results

                              (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                              (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                              protection

                              (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                              Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                              387-2

                              d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                              (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                              civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                              e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                              4 Tile referral crlleria are

                              a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                              b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                              c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                              d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                              5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                              civilian document

                              Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                              APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                              3 U RULE

                              1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                              SPL (dB(A)) of

                              85 8 hours

                              a8 4 hours

                              91 2 hours

                              94 1 hour

                              97 30 minutes

                              100 15 minutes

                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                              ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                              ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                              SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                              rtwIrlv

                              manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                              REFERENCES

                              1 Defence

                              MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                              2 Other

                              3 Cross Reference

                              4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                              Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                              AS

                              Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                              WELDING

                              SYNOPSIS

                              REFERENCES

                              1 Defence

                              W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                              2 Other

                              AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                              AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                              AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                              AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                              JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                              Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                              3 Cross Reference

                              1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                              5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                              7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                              ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                              FIRE SAFETY

                              SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                              REFERENCES

                              1 Defence

                              MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                              DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                              MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                              2 Other

                              AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                              AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                              AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                              AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                              AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                              AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                              AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                              AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                              3 Cross Reference

                              Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                              38-3

                              Administrative controls

                              17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                              Personal protective equipment

                              18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                              19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                              a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                              b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                              c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                              20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                              21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                              22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                              Noise assessments

                              23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                              24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                              a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                              b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                              c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                              d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                              Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                              11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                              THERMAL CONDITIONS

                              SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                              environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                              REFERENCES

                              1 Defence

                              DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                              OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                              DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                              If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                              2 Other

                              and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                              3 Cross Reference

                              8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                              112

                              113

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                              CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                              NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                              Section 1 - Overview

                              Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                              Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                              Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                              Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                              Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                              Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                              bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                              bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                              bull increased health care and compensation

                              Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                              For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                              Continued on next page

                              mAinArlA he risks to

                              means

                              the

                              I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                              118

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                              Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                              117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                              Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                              Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                              Section Content

                              1 Overview

                              2 Specific responsibilities

                              3 Noise management principles

                              4 Impulse noise

                              5 Warning signs

                              6 The use of foam earplugs

                              7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                              8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                              9 The three decibel rule

                              10 Reference material

                              The fnllnwinn

                              124

                              125

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                              Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                              Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                              When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                              Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                              bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                              bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                              bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                              When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                              Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                              Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                              Employees Employees are responsible for

                              bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                              bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                              bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                              Training and skilling

                              Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                              The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                              course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                              Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                              and OHS skills

                              Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                              costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                              131

                              132

                              133

                              134

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                              Section 3 - Noise management principles

                              Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                              Eng ineering controls

                              Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                              For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                              Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                              Administrative controls

                              Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                              Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                              Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                              The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                              bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                              bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                              bull regular audiometric examinations

                              Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                              Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                              Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                              135

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                              Noise assessments

                              Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                              Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                              bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                              bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                              bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                              bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                              Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                              Hearing protection areas

                              136

                              Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                              bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                              continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                              impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                              A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                              bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                              con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                              impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                              Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                              bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                              continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                              im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                              ConllmJ8o orl next page

                              137

                              138

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                              Hearing protection areas

                              136 (continued)

                              A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                              bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                              continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                              impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                              A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                              The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                              Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                              The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                              The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                              Audiometric examinations

                              Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                              bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                              bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                              Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                              ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                              139

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                              Audiometric eXaminations

                              138 (conlhued)

                              bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                              bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                              bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                              bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                              bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                              Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                              Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                              Education

                              1310

                              Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                              Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                              Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                              1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                              Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                              1312

                              141

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                              Section 4 -Impulse noise

                              Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                              This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                              bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                              bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                              bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                              bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                              151

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                              Section 5 - Warning signs

                              Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                              HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                              MUST BE W O R N

                              ( A MBER ZONE)

                              HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                              EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                              M UST BE W ORN

                              C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                              r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                              E AH MUFFS ]

                              M UST BE WOAN

                              HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                              l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                              MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                              ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                              161

                              162

                              163

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                              Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                              Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                              the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                              Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                              Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                              Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                              Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                              Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                              bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                              bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                              bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                              164

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                              Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                              FOR r shy

                              3

                              4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                              3

                              4 Hold

                              ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                              IiudeT

                              Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                              I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                              Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                              p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                              wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                              ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                              Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                              T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                              p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                              A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                              Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                              Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                              164 (conUnued)

                              -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                              ) VISUA CH CK

                              6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                              rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                              o ~Sati1h

                              s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                              Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                              bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                              171

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                              Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                              Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                              MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                              Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                              bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                              1 Toe(l __

                              - T 1at eI -

                              l

                              _~__ L-~~ ishy

                              ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                              AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                              ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                              Continued on ne)( page

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                              Form PM 139

                              171 (continued)

                              ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                              Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                              5 AmeoQlITir

                              bull

                              M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                              181

                              and

                              no matter how

                              are trained

                              DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                              11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                              Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                              8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                              lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                              the response button each time one of these it is

                              the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                              where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                              be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                              ears with the ear and

                              the audiometer win

                              the mmr(

                              and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                              the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                              c~vman form

                              and Services in audiometric

                              health that attendance

                              Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                              recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                              ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                              such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                              it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                              If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                              after

                              500-8000 take no further

                              500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                              advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                              check the noise exposure since the last was

                              are

                              audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                              errIOIJVEeS are

                              take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                              IF

                              Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                              161 (conlinood)

                              should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                              ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                              civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                              retest the Tlnt in six months

                              The referral criteria are

                              a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                              is 15 dB or more at any

                              wax or if there is a or

                              thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                              The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                              191

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                              Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                              Three decibel rule

                              The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                              SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                              85 8 hours

                              88 4 hours

                              91 2 hours

                              94 1 hour

                              97 30 minutes

                              100 15 minutes

                              1101

                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                              Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                              Section 10 - Reference material

                              References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                              2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                              3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                              4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                              5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                              6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                              7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                              8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                              9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                              10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                              11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                              12 Safety signs

                              13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                              14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                              15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                              16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                              17 Noise awareness program

                              18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                              19 OHS skills development training

                              20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                              21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                              Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                              1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                              AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                              ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                              Related material

                              1102 (ool1linuen)

                              • Part 1
                              • Part 2
                              • Part 3
                              • Part 4
                              • PArt 5

                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                3A5-3

                                e determining the seriousness of the risk associated with the hazardous event or situation This may be done with the assistance of the risk table which is in enclosure 2

                                7 Following a risk assessment the hazards identified should be priorillsed so Ihat Ihose with a high risk raling are tackled first fo llowed by hazards with a medium risk rating and then t ose with a low risk rating An example of a risk assessment worksheet is oontained in enclosure 3

                                Step 3-risk control

                                8 Where a risk to health and safety has been identified the next slep in the risk management process is to determine the appropriate strategy to effectively control the hazards Ri sks are to be controlled using the following conlrol hierarchy In many cases a combination of controls wjIJ be necessary to reduce Ihe risk to a safe level

                                a El iminationsubstitution The best way to eliminate the hazard is to completely remove the plant or system of work f elimination is not possible then it may be possible to SUbstitute the plant or paris of the plant for other types which present a lower level of riSk

                                b Isolation Isolaling the hazard allows for the physical separation of the hazard from the workplace If the hazard cannot be eliminated then the separation of the hazard from employees by use of guards on plant completely enclosing noisy plant in booths relocating noisy portions of the plant or the use of remote handling devices should be considered

                                c Engineering Engineering the hazard out through modifying the plani by installing cut-out switches screens andor machine guards and venti lation systems

                                d Administrative Safe work practices must be encouraged and used at all limes to minimise exposure to a hazard and thereby minimiSing the risk Administrative control measures include

                                (1) Job rotation to reduce the exposure time to hazardous work processes or conditions

                                (2) education and training of em ployees

                                (3) adequate housekeeping procedures and

                                (4) supervision of employees in safe work practices

                                e Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) This control measure is a means of covering and protecting an employees body from hazards This form of control shOUld only be used in the following situations

                                (1) as a temporary measure until a more effective control can be established

                                (2) if other controls are impracticable 0 not as effective or efficient as PPE

                                (3) during routine maintenance or emergency clean up procedures and

                                (4) to supplement other control measures

                                AL1

                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                3A5~

                                Step 4-monitoring and review

                                9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

                                a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

                                b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

                                10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

                                a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

                                b the design is revised or modified

                                c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

                                d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

                                e the plant is moved

                                ownership of the plant changes

                                g there is a change to the workplace environment and

                                h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

                                Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

                                AL1

                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                                PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

                                UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

                                Program Manufacturer

                                Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

                                Inspected by Date

                                Hazard and Source Comments

                                Al1

                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                                RISK TABLE

                                1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

                                LIKELIHOOD

                                Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

                                Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                                MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                                Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

                                Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

                                Other asset damage

                                MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

                                2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

                                AL1

                                LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                                Sitampllocahon

                                Program

                                Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                                Compiled by

                                HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                                LIKELIHOOD

                                Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                                I Date

                                CONSEQUENCE

                                Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                                RISK RATING

                                (Sea appendix 2)

                                Higtl Medium Low

                                CONTROL ACTION

                                1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                                1 2 ~1

                                I

                                I 1 i

                                -g

                                ~ Z -t xl

                                en raquo en en m en en

                                Z ~

                                -t ~ o xl

                                en I

                                -t

                                ALi

                                RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                                APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                                PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                                REPORTING PERIOD

                                1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                                UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                                TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                                NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                                PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                                I

                                tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                                PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                                i(~l

                                I

                                -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                Noles

                                Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                                (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                                2971

                                (e) Tower eras

                                (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                                Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                                (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                                ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                                a iO ltgt IIgt

                                Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                                PLANT

                                in

                                AS

                                Cross Reference

                                is to NI

                                B

                                at the or in the

                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                38-2

                                f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                                g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                                h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                                8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                                RESPONSIBILITIES

                                9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                                10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                                11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                                12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                                a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                                c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                                NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                                13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                Engineering controls

                                14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                                15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                                Amber Zone~

                                of

                                Black time

                                or 115

                                A f4nwnninotinn

                                Extreme Zone

                                b

                                a

                                to

                                Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                38-6

                                34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                Compensation

                                35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                Education

                                36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                Operational areas

                                38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                Documentation

                                39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                b

                                Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                NOISE

                                1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                nor shall include refresher on

                                c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                MUST BE WORN

                                EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                ANNEXBTO

                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                protection

                                (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                387-2

                                d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                civilian document

                                Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                3 U RULE

                                1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                SPL (dB(A)) of

                                85 8 hours

                                a8 4 hours

                                91 2 hours

                                94 1 hour

                                97 30 minutes

                                100 15 minutes

                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                rtwIrlv

                                manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                REFERENCES

                                1 Defence

                                MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                2 Other

                                3 Cross Reference

                                4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                AS

                                Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                WELDING

                                SYNOPSIS

                                REFERENCES

                                1 Defence

                                W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                2 Other

                                AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                3 Cross Reference

                                1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                FIRE SAFETY

                                SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                REFERENCES

                                1 Defence

                                MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                2 Other

                                AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                3 Cross Reference

                                Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                38-3

                                Administrative controls

                                17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                Personal protective equipment

                                18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                Noise assessments

                                23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                REFERENCES

                                1 Defence

                                DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                2 Other

                                and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                3 Cross Reference

                                8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                112

                                113

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                Section 1 - Overview

                                Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                bull increased health care and compensation

                                Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                Continued on next page

                                mAinArlA he risks to

                                means

                                the

                                I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                118

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                Section Content

                                1 Overview

                                2 Specific responsibilities

                                3 Noise management principles

                                4 Impulse noise

                                5 Warning signs

                                6 The use of foam earplugs

                                7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                9 The three decibel rule

                                10 Reference material

                                The fnllnwinn

                                124

                                125

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                Employees Employees are responsible for

                                bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                Training and skilling

                                Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                and OHS skills

                                Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                131

                                132

                                133

                                134

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                Eng ineering controls

                                Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                Administrative controls

                                Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                bull regular audiometric examinations

                                Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                135

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                Noise assessments

                                Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                Hearing protection areas

                                136

                                Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                137

                                138

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                Hearing protection areas

                                136 (continued)

                                A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                Audiometric examinations

                                Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                139

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                Audiometric eXaminations

                                138 (conlhued)

                                bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                Education

                                1310

                                Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                1312

                                141

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                151

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                Section 5 - Warning signs

                                Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                MUST BE W O R N

                                ( A MBER ZONE)

                                HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                M UST BE W ORN

                                C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                E AH MUFFS ]

                                M UST BE WOAN

                                HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                161

                                162

                                163

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                164

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                FOR r shy

                                3

                                4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                3

                                4 Hold

                                ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                IiudeT

                                Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                164 (conUnued)

                                -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                ) VISUA CH CK

                                6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                o ~Sati1h

                                s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                171

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                1 Toe(l __

                                - T 1at eI -

                                l

                                _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                Continued on ne)( page

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                Form PM 139

                                171 (continued)

                                ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                5 AmeoQlITir

                                bull

                                M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                181

                                and

                                no matter how

                                are trained

                                DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                the response button each time one of these it is

                                the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                ears with the ear and

                                the audiometer win

                                the mmr(

                                and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                c~vman form

                                and Services in audiometric

                                health that attendance

                                Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                after

                                500-8000 take no further

                                500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                check the noise exposure since the last was

                                are

                                audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                errIOIJVEeS are

                                take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                IF

                                Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                161 (conlinood)

                                should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                retest the Tlnt in six months

                                The referral criteria are

                                a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                is 15 dB or more at any

                                wax or if there is a or

                                thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                191

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                Three decibel rule

                                The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                85 8 hours

                                88 4 hours

                                91 2 hours

                                94 1 hour

                                97 30 minutes

                                100 15 minutes

                                1101

                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                Section 10 - Reference material

                                References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                12 Safety signs

                                13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                17 Noise awareness program

                                18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                19 OHS skills development training

                                20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                Related material

                                1102 (ool1linuen)

                                • Part 1
                                • Part 2
                                • Part 3
                                • Part 4
                                • PArt 5

                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                  3A5~

                                  Step 4-monitoring and review

                                  9 Monitoring and review is a necessary component of the risk management process as

                                  a it assists in determining how effective the control measures have been (ie whether or not they have had the intended effect and that no hazards have been created by the control measure itself) and

                                  b not ali hazards may have been identified and they may show up after a control measure is implemented

                                  10 Risk assessments must also be undertaken whenever circumstances change For example when

                                  a information is obtained about a previously unknown design or mLlnufacturing fault or about a previously unidentified hazard

                                  b the design is revised or modified

                                  c there is a change to a risk control measure after a review of its effectiveness

                                  d the system of work associated with the plant is changed

                                  e the plant is moved

                                  ownership of the plant changes

                                  g there is a change to the workplace environment and

                                  h there is any other change that makes the existing risk assessment irrelevant

                                  Enclosures 1 Plant hazard identification work sheet 2 Risk table 3 Plant risk assessment work sheet

                                  AL1

                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                  ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                                  PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

                                  UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

                                  Program Manufacturer

                                  Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

                                  Inspected by Date

                                  Hazard and Source Comments

                                  Al1

                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                  ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                                  RISK TABLE

                                  1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

                                  LIKELIHOOD

                                  Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

                                  Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                                  MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                                  Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

                                  Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

                                  Other asset damage

                                  MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

                                  2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

                                  AL1

                                  LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                                  Sitampllocahon

                                  Program

                                  Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                                  Compiled by

                                  HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                                  LIKELIHOOD

                                  Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                                  I Date

                                  CONSEQUENCE

                                  Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                                  RISK RATING

                                  (Sea appendix 2)

                                  Higtl Medium Low

                                  CONTROL ACTION

                                  1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                                  1 2 ~1

                                  I

                                  I 1 i

                                  -g

                                  ~ Z -t xl

                                  en raquo en en m en en

                                  Z ~

                                  -t ~ o xl

                                  en I

                                  -t

                                  ALi

                                  RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                  CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                                  APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                                  PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                                  REPORTING PERIOD

                                  1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                                  UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                                  TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                                  NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                                  PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                                  I

                                  tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                                  PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                                  i(~l

                                  I

                                  -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                  Noles

                                  Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                                  (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                                  2971

                                  (e) Tower eras

                                  (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                                  Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                                  (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                                  ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                                  a iO ltgt IIgt

                                  Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                                  PLANT

                                  in

                                  AS

                                  Cross Reference

                                  is to NI

                                  B

                                  at the or in the

                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                  38-2

                                  f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                                  g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                                  h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                                  8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                                  RESPONSIBILITIES

                                  9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                                  10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                                  11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                                  12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                                  a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                  b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                                  c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                                  NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                                  13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                  Engineering controls

                                  14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                                  15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                  16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                                  Amber Zone~

                                  of

                                  Black time

                                  or 115

                                  A f4nwnninotinn

                                  Extreme Zone

                                  b

                                  a

                                  to

                                  Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                  Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                  38-6

                                  34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                  Compensation

                                  35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                  Education

                                  36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                  37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                  Operational areas

                                  38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                  Documentation

                                  39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                  Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                  b

                                  Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                  1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                  NOISE

                                  1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                  a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                  shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                  nor shall include refresher on

                                  c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                  d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                  3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                  APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                  WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                  ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                  EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                  MUST BE WORN

                                  EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                  ANNEXBTO

                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                  APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                  METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                  1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                  a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                  b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                  c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                  d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                  2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                  3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                  B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                  b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                  c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                  (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                  (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                  (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                  protection

                                  (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                  Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                  387-2

                                  d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                  (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                  civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                  e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                  4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                  a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                  b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                  c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                  d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                  5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                  civilian document

                                  Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                  APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                  3 U RULE

                                  1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                  SPL (dB(A)) of

                                  85 8 hours

                                  a8 4 hours

                                  91 2 hours

                                  94 1 hour

                                  97 30 minutes

                                  100 15 minutes

                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                  ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                  ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                  SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                  rtwIrlv

                                  manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                  REFERENCES

                                  1 Defence

                                  MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                  2 Other

                                  3 Cross Reference

                                  4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                  Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                  AS

                                  Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                  WELDING

                                  SYNOPSIS

                                  REFERENCES

                                  1 Defence

                                  W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                  2 Other

                                  AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                  AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                  AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                  AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                  JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                  Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                  3 Cross Reference

                                  1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                  5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                  7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                  ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                  FIRE SAFETY

                                  SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                  REFERENCES

                                  1 Defence

                                  MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                  DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                  MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                  2 Other

                                  AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                  AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                  AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                  AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                  AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                  AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                  AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                  AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                  3 Cross Reference

                                  Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                  38-3

                                  Administrative controls

                                  17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                  Personal protective equipment

                                  18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                  19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                  a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                  b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                  c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                  20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                  21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                  22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                  Noise assessments

                                  23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                  24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                  a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                  b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                  c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                  d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                  Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                  11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                  THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                  SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                  environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                  REFERENCES

                                  1 Defence

                                  DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                  OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                  DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                  If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                  2 Other

                                  and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                  3 Cross Reference

                                  8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                  112

                                  113

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                  CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                  NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                  Section 1 - Overview

                                  Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                  Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                  Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                  Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                  Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                  Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                  bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                  bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                  bull increased health care and compensation

                                  Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                  For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                  Continued on next page

                                  mAinArlA he risks to

                                  means

                                  the

                                  I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                  118

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                  Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                  117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                  Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                  Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                  Section Content

                                  1 Overview

                                  2 Specific responsibilities

                                  3 Noise management principles

                                  4 Impulse noise

                                  5 Warning signs

                                  6 The use of foam earplugs

                                  7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                  8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                  9 The three decibel rule

                                  10 Reference material

                                  The fnllnwinn

                                  124

                                  125

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                  Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                  Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                  When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                  Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                  bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                  bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                  bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                  When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                  Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                  Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                  Employees Employees are responsible for

                                  bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                  bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                  bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                  Training and skilling

                                  Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                  The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                  course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                  Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                  and OHS skills

                                  Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                  costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                  131

                                  132

                                  133

                                  134

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                  Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                  Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                  Eng ineering controls

                                  Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                  For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                  Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                  Administrative controls

                                  Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                  Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                  Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                  The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                  bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                  bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                  bull regular audiometric examinations

                                  Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                  Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                  Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                  135

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                  Noise assessments

                                  Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                  Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                  bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                  bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                  bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                  bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                  Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                  Hearing protection areas

                                  136

                                  Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                  bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                  continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                  impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                  A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                  bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                  con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                  impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                  Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                  bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                  continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                  im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                  ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                  137

                                  138

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                  Hearing protection areas

                                  136 (continued)

                                  A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                  bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                  continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                  impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                  A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                  The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                  Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                  The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                  The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                  Audiometric examinations

                                  Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                  bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                  bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                  Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                  ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                  139

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                  Audiometric eXaminations

                                  138 (conlhued)

                                  bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                  bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                  bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                  bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                  bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                  Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                  Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                  Education

                                  1310

                                  Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                  Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                  Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                  1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                  Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                  1312

                                  141

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                  Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                  Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                  This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                  bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                  bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                  bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                  bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                  151

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                  Section 5 - Warning signs

                                  Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                  HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                  MUST BE W O R N

                                  ( A MBER ZONE)

                                  HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                  EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                  M UST BE W ORN

                                  C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                  r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                  E AH MUFFS ]

                                  M UST BE WOAN

                                  HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                  l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                  MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                  ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                  161

                                  162

                                  163

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                  Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                  Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                  the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                  Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                  Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                  Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                  Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                  Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                  bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                  bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                  bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                  164

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                  Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                  FOR r shy

                                  3

                                  4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                  3

                                  4 Hold

                                  ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                  IiudeT

                                  Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                  I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                  Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                  p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                  wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                  ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                  Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                  T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                  p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                  A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                  Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                  Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                  164 (conUnued)

                                  -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                  ) VISUA CH CK

                                  6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                  rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                  o ~Sati1h

                                  s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                  Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                  bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                  171

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                  Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                  Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                  MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                  Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                  bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                  1 Toe(l __

                                  - T 1at eI -

                                  l

                                  _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                  ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                  AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                  ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                  Continued on ne)( page

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                  Form PM 139

                                  171 (continued)

                                  ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                  Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                  5 AmeoQlITir

                                  bull

                                  M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                  181

                                  and

                                  no matter how

                                  are trained

                                  DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                  11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                  Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                  8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                  lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                  the response button each time one of these it is

                                  the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                  where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                  be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                  ears with the ear and

                                  the audiometer win

                                  the mmr(

                                  and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                  the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                  c~vman form

                                  and Services in audiometric

                                  health that attendance

                                  Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                  recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                  ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                  such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                  it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                  If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                  after

                                  500-8000 take no further

                                  500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                  advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                  check the noise exposure since the last was

                                  are

                                  audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                  errIOIJVEeS are

                                  take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                  IF

                                  Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                  161 (conlinood)

                                  should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                  ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                  civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                  retest the Tlnt in six months

                                  The referral criteria are

                                  a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                  is 15 dB or more at any

                                  wax or if there is a or

                                  thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                  The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                  191

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                  Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                  Three decibel rule

                                  The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                  SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                  85 8 hours

                                  88 4 hours

                                  91 2 hours

                                  94 1 hour

                                  97 30 minutes

                                  100 15 minutes

                                  1101

                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                  Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                  Section 10 - Reference material

                                  References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                  2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                  3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                  4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                  5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                  6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                  7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                  8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                  9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                  10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                  11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                  12 Safety signs

                                  13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                  14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                  15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                  16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                  17 Noise awareness program

                                  18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                  19 OHS skills development training

                                  20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                  21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                  Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                  1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                  AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                  ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                  Related material

                                  1102 (ool1linuen)

                                  • Part 1
                                  • Part 2
                                  • Part 3
                                  • Part 4
                                  • PArt 5

                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                    ENCLOSURE 1 TO APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                                    PLANT HAZARD IDENTIFICATION WORK SHEET (Please use a separate form for each item of plant)

                                    UniUEstabtishmentlBranch Plant

                                    Program Manufacturer

                                    Sitelocation Model and Senal Number

                                    Inspected by Date

                                    Hazard and Source Comments

                                    Al1

                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                    ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                                    RISK TABLE

                                    1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

                                    LIKELIHOOD

                                    Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

                                    Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                                    MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                                    Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

                                    Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

                                    Other asset damage

                                    MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

                                    2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

                                    AL1

                                    LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                                    Sitampllocahon

                                    Program

                                    Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                                    Compiled by

                                    HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                                    LIKELIHOOD

                                    Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                                    I Date

                                    CONSEQUENCE

                                    Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                                    RISK RATING

                                    (Sea appendix 2)

                                    Higtl Medium Low

                                    CONTROL ACTION

                                    1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                                    1 2 ~1

                                    I

                                    I 1 i

                                    -g

                                    ~ Z -t xl

                                    en raquo en en m en en

                                    Z ~

                                    -t ~ o xl

                                    en I

                                    -t

                                    ALi

                                    RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                    CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                                    APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                                    PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                                    REPORTING PERIOD

                                    1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                                    UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                                    TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                                    NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                                    PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                                    I

                                    tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                                    PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                                    i(~l

                                    I

                                    -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                    Noles

                                    Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                                    (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                                    2971

                                    (e) Tower eras

                                    (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                                    Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                                    (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                                    ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                                    a iO ltgt IIgt

                                    Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                                    PLANT

                                    in

                                    AS

                                    Cross Reference

                                    is to NI

                                    B

                                    at the or in the

                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                    38-2

                                    f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                                    g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                                    h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                                    8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                                    RESPONSIBILITIES

                                    9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                                    10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                                    11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                                    12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                                    a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                    b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                                    c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                                    NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                                    13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                    Engineering controls

                                    14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                                    15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                    16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                                    Amber Zone~

                                    of

                                    Black time

                                    or 115

                                    A f4nwnninotinn

                                    Extreme Zone

                                    b

                                    a

                                    to

                                    Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                    Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                    38-6

                                    34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                    Compensation

                                    35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                    Education

                                    36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                    37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                    Operational areas

                                    38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                    Documentation

                                    39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                    Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                    b

                                    Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                    1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                    NOISE

                                    1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                    a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                    shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                    nor shall include refresher on

                                    c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                    d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                    3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                    APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                    WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                    ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                    EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                    MUST BE WORN

                                    EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                    ANNEXBTO

                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                    APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                    METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                    1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                    a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                    b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                    c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                    d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                    2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                    3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                    B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                    b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                    c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                    (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                    (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                    (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                    protection

                                    (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                    Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                    387-2

                                    d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                    (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                    civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                    e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                    4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                    a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                    b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                    c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                    d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                    5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                    civilian document

                                    Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                    APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                    3 U RULE

                                    1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                    SPL (dB(A)) of

                                    85 8 hours

                                    a8 4 hours

                                    91 2 hours

                                    94 1 hour

                                    97 30 minutes

                                    100 15 minutes

                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                    ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                    ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                    SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                    rtwIrlv

                                    manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                    REFERENCES

                                    1 Defence

                                    MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                    2 Other

                                    3 Cross Reference

                                    4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                    Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                    AS

                                    Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                    WELDING

                                    SYNOPSIS

                                    REFERENCES

                                    1 Defence

                                    W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                    2 Other

                                    AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                    AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                    AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                    AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                    JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                    Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                    3 Cross Reference

                                    1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                    5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                    7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                    ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                    FIRE SAFETY

                                    SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                    REFERENCES

                                    1 Defence

                                    MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                    DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                    MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                    2 Other

                                    AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                    AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                    AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                    AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                    AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                    AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                    AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                    AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                    3 Cross Reference

                                    Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                    38-3

                                    Administrative controls

                                    17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                    Personal protective equipment

                                    18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                    19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                    a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                    b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                    c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                    20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                    21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                    22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                    Noise assessments

                                    23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                    24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                    a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                    b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                    c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                    d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                    Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                    11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                    THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                    SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                    environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                    REFERENCES

                                    1 Defence

                                    DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                    OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                    DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                    If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                    2 Other

                                    and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                    3 Cross Reference

                                    8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                    112

                                    113

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                    CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                    NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                    Section 1 - Overview

                                    Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                    Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                    Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                    Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                    Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                    Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                    bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                    bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                    bull increased health care and compensation

                                    Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                    For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                    Continued on next page

                                    mAinArlA he risks to

                                    means

                                    the

                                    I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                    118

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                    Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                    117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                    Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                    Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                    Section Content

                                    1 Overview

                                    2 Specific responsibilities

                                    3 Noise management principles

                                    4 Impulse noise

                                    5 Warning signs

                                    6 The use of foam earplugs

                                    7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                    8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                    9 The three decibel rule

                                    10 Reference material

                                    The fnllnwinn

                                    124

                                    125

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                    Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                    Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                    When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                    Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                    bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                    bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                    bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                    When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                    Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                    Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                    Employees Employees are responsible for

                                    bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                    bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                    bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                    Training and skilling

                                    Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                    The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                    course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                    Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                    and OHS skills

                                    Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                    costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                    131

                                    132

                                    133

                                    134

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                    Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                    Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                    Eng ineering controls

                                    Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                    For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                    Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                    Administrative controls

                                    Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                    Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                    Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                    The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                    bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                    bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                    bull regular audiometric examinations

                                    Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                    Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                    Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                    135

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                    Noise assessments

                                    Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                    Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                    bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                    bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                    bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                    bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                    Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                    Hearing protection areas

                                    136

                                    Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                    bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                    continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                    impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                    A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                    bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                    con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                    impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                    Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                    bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                    continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                    im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                    ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                    137

                                    138

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                    Hearing protection areas

                                    136 (continued)

                                    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                    bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                    continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                    impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                    The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                    Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                    The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                    The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                    Audiometric examinations

                                    Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                    bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                    bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                    Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                    ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                    139

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                    Audiometric eXaminations

                                    138 (conlhued)

                                    bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                    bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                    bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                    bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                    bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                    Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                    Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                    Education

                                    1310

                                    Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                    Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                    Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                    1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                    Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                    1312

                                    141

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                    Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                    Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                    This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                    bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                    bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                    bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                    bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                    151

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                    Section 5 - Warning signs

                                    Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                    HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                    MUST BE W O R N

                                    ( A MBER ZONE)

                                    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                    EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                    M UST BE W ORN

                                    C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                    r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                    E AH MUFFS ]

                                    M UST BE WOAN

                                    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                    l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                    MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                    ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                    161

                                    162

                                    163

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                    Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                    Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                    the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                    Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                    Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                    Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                    Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                    Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                    bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                    bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                    bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                    164

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                    Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                    FOR r shy

                                    3

                                    4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                    3

                                    4 Hold

                                    ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                    IiudeT

                                    Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                    I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                    Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                    p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                    wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                    ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                    Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                    T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                    p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                    A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                    Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                    Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                    164 (conUnued)

                                    -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                    ) VISUA CH CK

                                    6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                    rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                    o ~Sati1h

                                    s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                    Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                    bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                    171

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                    Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                    Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                    MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                    Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                    bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                    1 Toe(l __

                                    - T 1at eI -

                                    l

                                    _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                    ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                    AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                    ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                    Continued on ne)( page

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                    Form PM 139

                                    171 (continued)

                                    ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                    Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                    5 AmeoQlITir

                                    bull

                                    M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                    181

                                    and

                                    no matter how

                                    are trained

                                    DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                    11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                    Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                    8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                    lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                    the response button each time one of these it is

                                    the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                    where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                    be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                    ears with the ear and

                                    the audiometer win

                                    the mmr(

                                    and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                    the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                    c~vman form

                                    and Services in audiometric

                                    health that attendance

                                    Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                    recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                    ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                    such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                    it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                    If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                    after

                                    500-8000 take no further

                                    500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                    advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                    check the noise exposure since the last was

                                    are

                                    audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                    errIOIJVEeS are

                                    take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                    IF

                                    Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                    161 (conlinood)

                                    should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                    ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                    civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                    retest the Tlnt in six months

                                    The referral criteria are

                                    a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                    is 15 dB or more at any

                                    wax or if there is a or

                                    thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                    The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                    191

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                    Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                    Three decibel rule

                                    The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                    SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                    85 8 hours

                                    88 4 hours

                                    91 2 hours

                                    94 1 hour

                                    97 30 minutes

                                    100 15 minutes

                                    1101

                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                    Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                    Section 10 - Reference material

                                    References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                    2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                    3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                    4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                    5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                    6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                    7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                    8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                    9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                    10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                    11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                    12 Safety signs

                                    13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                    14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                    15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                    16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                    17 Noise awareness program

                                    18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                    19 OHS skills development training

                                    20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                    21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                    Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                    1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                    AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                    ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                    Related material

                                    1102 (ool1linuen)

                                    • Part 1
                                    • Part 2
                                    • Part 3
                                    • Part 4
                                    • PArt 5

                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                      ENCLOSURE 2 TO APPENDIX 5 TO A NNEXA TO CHAPTER 3

                                      RISK TABLE

                                      1 A risk table is a tool that may be used to assess the degree or risk posed by a hazardous event or situation

                                      LIKELIHOOD

                                      Consequence Very High Likely Unlikely Highly Unlikely

                                      Fatality HIGH HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                                      MEDIUMMajor Injuries HIGH HIGH MEDIUM

                                      Minor Injuries HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW

                                      Negligible Injuries MEDIUM MEDIUM LOW LOW

                                      Other asset damage

                                      MEDIUM LOW LOW LOW

                                      2 Events or situations assessed as very likely with fatal consequen es are til In sl serious (ie HIGH risk rat ing) those assessed as highly unlikely with negligible Injuries are the least serious (ie LOW sk rating) Control stra tegies are to ensure that those hazards with a HIGH risk rating are dealt with first

                                      AL1

                                      LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                                      Sitampllocahon

                                      Program

                                      Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                                      Compiled by

                                      HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                                      LIKELIHOOD

                                      Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                                      I Date

                                      CONSEQUENCE

                                      Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                                      RISK RATING

                                      (Sea appendix 2)

                                      Higtl Medium Low

                                      CONTROL ACTION

                                      1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                                      1 2 ~1

                                      I

                                      I 1 i

                                      -g

                                      ~ Z -t xl

                                      en raquo en en m en en

                                      Z ~

                                      -t ~ o xl

                                      en I

                                      -t

                                      ALi

                                      RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                      CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                                      APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                                      PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                                      REPORTING PERIOD

                                      1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                                      UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                                      TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                                      NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                                      PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                                      I

                                      tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                                      PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                                      i(~l

                                      I

                                      -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                      Noles

                                      Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                                      (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                                      2971

                                      (e) Tower eras

                                      (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                                      Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                                      (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                                      ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                                      a iO ltgt IIgt

                                      Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                                      PLANT

                                      in

                                      AS

                                      Cross Reference

                                      is to NI

                                      B

                                      at the or in the

                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                      38-2

                                      f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                                      g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                                      h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                                      8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                                      RESPONSIBILITIES

                                      9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                                      10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                                      11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                                      12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                                      a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                      b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                                      c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                                      NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                                      13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                      Engineering controls

                                      14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                                      15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                      16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                                      Amber Zone~

                                      of

                                      Black time

                                      or 115

                                      A f4nwnninotinn

                                      Extreme Zone

                                      b

                                      a

                                      to

                                      Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                      Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                      38-6

                                      34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                      Compensation

                                      35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                      Education

                                      36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                      37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                      Operational areas

                                      38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                      Documentation

                                      39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                      Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                      b

                                      Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                      1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                      NOISE

                                      1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                      a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                      shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                      nor shall include refresher on

                                      c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                      d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                      3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                      APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                      WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                      ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                      EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                      MUST BE WORN

                                      EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                      ANNEXBTO

                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                      APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                      METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                      1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                      a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                      b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                      c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                      d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                      2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                      3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                      B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                      b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                      c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                      (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                      (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                      (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                      protection

                                      (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                      Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                      387-2

                                      d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                      (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                      civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                      e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                      4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                      a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                      b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                      c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                      d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                      5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                      civilian document

                                      Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                      APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                      3 U RULE

                                      1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                      SPL (dB(A)) of

                                      85 8 hours

                                      a8 4 hours

                                      91 2 hours

                                      94 1 hour

                                      97 30 minutes

                                      100 15 minutes

                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                      ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                      ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                      SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                      rtwIrlv

                                      manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                      REFERENCES

                                      1 Defence

                                      MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                      2 Other

                                      3 Cross Reference

                                      4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                      Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                      AS

                                      Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                      WELDING

                                      SYNOPSIS

                                      REFERENCES

                                      1 Defence

                                      W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                      2 Other

                                      AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                      AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                      AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                      AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                      JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                      Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                      3 Cross Reference

                                      1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                      5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                      7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                      ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                      FIRE SAFETY

                                      SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                      REFERENCES

                                      1 Defence

                                      MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                      DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                      MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                      2 Other

                                      AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                      AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                      AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                      AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                      AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                      AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                      AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                      AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                      3 Cross Reference

                                      Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                      38-3

                                      Administrative controls

                                      17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                      Personal protective equipment

                                      18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                      19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                      a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                      b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                      c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                      20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                      21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                      22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                      Noise assessments

                                      23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                      24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                      a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                      b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                      c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                      d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                      Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                      11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                      THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                      SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                      environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                      REFERENCES

                                      1 Defence

                                      DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                      OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                      DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                      If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                      2 Other

                                      and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                      3 Cross Reference

                                      8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                      112

                                      113

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                      CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                      NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                      Section 1 - Overview

                                      Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                      Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                      Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                      Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                      Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                      Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                      bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                      bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                      bull increased health care and compensation

                                      Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                      For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                      Continued on next page

                                      mAinArlA he risks to

                                      means

                                      the

                                      I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                      118

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                      Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                      117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                      Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                      Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                      Section Content

                                      1 Overview

                                      2 Specific responsibilities

                                      3 Noise management principles

                                      4 Impulse noise

                                      5 Warning signs

                                      6 The use of foam earplugs

                                      7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                      8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                      9 The three decibel rule

                                      10 Reference material

                                      The fnllnwinn

                                      124

                                      125

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                      Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                      Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                      When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                      Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                      bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                      bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                      bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                      When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                      Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                      Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                      Employees Employees are responsible for

                                      bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                      bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                      bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                      Training and skilling

                                      Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                      The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                      course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                      Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                      and OHS skills

                                      Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                      costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                      131

                                      132

                                      133

                                      134

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                      Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                      Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                      Eng ineering controls

                                      Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                      For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                      Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                      Administrative controls

                                      Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                      Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                      Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                      The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                      bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                      bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                      bull regular audiometric examinations

                                      Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                      Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                      Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                      135

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                      Noise assessments

                                      Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                      Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                      bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                      bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                      bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                      bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                      Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                      Hearing protection areas

                                      136

                                      Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                      bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                      continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                      impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                      A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                      bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                      con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                      impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                      Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                      bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                      continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                      im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                      ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                      137

                                      138

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                      Hearing protection areas

                                      136 (continued)

                                      A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                      bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                      continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                      impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                      A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                      The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                      Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                      The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                      The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                      Audiometric examinations

                                      Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                      bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                      bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                      Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                      ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                      139

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                      Audiometric eXaminations

                                      138 (conlhued)

                                      bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                      bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                      bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                      bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                      bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                      Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                      Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                      Education

                                      1310

                                      Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                      Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                      Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                      1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                      Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                      1312

                                      141

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                      Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                      Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                      This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                      bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                      bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                      bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                      bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                      151

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                      Section 5 - Warning signs

                                      Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                      HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                      MUST BE W O R N

                                      ( A MBER ZONE)

                                      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                      EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                      M UST BE W ORN

                                      C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                      r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                      E AH MUFFS ]

                                      M UST BE WOAN

                                      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                      l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                      MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                      ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                      161

                                      162

                                      163

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                      Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                      Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                      the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                      Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                      Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                      Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                      Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                      Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                      bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                      bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                      bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                      164

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                      Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                      FOR r shy

                                      3

                                      4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                      3

                                      4 Hold

                                      ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                      IiudeT

                                      Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                      I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                      Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                      p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                      wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                      ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                      Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                      T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                      p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                      A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                      Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                      Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                      164 (conUnued)

                                      -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                      ) VISUA CH CK

                                      6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                      rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                      o ~Sati1h

                                      s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                      Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                      bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                      171

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                      Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                      Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                      MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                      Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                      bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                      1 Toe(l __

                                      - T 1at eI -

                                      l

                                      _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                      ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                      AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                      ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                      Continued on ne)( page

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                      Form PM 139

                                      171 (continued)

                                      ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                      Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                      5 AmeoQlITir

                                      bull

                                      M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                      181

                                      and

                                      no matter how

                                      are trained

                                      DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                      11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                      Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                      8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                      lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                      the response button each time one of these it is

                                      the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                      where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                      be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                      ears with the ear and

                                      the audiometer win

                                      the mmr(

                                      and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                      the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                      c~vman form

                                      and Services in audiometric

                                      health that attendance

                                      Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                      recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                      ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                      such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                      it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                      If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                      after

                                      500-8000 take no further

                                      500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                      advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                      check the noise exposure since the last was

                                      are

                                      audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                      errIOIJVEeS are

                                      take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                      IF

                                      Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                      161 (conlinood)

                                      should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                      ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                      civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                      retest the Tlnt in six months

                                      The referral criteria are

                                      a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                      is 15 dB or more at any

                                      wax or if there is a or

                                      thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                      The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                      191

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                      Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                      Three decibel rule

                                      The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                      SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                      85 8 hours

                                      88 4 hours

                                      91 2 hours

                                      94 1 hour

                                      97 30 minutes

                                      100 15 minutes

                                      1101

                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                      Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                      Section 10 - Reference material

                                      References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                      2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                      3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                      4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                      5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                      6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                      7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                      8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                      9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                      10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                      11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                      12 Safety signs

                                      13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                      14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                      15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                      16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                      17 Noise awareness program

                                      18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                      19 OHS skills development training

                                      20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                      21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                      Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                      1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                      AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                      ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                      Related material

                                      1102 (ool1linuen)

                                      • Part 1
                                      • Part 2
                                      • Part 3
                                      • Part 4
                                      • PArt 5

                                        LJniVEslablishmentlBraneh

                                        Sitampllocahon

                                        Program

                                        Plant Manufacturer Serial Numbec

                                        Compiled by

                                        HAZARD IDENTIFICATION (See appendix 1)

                                        LIKELIHOOD

                                        Very Likely Likely lInlikely Highly Unhk61y

                                        I Date

                                        CONSEQUENCE

                                        Fatality Major Injuries Minor Injuries Negfigible Injurios Other Asset Damago

                                        RISK RATING

                                        (Sea appendix 2)

                                        Higtl Medium Low

                                        CONTROL ACTION

                                        1 Initiated 2 ImplEimented 3 Reviewed

                                        1 2 ~1

                                        I

                                        I 1 i

                                        -g

                                        ~ Z -t xl

                                        en raquo en en m en en

                                        Z ~

                                        -t ~ o xl

                                        en I

                                        -t

                                        ALi

                                        RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                        CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                                        APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                                        PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                                        REPORTING PERIOD

                                        1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                                        UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                                        TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                                        NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                                        PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                                        I

                                        tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                                        PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                                        i(~l

                                        I

                                        -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                        Noles

                                        Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                                        (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                                        2971

                                        (e) Tower eras

                                        (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                                        Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                                        (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                                        ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                                        a iO ltgt IIgt

                                        Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                                        PLANT

                                        in

                                        AS

                                        Cross Reference

                                        is to NI

                                        B

                                        at the or in the

                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                        38-2

                                        f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                                        g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                                        h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                                        8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                                        RESPONSIBILITIES

                                        9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                                        10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                                        11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                                        12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                                        a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                        b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                                        c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                                        NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                                        13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                        Engineering controls

                                        14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                                        15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                        16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                                        Amber Zone~

                                        of

                                        Black time

                                        or 115

                                        A f4nwnninotinn

                                        Extreme Zone

                                        b

                                        a

                                        to

                                        Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                        Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                        38-6

                                        34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                        Compensation

                                        35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                        Education

                                        36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                        37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                        Operational areas

                                        38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                        Documentation

                                        39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                        Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                        b

                                        Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                        1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                        NOISE

                                        1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                        a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                        shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                        nor shall include refresher on

                                        c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                        d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                        3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                        APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                        WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                        ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                        EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                        MUST BE WORN

                                        EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                        ANNEXBTO

                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                        APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                        METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                        1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                        a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                        b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                        c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                        d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                        2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                        3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                        B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                        b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                        c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                        (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                        (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                        (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                        protection

                                        (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                        Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                        387-2

                                        d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                        (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                        civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                        e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                        4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                        a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                        b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                        c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                        d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                        5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                        civilian document

                                        Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                        APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                        3 U RULE

                                        1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                        SPL (dB(A)) of

                                        85 8 hours

                                        a8 4 hours

                                        91 2 hours

                                        94 1 hour

                                        97 30 minutes

                                        100 15 minutes

                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                        ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                        ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                        SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                        rtwIrlv

                                        manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                        REFERENCES

                                        1 Defence

                                        MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                        2 Other

                                        3 Cross Reference

                                        4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                        Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                        AS

                                        Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                        WELDING

                                        SYNOPSIS

                                        REFERENCES

                                        1 Defence

                                        W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                        2 Other

                                        AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                        AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                        AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                        AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                        JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                        Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                        3 Cross Reference

                                        1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                        5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                        7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                        ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                        FIRE SAFETY

                                        SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                        REFERENCES

                                        1 Defence

                                        MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                        DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                        MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                        2 Other

                                        AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                        AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                        AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                        AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                        AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                        AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                        AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                        AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                        3 Cross Reference

                                        Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                        38-3

                                        Administrative controls

                                        17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                        Personal protective equipment

                                        18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                        19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                        a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                        b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                        c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                        20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                        21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                        22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                        Noise assessments

                                        23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                        24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                        a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                        b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                        c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                        d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                        Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                        11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                        THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                        SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                        environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                        REFERENCES

                                        1 Defence

                                        DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                        OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                        DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                        If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                        2 Other

                                        and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                        3 Cross Reference

                                        8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                        112

                                        113

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                        CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                        NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                        Section 1 - Overview

                                        Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                        Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                        Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                        Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                        Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                        Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                        bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                        bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                        bull increased health care and compensation

                                        Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                        For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                        Continued on next page

                                        mAinArlA he risks to

                                        means

                                        the

                                        I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                        118

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                        Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                        117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                        Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                        Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                        Section Content

                                        1 Overview

                                        2 Specific responsibilities

                                        3 Noise management principles

                                        4 Impulse noise

                                        5 Warning signs

                                        6 The use of foam earplugs

                                        7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                        8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                        9 The three decibel rule

                                        10 Reference material

                                        The fnllnwinn

                                        124

                                        125

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                        Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                        Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                        When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                        Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                        bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                        bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                        bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                        When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                        Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                        Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                        Employees Employees are responsible for

                                        bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                        bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                        bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                        Training and skilling

                                        Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                        The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                        course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                        Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                        and OHS skills

                                        Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                        costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                        131

                                        132

                                        133

                                        134

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                        Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                        Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                        Eng ineering controls

                                        Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                        For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                        Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                        Administrative controls

                                        Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                        Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                        Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                        The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                        bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                        bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                        bull regular audiometric examinations

                                        Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                        Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                        Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                        135

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                        Noise assessments

                                        Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                        Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                        bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                        bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                        bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                        bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                        Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                        Hearing protection areas

                                        136

                                        Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                        bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                        continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                        impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                        A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                        bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                        con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                        impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                        Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                        bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                        continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                        im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                        ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                        137

                                        138

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                        Hearing protection areas

                                        136 (continued)

                                        A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                        bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                        continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                        impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                        A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                        The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                        Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                        The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                        The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                        Audiometric examinations

                                        Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                        bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                        bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                        Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                        ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                        139

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                        Audiometric eXaminations

                                        138 (conlhued)

                                        bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                        bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                        bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                        bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                        bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                        Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                        Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                        Education

                                        1310

                                        Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                        Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                        Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                        1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                        Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                        1312

                                        141

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                        Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                        Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                        This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                        bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                        bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                        bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                        bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                        151

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                        Section 5 - Warning signs

                                        Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                        HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                        MUST BE W O R N

                                        ( A MBER ZONE)

                                        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                        EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                        M UST BE W ORN

                                        C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                        r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                        E AH MUFFS ]

                                        M UST BE WOAN

                                        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                        l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                        MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                        ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                        161

                                        162

                                        163

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                        Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                        Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                        the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                        Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                        Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                        Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                        Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                        Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                        bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                        bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                        bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                        164

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                        Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                        FOR r shy

                                        3

                                        4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                        3

                                        4 Hold

                                        ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                        IiudeT

                                        Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                        I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                        Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                        p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                        wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                        ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                        Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                        T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                        p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                        A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                        Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                        Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                        164 (conUnued)

                                        -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                        ) VISUA CH CK

                                        6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                        rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                        o ~Sati1h

                                        s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                        Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                        bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                        171

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                        Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                        Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                        MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                        Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                        bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                        1 Toe(l __

                                        - T 1at eI -

                                        l

                                        _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                        ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                        AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                        ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                        Continued on ne)( page

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                        Form PM 139

                                        171 (continued)

                                        ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                        Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                        5 AmeoQlITir

                                        bull

                                        M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                        181

                                        and

                                        no matter how

                                        are trained

                                        DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                        11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                        Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                        8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                        lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                        the response button each time one of these it is

                                        the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                        where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                        be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                        ears with the ear and

                                        the audiometer win

                                        the mmr(

                                        and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                        the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                        c~vman form

                                        and Services in audiometric

                                        health that attendance

                                        Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                        recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                        ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                        such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                        it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                        If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                        after

                                        500-8000 take no further

                                        500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                        advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                        check the noise exposure since the last was

                                        are

                                        audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                        errIOIJVEeS are

                                        take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                        IF

                                        Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                        161 (conlinood)

                                        should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                        ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                        civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                        retest the Tlnt in six months

                                        The referral criteria are

                                        a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                        is 15 dB or more at any

                                        wax or if there is a or

                                        thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                        The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                        191

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                        Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                        Three decibel rule

                                        The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                        SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                        85 8 hours

                                        88 4 hours

                                        91 2 hours

                                        94 1 hour

                                        97 30 minutes

                                        100 15 minutes

                                        1101

                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                        Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                        Section 10 - Reference material

                                        References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                        2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                        3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                        4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                        5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                        6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                        7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                        8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                        9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                        10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                        11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                        12 Safety signs

                                        13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                        14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                        15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                        16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                        17 Noise awareness program

                                        18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                        19 OHS skills development training

                                        20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                        21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                        Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                        1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                        AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                        ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                        Related material

                                        1102 (ool1linuen)

                                        • Part 1
                                        • Part 2
                                        • Part 3
                                        • Part 4
                                        • PArt 5

                                          ALi

                                          RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                          CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                                          APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                                          PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                                          REPORTING PERIOD

                                          1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                                          UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                                          TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                                          NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                                          PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                                          I

                                          tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                                          PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                                          i(~l

                                          I

                                          -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                          Noles

                                          Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                                          (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                                          2971

                                          (e) Tower eras

                                          (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                                          Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                                          (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                                          ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                                          a iO ltgt IIgt

                                          Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                                          PLANT

                                          in

                                          AS

                                          Cross Reference

                                          is to NI

                                          B

                                          at the or in the

                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                          38-2

                                          f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                                          g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                                          h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                                          8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                                          RESPONSIBILITIES

                                          9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                                          10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                                          11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                                          12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                                          a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                          b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                                          c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                                          NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                                          13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                          Engineering controls

                                          14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                                          15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                          16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                                          Amber Zone~

                                          of

                                          Black time

                                          or 115

                                          A f4nwnninotinn

                                          Extreme Zone

                                          b

                                          a

                                          to

                                          Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                          Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                          38-6

                                          34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                          Compensation

                                          35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                          Education

                                          36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                          37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                          Operational areas

                                          38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                          Documentation

                                          39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                          Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                          b

                                          Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                          1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                          NOISE

                                          1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                          a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                          shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                          nor shall include refresher on

                                          c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                          d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                          3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                          APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                          WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                          ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                          EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                          MUST BE WORN

                                          EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                          ANNEXBTO

                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                          APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                          METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                          1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                          a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                          b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                          c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                          d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                          2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                          3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                          B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                          b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                          c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                          (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                          (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                          (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                          protection

                                          (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                          Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                          387-2

                                          d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                          (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                          civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                          e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                          4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                          a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                          b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                          c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                          d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                          5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                          civilian document

                                          Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                          APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                          3 U RULE

                                          1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                          SPL (dB(A)) of

                                          85 8 hours

                                          a8 4 hours

                                          91 2 hours

                                          94 1 hour

                                          97 30 minutes

                                          100 15 minutes

                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                          ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                          ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                          SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                          rtwIrlv

                                          manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                          REFERENCES

                                          1 Defence

                                          MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                          2 Other

                                          3 Cross Reference

                                          4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                          Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                          AS

                                          Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                          WELDING

                                          SYNOPSIS

                                          REFERENCES

                                          1 Defence

                                          W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                          2 Other

                                          AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                          AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                          AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                          AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                          JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                          Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                          3 Cross Reference

                                          1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                          5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                          7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                          ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                          FIRE SAFETY

                                          SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                          REFERENCES

                                          1 Defence

                                          MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                          DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                          MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                          2 Other

                                          AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                          AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                          AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                          AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                          AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                          AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                          AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                          AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                          3 Cross Reference

                                          Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                          38-3

                                          Administrative controls

                                          17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                          Personal protective equipment

                                          18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                          19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                          a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                          b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                          c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                          20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                          21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                          22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                          Noise assessments

                                          23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                          24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                          a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                          b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                          c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                          d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                          Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                          11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                          THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                          SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                          environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                          REFERENCES

                                          1 Defence

                                          DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                          OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                          DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                          If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                          2 Other

                                          and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                          3 Cross Reference

                                          8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                          112

                                          113

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                          CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                          NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                          Section 1 - Overview

                                          Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                          Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                          Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                          Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                          Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                          Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                          bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                          bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                          bull increased health care and compensation

                                          Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                          For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                          Continued on next page

                                          mAinArlA he risks to

                                          means

                                          the

                                          I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                          118

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                          Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                          117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                          Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                          Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                          Section Content

                                          1 Overview

                                          2 Specific responsibilities

                                          3 Noise management principles

                                          4 Impulse noise

                                          5 Warning signs

                                          6 The use of foam earplugs

                                          7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                          8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                          9 The three decibel rule

                                          10 Reference material

                                          The fnllnwinn

                                          124

                                          125

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                          Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                          Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                          When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                          Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                          bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                          bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                          bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                          When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                          Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                          Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                          Employees Employees are responsible for

                                          bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                          bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                          bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                          Training and skilling

                                          Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                          The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                          course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                          Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                          and OHS skills

                                          Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                          costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                          131

                                          132

                                          133

                                          134

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                          Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                          Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                          Eng ineering controls

                                          Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                          For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                          Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                          Administrative controls

                                          Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                          Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                          Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                          The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                          bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                          bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                          bull regular audiometric examinations

                                          Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                          Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                          Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                          135

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                          Noise assessments

                                          Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                          Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                          bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                          bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                          bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                          bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                          Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                          Hearing protection areas

                                          136

                                          Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                          bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                          continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                          impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                          A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                          bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                          con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                          impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                          Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                          bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                          continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                          im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                          ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                          137

                                          138

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                          Hearing protection areas

                                          136 (continued)

                                          A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                          bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                          continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                          impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                          A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                          The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                          Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                          The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                          The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                          Audiometric examinations

                                          Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                          bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                          bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                          Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                          ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                          139

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                          Audiometric eXaminations

                                          138 (conlhued)

                                          bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                          bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                          bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                          bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                          bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                          Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                          Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                          Education

                                          1310

                                          Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                          Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                          Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                          1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                          Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                          1312

                                          141

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                          Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                          Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                          This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                          bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                          bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                          bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                          bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                          151

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                          Section 5 - Warning signs

                                          Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                          HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                          MUST BE W O R N

                                          ( A MBER ZONE)

                                          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                          EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                          M UST BE W ORN

                                          C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                          r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                          E AH MUFFS ]

                                          M UST BE WOAN

                                          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                          l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                          MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                          ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                          161

                                          162

                                          163

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                          Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                          Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                          the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                          Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                          Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                          Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                          Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                          Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                          bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                          bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                          bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                          164

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                          Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                          FOR r shy

                                          3

                                          4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                          3

                                          4 Hold

                                          ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                          IiudeT

                                          Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                          I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                          Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                          p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                          wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                          ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                          Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                          T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                          p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                          A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                          Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                          Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                          164 (conUnued)

                                          -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                          ) VISUA CH CK

                                          6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                          rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                          o ~Sati1h

                                          s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                          Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                          bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                          171

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                          Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                          Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                          MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                          Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                          bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                          1 Toe(l __

                                          - T 1at eI -

                                          l

                                          _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                          ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                          AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                          ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                          Continued on ne)( page

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                          Form PM 139

                                          171 (continued)

                                          ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                          Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                          5 AmeoQlITir

                                          bull

                                          M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                          181

                                          and

                                          no matter how

                                          are trained

                                          DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                          11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                          Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                          8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                          lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                          the response button each time one of these it is

                                          the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                          where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                          be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                          ears with the ear and

                                          the audiometer win

                                          the mmr(

                                          and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                          the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                          c~vman form

                                          and Services in audiometric

                                          health that attendance

                                          Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                          recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                          ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                          such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                          it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                          If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                          after

                                          500-8000 take no further

                                          500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                          advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                          check the noise exposure since the last was

                                          are

                                          audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                          errIOIJVEeS are

                                          take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                          IF

                                          Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                          161 (conlinood)

                                          should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                          ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                          civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                          retest the Tlnt in six months

                                          The referral criteria are

                                          a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                          is 15 dB or more at any

                                          wax or if there is a or

                                          thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                          The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                          191

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                          Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                          Three decibel rule

                                          The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                          SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                          85 8 hours

                                          88 4 hours

                                          91 2 hours

                                          94 1 hour

                                          97 30 minutes

                                          100 15 minutes

                                          1101

                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                          Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                          Section 10 - Reference material

                                          References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                          2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                          3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                          4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                          5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                          6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                          7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                          8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                          9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                          10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                          11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                          12 Safety signs

                                          13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                          14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                          15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                          16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                          17 Noise awareness program

                                          18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                          19 OHS skills development training

                                          20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                          21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                          Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                          1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                          AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                          ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                          Related material

                                          1102 (ool1linuen)

                                          • Part 1
                                          • Part 2
                                          • Part 3
                                          • Part 4
                                          • PArt 5

                                            RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                            CONTACT OFFICERS DETAILS

                                            APPOINTMENTshy SHIPESTABlISHMENTIUNITIBRANCH

                                            PROGRAMshy ~TELEPHONE NUMBER POSTAUADDRESS______

                                            REPORTING PERIOD

                                            1I01iERS PRESSURE TOWER BUILDING IIIIJSEIIlENT TRUCKOONIEO OOlE ESSES CRANeS NHTENANCE CONCRETE CAAHESSTRUCTllRES

                                            UHITS J PLACING UNiTS WITH BOOMS 1(

                                            TOTAl NUMSER OF ITEMS

                                            NEW PlNIT INTROOuCEO OUR fiG THE REPCRTING PERIOD

                                            PANT MODIflEO DURING THE REPORTING PERIOD

                                            I

                                            tANT DISPOSED OF OUl~NG THE REPORflNG P~RIOO

                                            PANT OESIGlSREGISTEREO DlJRlflG REPORTiNG PERIOO

                                            i(~l

                                            I

                                            -1 RESTRICTED WHEN COMPLETED

                                            Noles

                                            Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                                            (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                                            2971

                                            (e) Tower eras

                                            (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                                            Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                                            (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                                            ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                                            a iO ltgt IIgt

                                            Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                                            PLANT

                                            in

                                            AS

                                            Cross Reference

                                            is to NI

                                            B

                                            at the or in the

                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                            38-2

                                            f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                                            g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                                            h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                                            8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                                            RESPONSIBILITIES

                                            9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                                            10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                                            11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                                            12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                                            a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                            b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                                            c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                                            NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                                            13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                            Engineering controls

                                            14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                                            15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                            16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                                            Amber Zone~

                                            of

                                            Black time

                                            or 115

                                            A f4nwnninotinn

                                            Extreme Zone

                                            b

                                            a

                                            to

                                            Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                            Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                            38-6

                                            34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                            Compensation

                                            35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                            Education

                                            36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                            37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                            Operational areas

                                            38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                            Documentation

                                            39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                            Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                            b

                                            Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                            1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                            NOISE

                                            1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                            a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                            shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                            nor shall include refresher on

                                            c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                            d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                            3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                            APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                            WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                            ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                            EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                            MUST BE WORN

                                            EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                            ANNEXBTO

                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                            APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                            METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                            1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                            a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                            b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                            c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                            d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                            2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                            3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                            B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                            b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                            c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                            (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                            (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                            (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                            protection

                                            (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                            Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                            387-2

                                            d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                            (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                            civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                            e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                            4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                            a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                            b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                            c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                            d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                            5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                            civilian document

                                            Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                            APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                            3 U RULE

                                            1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                            SPL (dB(A)) of

                                            85 8 hours

                                            a8 4 hours

                                            91 2 hours

                                            94 1 hour

                                            97 30 minutes

                                            100 15 minutes

                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                            ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                            ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                            SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                            rtwIrlv

                                            manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                            REFERENCES

                                            1 Defence

                                            MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                            2 Other

                                            3 Cross Reference

                                            4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                            Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                            AS

                                            Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                            WELDING

                                            SYNOPSIS

                                            REFERENCES

                                            1 Defence

                                            W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                            2 Other

                                            AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                            AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                            AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                            AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                            JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                            Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                            3 Cross Reference

                                            1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                            5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                            7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                            ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                            FIRE SAFETY

                                            SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                            REFERENCES

                                            1 Defence

                                            MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                            DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                            MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                            2 Other

                                            AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                            AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                            AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                            AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                            AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                            AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                            AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                            AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                            3 Cross Reference

                                            Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                            38-3

                                            Administrative controls

                                            17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                            Personal protective equipment

                                            18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                            19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                            a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                            b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                            c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                            20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                            21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                            22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                            Noise assessments

                                            23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                            24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                            a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                            b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                            c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                            d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                            Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                            11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                            THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                            SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                            environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                            REFERENCES

                                            1 Defence

                                            DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                            OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                            DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                            If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                            2 Other

                                            and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                            3 Cross Reference

                                            8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                            112

                                            113

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                            CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                            NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                            Section 1 - Overview

                                            Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                            Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                            Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                            Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                            Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                            Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                            bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                            bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                            bull increased health care and compensation

                                            Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                            For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                            Continued on next page

                                            mAinArlA he risks to

                                            means

                                            the

                                            I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                            118

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                            Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                            117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                            Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                            Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                            Section Content

                                            1 Overview

                                            2 Specific responsibilities

                                            3 Noise management principles

                                            4 Impulse noise

                                            5 Warning signs

                                            6 The use of foam earplugs

                                            7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                            8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                            9 The three decibel rule

                                            10 Reference material

                                            The fnllnwinn

                                            124

                                            125

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                            Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                            Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                            When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                            Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                            bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                            bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                            bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                            When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                            Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                            Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                            Employees Employees are responsible for

                                            bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                            bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                            bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                            Training and skilling

                                            Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                            The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                            course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                            Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                            and OHS skills

                                            Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                            costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                            131

                                            132

                                            133

                                            134

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                            Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                            Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                            Eng ineering controls

                                            Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                            For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                            Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                            Administrative controls

                                            Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                            Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                            Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                            The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                            bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                            bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                            bull regular audiometric examinations

                                            Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                            Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                            Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                            135

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                            Noise assessments

                                            Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                            Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                            bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                            bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                            bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                            bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                            Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                            Hearing protection areas

                                            136

                                            Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                            bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                            continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                            impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                            A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                            bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                            con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                            impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                            Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                            bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                            continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                            im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                            ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                            137

                                            138

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                            Hearing protection areas

                                            136 (continued)

                                            A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                            bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                            continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                            impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                            A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                            The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                            Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                            The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                            The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                            Audiometric examinations

                                            Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                            bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                            bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                            Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                            ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                            139

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                            Audiometric eXaminations

                                            138 (conlhued)

                                            bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                            bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                            bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                            bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                            bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                            Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                            Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                            Education

                                            1310

                                            Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                            Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                            Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                            1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                            Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                            1312

                                            141

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                            Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                            Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                            This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                            bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                            bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                            bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                            bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                            151

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                            Section 5 - Warning signs

                                            Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                            HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                            MUST BE W O R N

                                            ( A MBER ZONE)

                                            HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                            EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                            M UST BE W ORN

                                            C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                            r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                            E AH MUFFS ]

                                            M UST BE WOAN

                                            HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                            l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                            MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                            ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                            161

                                            162

                                            163

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                            Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                            Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                            the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                            Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                            Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                            Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                            Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                            Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                            bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                            bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                            bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                            164

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                            Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                            FOR r shy

                                            3

                                            4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                            3

                                            4 Hold

                                            ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                            IiudeT

                                            Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                            I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                            Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                            p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                            wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                            ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                            Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                            T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                            p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                            A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                            Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                            Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                            164 (conUnued)

                                            -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                            ) VISUA CH CK

                                            6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                            rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                            o ~Sati1h

                                            s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                            Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                            bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                            171

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                            Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                            Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                            MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                            Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                            bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                            1 Toe(l __

                                            - T 1at eI -

                                            l

                                            _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                            ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                            AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                            ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                            Continued on ne)( page

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                            Form PM 139

                                            171 (continued)

                                            ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                            Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                            5 AmeoQlITir

                                            bull

                                            M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                            181

                                            and

                                            no matter how

                                            are trained

                                            DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                            11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                            Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                            8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                            lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                            the response button each time one of these it is

                                            the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                            where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                            be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                            ears with the ear and

                                            the audiometer win

                                            the mmr(

                                            and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                            the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                            c~vman form

                                            and Services in audiometric

                                            health that attendance

                                            Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                            recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                            ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                            such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                            it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                            If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                            after

                                            500-8000 take no further

                                            500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                            advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                            check the noise exposure since the last was

                                            are

                                            audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                            errIOIJVEeS are

                                            take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                            IF

                                            Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                            161 (conlinood)

                                            should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                            ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                            civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                            retest the Tlnt in six months

                                            The referral criteria are

                                            a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                            is 15 dB or more at any

                                            wax or if there is a or

                                            thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                            The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                            191

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                            Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                            Three decibel rule

                                            The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                            SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                            85 8 hours

                                            88 4 hours

                                            91 2 hours

                                            94 1 hour

                                            97 30 minutes

                                            100 15 minutes

                                            1101

                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                            Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                            Section 10 - Reference material

                                            References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                            2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                            3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                            4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                            5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                            6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                            7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                            8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                            9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                            10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                            11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                            12 Safety signs

                                            13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                            14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                            15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                            16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                            17 Noise awareness program

                                            18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                            19 OHS skills development training

                                            20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                            21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                            Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                            1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                            AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                            ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                            Related material

                                            1102 (ool1linuen)

                                            • Part 1
                                            • Part 2
                                            • Part 3
                                            • Part 4
                                            • PArt 5

                                              Noles

                                              Ikraquolers catlegonseQ as I1azard level A arordlng 10 the cnteria identified in Australian Standard (AS) 39201-Pressuri Equipment 01

                                              (b) Pressure vessels thai IlllllEl a hazard level 01 A B C or 0 covered by AS 2030 lP gss IUfll vessels lor automotive

                                              2971

                                              (e) Tower eras

                                              (n) IlUltflng maimenance units

                                              Amusement structures CCMlred by AS 3533 wlh the IxceptiOI1 of Class 1 slruclUes

                                              (f) Truck mounted concrete placing unns with booms

                                              ie) Mobm craoos wilh II sate working klatI greater Inar 10 tonnes raquo (h) Provide detals of the syslltlm of registration (i) Reference 10 cranes and hosls extruding those thai are naJ)Jally powered elevaling pialfo-ms or low truCks

                                              a iO ltgt IIgt

                                              Wc 0 g =gt 9 r ~ ~ ~ s c l

                                              PLANT

                                              in

                                              AS

                                              Cross Reference

                                              is to NI

                                              B

                                              at the or in the

                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                              38-2

                                              f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                                              g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                                              h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                                              8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                                              RESPONSIBILITIES

                                              9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                                              10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                                              11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                                              12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                                              a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                              b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                                              c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                                              NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                                              13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                              Engineering controls

                                              14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                                              15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                              16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                                              Amber Zone~

                                              of

                                              Black time

                                              or 115

                                              A f4nwnninotinn

                                              Extreme Zone

                                              b

                                              a

                                              to

                                              Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                              Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                              38-6

                                              34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                              Compensation

                                              35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                              Education

                                              36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                              37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                              Operational areas

                                              38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                              Documentation

                                              39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                              Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                              b

                                              Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                              1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                              NOISE

                                              1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                              a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                              shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                              nor shall include refresher on

                                              c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                              d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                              3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                              APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                              WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                              ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                              EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                              MUST BE WORN

                                              EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                              ANNEXBTO

                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                              APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                              METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                              1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                              a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                              b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                              c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                              d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                              2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                              3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                              B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                              b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                              c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                              (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                              (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                              (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                              protection

                                              (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                              Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                              387-2

                                              d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                              (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                              civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                              e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                              4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                              a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                              b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                              c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                              d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                              5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                              civilian document

                                              Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                              APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                              3 U RULE

                                              1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                              SPL (dB(A)) of

                                              85 8 hours

                                              a8 4 hours

                                              91 2 hours

                                              94 1 hour

                                              97 30 minutes

                                              100 15 minutes

                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                              ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                              ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                              SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                              rtwIrlv

                                              manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                              REFERENCES

                                              1 Defence

                                              MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                              2 Other

                                              3 Cross Reference

                                              4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                              Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                              AS

                                              Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                              WELDING

                                              SYNOPSIS

                                              REFERENCES

                                              1 Defence

                                              W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                              2 Other

                                              AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                              AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                              AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                              AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                              JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                              Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                              3 Cross Reference

                                              1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                              5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                              7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                              ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                              FIRE SAFETY

                                              SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                              REFERENCES

                                              1 Defence

                                              MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                              DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                              MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                              2 Other

                                              AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                              AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                              AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                              AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                              AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                              AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                              AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                              AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                              3 Cross Reference

                                              Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                              38-3

                                              Administrative controls

                                              17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                              Personal protective equipment

                                              18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                              19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                              a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                              b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                              c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                              20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                              21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                              22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                              Noise assessments

                                              23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                              24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                              a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                              b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                              c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                              d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                              Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                              11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                              THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                              SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                              environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                              REFERENCES

                                              1 Defence

                                              DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                              OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                              DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                              If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                              2 Other

                                              and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                              3 Cross Reference

                                              8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                              112

                                              113

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                              CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                              NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                              Section 1 - Overview

                                              Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                              Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                              Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                              Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                              Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                              Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                              bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                              bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                              bull increased health care and compensation

                                              Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                              For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                              Continued on next page

                                              mAinArlA he risks to

                                              means

                                              the

                                              I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                              118

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                              Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                              117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                              Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                              Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                              Section Content

                                              1 Overview

                                              2 Specific responsibilities

                                              3 Noise management principles

                                              4 Impulse noise

                                              5 Warning signs

                                              6 The use of foam earplugs

                                              7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                              8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                              9 The three decibel rule

                                              10 Reference material

                                              The fnllnwinn

                                              124

                                              125

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                              Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                              Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                              When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                              Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                              bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                              bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                              bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                              When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                              Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                              Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                              Employees Employees are responsible for

                                              bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                              bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                              bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                              Training and skilling

                                              Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                              The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                              course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                              Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                              and OHS skills

                                              Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                              costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                              131

                                              132

                                              133

                                              134

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                              Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                              Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                              Eng ineering controls

                                              Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                              For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                              Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                              Administrative controls

                                              Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                              Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                              Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                              The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                              bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                              bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                              bull regular audiometric examinations

                                              Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                              Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                              Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                              135

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                              Noise assessments

                                              Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                              Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                              bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                              bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                              bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                              bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                              Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                              Hearing protection areas

                                              136

                                              Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                              bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                              continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                              impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                              A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                              bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                              con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                              impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                              Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                              bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                              continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                              im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                              ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                              137

                                              138

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                              Hearing protection areas

                                              136 (continued)

                                              A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                              bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                              continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                              impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                              A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                              The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                              Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                              The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                              The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                              Audiometric examinations

                                              Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                              bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                              bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                              Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                              ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                              139

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                              Audiometric eXaminations

                                              138 (conlhued)

                                              bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                              bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                              bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                              bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                              bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                              Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                              Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                              Education

                                              1310

                                              Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                              Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                              Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                              1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                              Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                              1312

                                              141

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                              Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                              Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                              This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                              bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                              bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                              bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                              bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                              151

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                              Section 5 - Warning signs

                                              Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                              HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                              MUST BE W O R N

                                              ( A MBER ZONE)

                                              HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                              EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                              M UST BE W ORN

                                              C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                              r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                              E AH MUFFS ]

                                              M UST BE WOAN

                                              HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                              l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                              MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                              ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                              161

                                              162

                                              163

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                              Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                              Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                              the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                              Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                              Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                              Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                              Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                              Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                              bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                              bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                              bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                              164

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                              Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                              FOR r shy

                                              3

                                              4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                              3

                                              4 Hold

                                              ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                              IiudeT

                                              Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                              I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                              Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                              p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                              wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                              ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                              Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                              T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                              p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                              A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                              Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                              Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                              164 (conUnued)

                                              -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                              ) VISUA CH CK

                                              6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                              rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                              o ~Sati1h

                                              s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                              Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                              bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                              171

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                              Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                              Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                              MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                              Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                              bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                              1 Toe(l __

                                              - T 1at eI -

                                              l

                                              _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                              ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                              AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                              ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                              Continued on ne)( page

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                              Form PM 139

                                              171 (continued)

                                              ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                              Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                              5 AmeoQlITir

                                              bull

                                              M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                              181

                                              and

                                              no matter how

                                              are trained

                                              DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                              11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                              Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                              8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                              lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                              the response button each time one of these it is

                                              the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                              where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                              be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                              ears with the ear and

                                              the audiometer win

                                              the mmr(

                                              and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                              the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                              c~vman form

                                              and Services in audiometric

                                              health that attendance

                                              Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                              recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                              ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                              such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                              it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                              If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                              after

                                              500-8000 take no further

                                              500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                              advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                              check the noise exposure since the last was

                                              are

                                              audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                              errIOIJVEeS are

                                              take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                              IF

                                              Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                              161 (conlinood)

                                              should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                              ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                              civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                              retest the Tlnt in six months

                                              The referral criteria are

                                              a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                              is 15 dB or more at any

                                              wax or if there is a or

                                              thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                              The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                              191

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                              Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                              Three decibel rule

                                              The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                              SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                              85 8 hours

                                              88 4 hours

                                              91 2 hours

                                              94 1 hour

                                              97 30 minutes

                                              100 15 minutes

                                              1101

                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                              Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                              Section 10 - Reference material

                                              References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                              2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                              3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                              4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                              5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                              6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                              7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                              8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                              9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                              10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                              11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                              12 Safety signs

                                              13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                              14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                              15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                              16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                              17 Noise awareness program

                                              18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                              19 OHS skills development training

                                              20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                              21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                              Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                              1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                              AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                              ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                              Related material

                                              1102 (ool1linuen)

                                              • Part 1
                                              • Part 2
                                              • Part 3
                                              • Part 4
                                              • PArt 5

                                                PLANT

                                                in

                                                AS

                                                Cross Reference

                                                is to NI

                                                B

                                                at the or in the

                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                38-2

                                                f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                                                g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                                                h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                                                8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                                                RESPONSIBILITIES

                                                9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                                                10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                                                11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                                                12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                                                a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                                                c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                                                NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                                                13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                Engineering controls

                                                14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                                                15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                                                Amber Zone~

                                                of

                                                Black time

                                                or 115

                                                A f4nwnninotinn

                                                Extreme Zone

                                                b

                                                a

                                                to

                                                Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                                Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                                38-6

                                                34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                                Compensation

                                                35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                                Education

                                                36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                                37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                Operational areas

                                                38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                Documentation

                                                39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                                Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                                b

                                                Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                                1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                                NOISE

                                                1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                                a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                                shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                                nor shall include refresher on

                                                c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                                d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                                3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                                APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                                WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                                ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                                MUST BE WORN

                                                EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                                ANNEXBTO

                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                                METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                                1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                                a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                                b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                                d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                                2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                                3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                                B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                                b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                                c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                                (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                                (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                                (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                                protection

                                                (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                                Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                387-2

                                                d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                civilian document

                                                Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                3 U RULE

                                                1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                85 8 hours

                                                a8 4 hours

                                                91 2 hours

                                                94 1 hour

                                                97 30 minutes

                                                100 15 minutes

                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                rtwIrlv

                                                manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                REFERENCES

                                                1 Defence

                                                MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                2 Other

                                                3 Cross Reference

                                                4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                AS

                                                Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                WELDING

                                                SYNOPSIS

                                                REFERENCES

                                                1 Defence

                                                W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                2 Other

                                                AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                3 Cross Reference

                                                1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                FIRE SAFETY

                                                SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                REFERENCES

                                                1 Defence

                                                MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                2 Other

                                                AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                3 Cross Reference

                                                Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                38-3

                                                Administrative controls

                                                17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                Personal protective equipment

                                                18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                Noise assessments

                                                23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                REFERENCES

                                                1 Defence

                                                DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                2 Other

                                                and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                3 Cross Reference

                                                8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                112

                                                113

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                Section 1 - Overview

                                                Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                bull increased health care and compensation

                                                Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                Continued on next page

                                                mAinArlA he risks to

                                                means

                                                the

                                                I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                118

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                Section Content

                                                1 Overview

                                                2 Specific responsibilities

                                                3 Noise management principles

                                                4 Impulse noise

                                                5 Warning signs

                                                6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                9 The three decibel rule

                                                10 Reference material

                                                The fnllnwinn

                                                124

                                                125

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                Training and skilling

                                                Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                and OHS skills

                                                Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                131

                                                132

                                                133

                                                134

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                Eng ineering controls

                                                Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                Administrative controls

                                                Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                135

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                Noise assessments

                                                Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                Hearing protection areas

                                                136

                                                Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                137

                                                138

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                Hearing protection areas

                                                136 (continued)

                                                A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                Audiometric examinations

                                                Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                139

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                Audiometric eXaminations

                                                138 (conlhued)

                                                bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                Education

                                                1310

                                                Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                1312

                                                141

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                151

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                MUST BE W O R N

                                                ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                M UST BE W ORN

                                                C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                E AH MUFFS ]

                                                M UST BE WOAN

                                                HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                161

                                                162

                                                163

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                164

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                FOR r shy

                                                3

                                                4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                3

                                                4 Hold

                                                ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                IiudeT

                                                Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                164 (conUnued)

                                                -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                ) VISUA CH CK

                                                6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                o ~Sati1h

                                                s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                171

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                1 Toe(l __

                                                - T 1at eI -

                                                l

                                                _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                Continued on ne)( page

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                Form PM 139

                                                171 (continued)

                                                ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                5 AmeoQlITir

                                                bull

                                                M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                181

                                                and

                                                no matter how

                                                are trained

                                                DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                the response button each time one of these it is

                                                the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                ears with the ear and

                                                the audiometer win

                                                the mmr(

                                                and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                c~vman form

                                                and Services in audiometric

                                                health that attendance

                                                Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                after

                                                500-8000 take no further

                                                500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                are

                                                audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                errIOIJVEeS are

                                                take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                IF

                                                Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                161 (conlinood)

                                                should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                The referral criteria are

                                                a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                is 15 dB or more at any

                                                wax or if there is a or

                                                thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                191

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                Three decibel rule

                                                The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                85 8 hours

                                                88 4 hours

                                                91 2 hours

                                                94 1 hour

                                                97 30 minutes

                                                100 15 minutes

                                                1101

                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                Section 10 - Reference material

                                                References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                12 Safety signs

                                                13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                17 Noise awareness program

                                                18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                19 OHS skills development training

                                                20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                Related material

                                                1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                • Part 1
                                                • Part 2
                                                • Part 3
                                                • Part 4
                                                • PArt 5

                                                  AS

                                                  Cross Reference

                                                  is to NI

                                                  B

                                                  at the or in the

                                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                  38-2

                                                  f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                                                  g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                                                  h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                                                  8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                                                  RESPONSIBILITIES

                                                  9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                                                  10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                                                  11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                                                  12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                                                  a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                  b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                                                  c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                                                  NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                                                  13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                  Engineering controls

                                                  14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                                                  15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                  16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                                                  Amber Zone~

                                                  of

                                                  Black time

                                                  or 115

                                                  A f4nwnninotinn

                                                  Extreme Zone

                                                  b

                                                  a

                                                  to

                                                  Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                                  Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                                  38-6

                                                  34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                                  Compensation

                                                  35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                                  Education

                                                  36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                                  37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                  Operational areas

                                                  38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                  Documentation

                                                  39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                                  Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                                  b

                                                  Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                                  1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                                  NOISE

                                                  1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                                  a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                                  shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                                  nor shall include refresher on

                                                  c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                                  d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                                  3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                                  APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                                  WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                                  ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                  EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                                  MUST BE WORN

                                                  EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                                  ANNEXBTO

                                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                  APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                                  METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                                  1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                                  a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                                  b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                  c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                                  d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                                  2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                                  3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                                  B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                                  b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                                  c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                                  (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                                  (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                                  (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                                  protection

                                                  (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                                  Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                  387-2

                                                  d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                  (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                  civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                  e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                  4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                  a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                  b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                  c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                  d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                  5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                  civilian document

                                                  Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                  APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                  3 U RULE

                                                  1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                  SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                  85 8 hours

                                                  a8 4 hours

                                                  91 2 hours

                                                  94 1 hour

                                                  97 30 minutes

                                                  100 15 minutes

                                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                  ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                  ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                  SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                  rtwIrlv

                                                  manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                  REFERENCES

                                                  1 Defence

                                                  MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                  2 Other

                                                  3 Cross Reference

                                                  4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                  Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                  AS

                                                  Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                  WELDING

                                                  SYNOPSIS

                                                  REFERENCES

                                                  1 Defence

                                                  W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                  2 Other

                                                  AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                  AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                  AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                  AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                  JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                  Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                  3 Cross Reference

                                                  1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                  5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                  7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                  ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                  FIRE SAFETY

                                                  SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                  REFERENCES

                                                  1 Defence

                                                  MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                  DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                  MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                  2 Other

                                                  AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                  AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                  AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                  AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                  AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                  AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                  AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                  AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                  3 Cross Reference

                                                  Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                  38-3

                                                  Administrative controls

                                                  17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                  Personal protective equipment

                                                  18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                  19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                  a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                  b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                  c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                  20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                  21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                  22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                  Noise assessments

                                                  23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                  24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                  a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                  b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                  c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                  d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                  Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                  11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                  THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                  SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                  environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                  REFERENCES

                                                  1 Defence

                                                  DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                  OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                  DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                  If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                  2 Other

                                                  and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                  3 Cross Reference

                                                  8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                  112

                                                  113

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                  CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                  NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                  Section 1 - Overview

                                                  Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                  Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                  Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                  Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                  Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                  Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                  bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                  bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                  bull increased health care and compensation

                                                  Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                  For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                  Continued on next page

                                                  mAinArlA he risks to

                                                  means

                                                  the

                                                  I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                  118

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                  Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                  117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                  Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                  Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                  Section Content

                                                  1 Overview

                                                  2 Specific responsibilities

                                                  3 Noise management principles

                                                  4 Impulse noise

                                                  5 Warning signs

                                                  6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                  7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                  8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                  9 The three decibel rule

                                                  10 Reference material

                                                  The fnllnwinn

                                                  124

                                                  125

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                  Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                  Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                  When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                  Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                  bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                  bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                  bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                  When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                  Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                  Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                  Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                  bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                  bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                  bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                  Training and skilling

                                                  Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                  The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                  course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                  Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                  and OHS skills

                                                  Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                  costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                  131

                                                  132

                                                  133

                                                  134

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                  Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                  Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                  Eng ineering controls

                                                  Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                  For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                  Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                  Administrative controls

                                                  Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                  Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                  Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                  The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                  bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                  bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                  bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                  Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                  Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                  Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                  135

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                  Noise assessments

                                                  Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                  Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                  bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                  bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                  bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                  bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                  Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                  Hearing protection areas

                                                  136

                                                  Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                  bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                  continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                  impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                  A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                  bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                  con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                  impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                  Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                  bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                  continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                  im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                  ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                  137

                                                  138

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                  Hearing protection areas

                                                  136 (continued)

                                                  A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                  bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                  continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                  impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                  A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                  The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                  Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                  The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                  The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                  Audiometric examinations

                                                  Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                  bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                  bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                  Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                  ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                  139

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                  Audiometric eXaminations

                                                  138 (conlhued)

                                                  bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                  bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                  bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                  bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                  bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                  Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                  Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                  Education

                                                  1310

                                                  Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                  Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                  Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                  1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                  Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                  1312

                                                  141

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                  Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                  Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                  This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                  bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                  bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                  bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                  bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                  151

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                  Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                  Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                  HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                  MUST BE W O R N

                                                  ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                  HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                  EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                  M UST BE W ORN

                                                  C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                  r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                  E AH MUFFS ]

                                                  M UST BE WOAN

                                                  HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                  l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                  MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                  ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                  161

                                                  162

                                                  163

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                  Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                  Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                  the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                  Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                  Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                  Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                  Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                  Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                  bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                  bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                  bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                  164

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                  Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                  FOR r shy

                                                  3

                                                  4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                  3

                                                  4 Hold

                                                  ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                  IiudeT

                                                  Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                  I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                  Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                  p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                  wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                  ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                  Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                  T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                  p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                  A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                  Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                  Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                  164 (conUnued)

                                                  -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                  ) VISUA CH CK

                                                  6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                  rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                  o ~Sati1h

                                                  s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                  Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                  bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                  171

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                  Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                  Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                  MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                  Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                  bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                  1 Toe(l __

                                                  - T 1at eI -

                                                  l

                                                  _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                  ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                  AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                  ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                  Continued on ne)( page

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                  Form PM 139

                                                  171 (continued)

                                                  ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                  Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                  5 AmeoQlITir

                                                  bull

                                                  M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                  181

                                                  and

                                                  no matter how

                                                  are trained

                                                  DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                  11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                  Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                  8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                  lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                  the response button each time one of these it is

                                                  the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                  where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                  be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                  ears with the ear and

                                                  the audiometer win

                                                  the mmr(

                                                  and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                  the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                  c~vman form

                                                  and Services in audiometric

                                                  health that attendance

                                                  Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                  recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                  ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                  such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                  it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                  If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                  after

                                                  500-8000 take no further

                                                  500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                  advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                  check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                  are

                                                  audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                  errIOIJVEeS are

                                                  take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                  IF

                                                  Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                  161 (conlinood)

                                                  should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                  ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                  civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                  retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                  The referral criteria are

                                                  a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                  is 15 dB or more at any

                                                  wax or if there is a or

                                                  thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                  The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                  191

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                  Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                  Three decibel rule

                                                  The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                  SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                  85 8 hours

                                                  88 4 hours

                                                  91 2 hours

                                                  94 1 hour

                                                  97 30 minutes

                                                  100 15 minutes

                                                  1101

                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                  Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                  Section 10 - Reference material

                                                  References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                  2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                  3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                  4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                  5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                  6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                  7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                  8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                  9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                  10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                  11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                  12 Safety signs

                                                  13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                  14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                  15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                  16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                  17 Noise awareness program

                                                  18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                  19 OHS skills development training

                                                  20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                  21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                  Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                  1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                  AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                  ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                  Related material

                                                  1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                  • Part 1
                                                  • Part 2
                                                  • Part 3
                                                  • Part 4
                                                  • PArt 5

                                                    is to NI

                                                    B

                                                    at the or in the

                                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                    38-2

                                                    f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                                                    g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                                                    h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                                                    8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                                                    RESPONSIBILITIES

                                                    9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                                                    10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                                                    11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                                                    12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                                                    a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                    b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                                                    c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                                                    NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                                                    13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                    Engineering controls

                                                    14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                                                    15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                    16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                                                    Amber Zone~

                                                    of

                                                    Black time

                                                    or 115

                                                    A f4nwnninotinn

                                                    Extreme Zone

                                                    b

                                                    a

                                                    to

                                                    Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                                    Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                                    38-6

                                                    34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                                    Compensation

                                                    35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                                    Education

                                                    36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                                    37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                    Operational areas

                                                    38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                    Documentation

                                                    39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                                    Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                                    b

                                                    Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                                    1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                                    NOISE

                                                    1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                                    a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                                    shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                                    nor shall include refresher on

                                                    c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                                    d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                                    3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                                    APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                                    WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                                    ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                    EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                                    MUST BE WORN

                                                    EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                                    ANNEXBTO

                                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                    APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                                    METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                                    1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                                    a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                                    b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                    c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                                    d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                                    2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                                    3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                                    B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                                    b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                                    c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                                    (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                                    (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                                    (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                                    protection

                                                    (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                                    Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                    387-2

                                                    d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                    (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                    civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                    e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                    4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                    a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                    b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                    c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                    d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                    5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                    civilian document

                                                    Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                    APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                    3 U RULE

                                                    1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                    SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                    85 8 hours

                                                    a8 4 hours

                                                    91 2 hours

                                                    94 1 hour

                                                    97 30 minutes

                                                    100 15 minutes

                                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                    ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                    ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                    SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                    rtwIrlv

                                                    manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                    REFERENCES

                                                    1 Defence

                                                    MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                    2 Other

                                                    3 Cross Reference

                                                    4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                    Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                    AS

                                                    Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                    WELDING

                                                    SYNOPSIS

                                                    REFERENCES

                                                    1 Defence

                                                    W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                    2 Other

                                                    AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                    AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                    AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                    AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                    JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                    Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                    3 Cross Reference

                                                    1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                    5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                    7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                    ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                    FIRE SAFETY

                                                    SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                    REFERENCES

                                                    1 Defence

                                                    MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                    DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                    MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                    2 Other

                                                    AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                    AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                    AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                    AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                    AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                    AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                    AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                    AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                    3 Cross Reference

                                                    Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                    38-3

                                                    Administrative controls

                                                    17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                    Personal protective equipment

                                                    18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                    19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                    a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                    b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                    c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                    20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                    21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                    22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                    Noise assessments

                                                    23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                    24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                    a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                    b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                    c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                    d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                    Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                    11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                    THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                    SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                    environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                    REFERENCES

                                                    1 Defence

                                                    DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                    OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                    DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                    If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                    2 Other

                                                    and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                    3 Cross Reference

                                                    8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                    112

                                                    113

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                    CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                    NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                    Section 1 - Overview

                                                    Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                    Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                    Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                    Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                    Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                    Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                    bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                    bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                    bull increased health care and compensation

                                                    Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                    For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                    Continued on next page

                                                    mAinArlA he risks to

                                                    means

                                                    the

                                                    I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                    118

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                    Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                    117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                    Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                    Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                    Section Content

                                                    1 Overview

                                                    2 Specific responsibilities

                                                    3 Noise management principles

                                                    4 Impulse noise

                                                    5 Warning signs

                                                    6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                    7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                    8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                    9 The three decibel rule

                                                    10 Reference material

                                                    The fnllnwinn

                                                    124

                                                    125

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                    Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                    Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                    When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                    Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                    bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                    bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                    bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                    When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                    Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                    Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                    Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                    bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                    bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                    bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                    Training and skilling

                                                    Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                    The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                    course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                    Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                    and OHS skills

                                                    Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                    costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                    131

                                                    132

                                                    133

                                                    134

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                    Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                    Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                    Eng ineering controls

                                                    Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                    For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                    Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                    Administrative controls

                                                    Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                    Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                    Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                    The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                    bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                    bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                    bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                    Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                    Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                    Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                    135

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                    Noise assessments

                                                    Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                    Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                    bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                    bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                    bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                    bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                    Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                    Hearing protection areas

                                                    136

                                                    Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                    bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                    continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                    impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                    A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                    bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                    con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                    impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                    Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                    bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                    continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                    im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                    ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                    137

                                                    138

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                    Hearing protection areas

                                                    136 (continued)

                                                    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                    bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                    continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                    impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                    The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                    Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                    The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                    The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                    Audiometric examinations

                                                    Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                    bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                    bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                    Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                    ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                    139

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                    Audiometric eXaminations

                                                    138 (conlhued)

                                                    bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                    bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                    bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                    bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                    bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                    Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                    Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                    Education

                                                    1310

                                                    Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                    Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                    Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                    1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                    Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                    1312

                                                    141

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                    Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                    Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                    This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                    bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                    bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                    bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                    bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                    151

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                    Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                    Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                    HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                    MUST BE W O R N

                                                    ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                    EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                    M UST BE W ORN

                                                    C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                    r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                    E AH MUFFS ]

                                                    M UST BE WOAN

                                                    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                    l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                    MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                    ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                    161

                                                    162

                                                    163

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                    Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                    Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                    the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                    Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                    Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                    Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                    Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                    Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                    bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                    bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                    bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                    164

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                    Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                    FOR r shy

                                                    3

                                                    4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                    3

                                                    4 Hold

                                                    ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                    IiudeT

                                                    Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                    I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                    Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                    p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                    wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                    ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                    Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                    T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                    p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                    A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                    Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                    Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                    164 (conUnued)

                                                    -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                    ) VISUA CH CK

                                                    6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                    rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                    o ~Sati1h

                                                    s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                    Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                    bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                    171

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                    Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                    Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                    MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                    Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                    bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                    1 Toe(l __

                                                    - T 1at eI -

                                                    l

                                                    _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                    ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                    AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                    ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                    Continued on ne)( page

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                    Form PM 139

                                                    171 (continued)

                                                    ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                    Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                    5 AmeoQlITir

                                                    bull

                                                    M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                    181

                                                    and

                                                    no matter how

                                                    are trained

                                                    DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                    11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                    Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                    8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                    lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                    the response button each time one of these it is

                                                    the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                    where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                    be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                    ears with the ear and

                                                    the audiometer win

                                                    the mmr(

                                                    and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                    the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                    c~vman form

                                                    and Services in audiometric

                                                    health that attendance

                                                    Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                    recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                    ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                    such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                    it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                    If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                    after

                                                    500-8000 take no further

                                                    500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                    advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                    check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                    are

                                                    audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                    errIOIJVEeS are

                                                    take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                    IF

                                                    Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                    161 (conlinood)

                                                    should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                    ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                    civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                    retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                    The referral criteria are

                                                    a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                    is 15 dB or more at any

                                                    wax or if there is a or

                                                    thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                    The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                    191

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                    Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                    Three decibel rule

                                                    The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                    SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                    85 8 hours

                                                    88 4 hours

                                                    91 2 hours

                                                    94 1 hour

                                                    97 30 minutes

                                                    100 15 minutes

                                                    1101

                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                    Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                    Section 10 - Reference material

                                                    References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                    2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                    3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                    4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                    5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                    6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                    7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                    8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                    9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                    10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                    11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                    12 Safety signs

                                                    13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                    14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                    15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                    16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                    17 Noise awareness program

                                                    18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                    19 OHS skills development training

                                                    20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                    21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                    Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                    1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                    AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                    ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                    Related material

                                                    1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                    • Part 1
                                                    • Part 2
                                                    • Part 3
                                                    • Part 4
                                                    • PArt 5

                                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                      38-2

                                                      f education at aU levels regard ing the effect of noise on hearing and the procedures to be followed to prevent NI

                                                      g the provisio of personal Hearing Protect on Devices (HPD) to all lIIlJloyees working in HPA as well as operational tacticaJ and field areas and

                                                      h the identification of employees wi th NI by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audjograms performed during the period of employment

                                                      8 Guidance on impulse noise is contained in appendix 1

                                                      RESPONSIBILITIES

                                                      9 Head Defence Personnel Executive (HOPE) HDPE is responsible for the formulaiion of Defence Organisation policy regarding all aspects of noise management

                                                      10 Program Managers Program Managers are to plan and implement a NMP incorporating the specific pollcie oUliined in this annex Any expenses incurred in Implementing this chapter will be the responsibility of Program Management (DI(G) ADMIN 39-1-Program Management and Budgeting- Program Structure and OI (G) ADMIN 39- 2- Program Management and Budgeting-Operating Framework refer)

                                                      11 CommandersManagers The prevention of occupational hearing loss due to exposure to nOise hazards is the responsibility of all commandersmanagers in accordance with the OHS Act

                                                      12 Employees Employees while at work are to take all reasonable practicable steps

                                                      a not to create a risk or increase an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                      b to cooperate wi th all persons who have obligations under the OHS Act to the extent necessary te enable them to fulfil those obligations and

                                                      c to use equipment in accordance with any instruction Issued by either management or the workplace supervisor consistent with its safe and proper use

                                                      NOISE MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES

                                                      13 The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure in conjunction with other ractors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                      Engineering controls

                                                      14 Program Managers are to ensure that noise is controlled by engineering design methods such as elimination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equIpment and wonlt proce ss

                                                      15 For continuous noise the occupational exposure Umit is a maximum of 85 dBA) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB linear (lin) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                      16 Where practicable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken 10 limit the noise levels to which personnel may be exposed Engineering controls should also be appl ied to ex isting equipment and processes which creale noise beyond the reca mended limits contained in th is chapter

                                                      Amber Zone~

                                                      of

                                                      Black time

                                                      or 115

                                                      A f4nwnninotinn

                                                      Extreme Zone

                                                      b

                                                      a

                                                      to

                                                      Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                                      Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                                      38-6

                                                      34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                                      Compensation

                                                      35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                                      Education

                                                      36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                                      37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                      Operational areas

                                                      38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                      Documentation

                                                      39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                                      Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                                      b

                                                      Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                                      1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                                      NOISE

                                                      1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                                      a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                                      shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                                      nor shall include refresher on

                                                      c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                                      d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                                      3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                                      APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                                      WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                                      ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                      EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                                      MUST BE WORN

                                                      EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                                      ANNEXBTO

                                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                      APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                                      METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                                      1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                                      a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                                      b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                      c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                                      d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                                      2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                                      3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                                      B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                                      b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                                      c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                                      (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                                      (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                                      (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                                      protection

                                                      (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                                      Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                      387-2

                                                      d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                      (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                      civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                      e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                      4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                      a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                      b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                      c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                      d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                      5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                      civilian document

                                                      Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                      APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                      3 U RULE

                                                      1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                      SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                      85 8 hours

                                                      a8 4 hours

                                                      91 2 hours

                                                      94 1 hour

                                                      97 30 minutes

                                                      100 15 minutes

                                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                      ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                      ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                      SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                      rtwIrlv

                                                      manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                      REFERENCES

                                                      1 Defence

                                                      MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                      2 Other

                                                      3 Cross Reference

                                                      4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                      Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                      AS

                                                      Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                      WELDING

                                                      SYNOPSIS

                                                      REFERENCES

                                                      1 Defence

                                                      W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                      2 Other

                                                      AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                      AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                      AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                      AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                      JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                      Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                      3 Cross Reference

                                                      1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                      5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                      7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                      ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                      FIRE SAFETY

                                                      SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                      REFERENCES

                                                      1 Defence

                                                      MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                      DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                      MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                      2 Other

                                                      AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                      AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                      AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                      AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                      AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                      AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                      AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                      AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                      3 Cross Reference

                                                      Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                      38-3

                                                      Administrative controls

                                                      17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                      Personal protective equipment

                                                      18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                      19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                      a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                      b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                      c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                      20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                      21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                      22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                      Noise assessments

                                                      23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                      24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                      a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                      b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                      c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                      d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                      Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                      11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                      THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                      SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                      environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                      REFERENCES

                                                      1 Defence

                                                      DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                      OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                      DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                      If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                      2 Other

                                                      and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                      3 Cross Reference

                                                      8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                      112

                                                      113

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                      CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                      NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                      Section 1 - Overview

                                                      Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                      Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                      Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                      Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                      Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                      Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                      bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                      bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                      bull increased health care and compensation

                                                      Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                      For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                      Continued on next page

                                                      mAinArlA he risks to

                                                      means

                                                      the

                                                      I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                      118

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                      Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                      117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                      Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                      Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                      Section Content

                                                      1 Overview

                                                      2 Specific responsibilities

                                                      3 Noise management principles

                                                      4 Impulse noise

                                                      5 Warning signs

                                                      6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                      7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                      8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                      9 The three decibel rule

                                                      10 Reference material

                                                      The fnllnwinn

                                                      124

                                                      125

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                      Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                      Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                      When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                      Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                      bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                      bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                      bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                      When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                      Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                      Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                      Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                      bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                      bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                      bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                      Training and skilling

                                                      Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                      The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                      course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                      Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                      and OHS skills

                                                      Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                      costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                      131

                                                      132

                                                      133

                                                      134

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                      Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                      Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                      Eng ineering controls

                                                      Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                      For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                      Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                      Administrative controls

                                                      Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                      Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                      Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                      The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                      bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                      bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                      bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                      Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                      Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                      Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                      135

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                      Noise assessments

                                                      Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                      Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                      bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                      bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                      bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                      bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                      Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                      Hearing protection areas

                                                      136

                                                      Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                      bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                      continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                      impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                      A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                      bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                      con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                      impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                      Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                      bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                      continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                      im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                      ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                      137

                                                      138

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                      Hearing protection areas

                                                      136 (continued)

                                                      A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                      bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                      continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                      impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                      A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                      The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                      Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                      The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                      The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                      Audiometric examinations

                                                      Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                      bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                      bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                      Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                      ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                      139

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                      Audiometric eXaminations

                                                      138 (conlhued)

                                                      bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                      bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                      bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                      bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                      bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                      Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                      Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                      Education

                                                      1310

                                                      Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                      Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                      Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                      1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                      Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                      1312

                                                      141

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                      Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                      Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                      This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                      bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                      bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                      bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                      bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                      151

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                      Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                      Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                      HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                      MUST BE W O R N

                                                      ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                      EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                      M UST BE W ORN

                                                      C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                      r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                      E AH MUFFS ]

                                                      M UST BE WOAN

                                                      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                      l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                      MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                      ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                      161

                                                      162

                                                      163

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                      Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                      Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                      the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                      Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                      Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                      Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                      Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                      Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                      bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                      bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                      bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                      164

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                      Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                      FOR r shy

                                                      3

                                                      4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                      3

                                                      4 Hold

                                                      ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                      IiudeT

                                                      Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                      I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                      Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                      p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                      wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                      ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                      Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                      T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                      p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                      A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                      Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                      Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                      164 (conUnued)

                                                      -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                      ) VISUA CH CK

                                                      6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                      rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                      o ~Sati1h

                                                      s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                      Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                      bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                      171

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                      Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                      Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                      MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                      Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                      bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                      1 Toe(l __

                                                      - T 1at eI -

                                                      l

                                                      _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                      ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                      AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                      ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                      Continued on ne)( page

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                      Form PM 139

                                                      171 (continued)

                                                      ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                      Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                      5 AmeoQlITir

                                                      bull

                                                      M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                      181

                                                      and

                                                      no matter how

                                                      are trained

                                                      DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                      11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                      Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                      8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                      lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                      the response button each time one of these it is

                                                      the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                      where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                      be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                      ears with the ear and

                                                      the audiometer win

                                                      the mmr(

                                                      and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                      the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                      c~vman form

                                                      and Services in audiometric

                                                      health that attendance

                                                      Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                      recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                      ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                      such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                      it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                      If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                      after

                                                      500-8000 take no further

                                                      500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                      advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                      check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                      are

                                                      audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                      errIOIJVEeS are

                                                      take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                      IF

                                                      Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                      161 (conlinood)

                                                      should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                      ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                      civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                      retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                      The referral criteria are

                                                      a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                      is 15 dB or more at any

                                                      wax or if there is a or

                                                      thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                      The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                      191

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                      Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                      Three decibel rule

                                                      The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                      SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                      85 8 hours

                                                      88 4 hours

                                                      91 2 hours

                                                      94 1 hour

                                                      97 30 minutes

                                                      100 15 minutes

                                                      1101

                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                      Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                      Section 10 - Reference material

                                                      References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                      2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                      3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                      4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                      5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                      6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                      7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                      8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                      9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                      10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                      11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                      12 Safety signs

                                                      13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                      14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                      15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                      16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                      17 Noise awareness program

                                                      18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                      19 OHS skills development training

                                                      20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                      21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                      Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                      1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                      AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                      ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                      Related material

                                                      1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                      • Part 1
                                                      • Part 2
                                                      • Part 3
                                                      • Part 4
                                                      • PArt 5

                                                        Amber Zone~

                                                        of

                                                        Black time

                                                        or 115

                                                        A f4nwnninotinn

                                                        Extreme Zone

                                                        b

                                                        a

                                                        to

                                                        Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                                        Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                                        38-6

                                                        34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                                        Compensation

                                                        35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                                        Education

                                                        36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                                        37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                        Operational areas

                                                        38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                        Documentation

                                                        39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                                        Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                                        b

                                                        Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                                        1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                                        NOISE

                                                        1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                                        a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                                        shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                                        nor shall include refresher on

                                                        c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                                        d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                                        3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                                        APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                                        WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                                        ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                        EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                                        MUST BE WORN

                                                        EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                                        ANNEXBTO

                                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                        APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                                        METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                                        1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                                        a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                                        b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                        c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                                        d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                                        2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                                        3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                                        B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                                        b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                                        c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                                        (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                                        (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                                        (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                                        protection

                                                        (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                                        Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                        387-2

                                                        d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                        (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                        civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                        e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                        4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                        a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                        b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                        c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                        d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                        5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                        civilian document

                                                        Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                        APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                        3 U RULE

                                                        1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                        SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                        85 8 hours

                                                        a8 4 hours

                                                        91 2 hours

                                                        94 1 hour

                                                        97 30 minutes

                                                        100 15 minutes

                                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                        ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                        ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                        SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                        rtwIrlv

                                                        manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                        REFERENCES

                                                        1 Defence

                                                        MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                        2 Other

                                                        3 Cross Reference

                                                        4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                        Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                        AS

                                                        Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                        WELDING

                                                        SYNOPSIS

                                                        REFERENCES

                                                        1 Defence

                                                        W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                        2 Other

                                                        AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                        AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                        AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                        AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                        JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                        Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                        3 Cross Reference

                                                        1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                        5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                        7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                        ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                        FIRE SAFETY

                                                        SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                        REFERENCES

                                                        1 Defence

                                                        MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                        DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                        MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                        2 Other

                                                        AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                        AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                        AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                        AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                        AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                        AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                        AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                        AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                        3 Cross Reference

                                                        Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                        38-3

                                                        Administrative controls

                                                        17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                        Personal protective equipment

                                                        18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                        19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                        a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                        b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                        c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                        20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                        21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                        22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                        Noise assessments

                                                        23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                        24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                        a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                        b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                        c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                        d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                        Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                        11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                        THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                        SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                        environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                        REFERENCES

                                                        1 Defence

                                                        DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                        OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                        DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                        If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                        2 Other

                                                        and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                        3 Cross Reference

                                                        8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                        112

                                                        113

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                        CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                        NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                        Section 1 - Overview

                                                        Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                        Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                        Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                        Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                        Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                        Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                        bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                        bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                        bull increased health care and compensation

                                                        Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                        For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                        Continued on next page

                                                        mAinArlA he risks to

                                                        means

                                                        the

                                                        I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                        118

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                        Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                        117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                        Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                        Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                        Section Content

                                                        1 Overview

                                                        2 Specific responsibilities

                                                        3 Noise management principles

                                                        4 Impulse noise

                                                        5 Warning signs

                                                        6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                        7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                        8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                        9 The three decibel rule

                                                        10 Reference material

                                                        The fnllnwinn

                                                        124

                                                        125

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                        Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                        Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                        When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                        Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                        bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                        bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                        bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                        When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                        Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                        Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                        Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                        bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                        bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                        bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                        Training and skilling

                                                        Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                        The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                        course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                        Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                        and OHS skills

                                                        Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                        costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                        131

                                                        132

                                                        133

                                                        134

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                        Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                        Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                        Eng ineering controls

                                                        Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                        For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                        Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                        Administrative controls

                                                        Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                        Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                        Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                        The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                        bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                        bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                        bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                        Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                        Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                        Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                        135

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                        Noise assessments

                                                        Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                        Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                        bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                        bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                        bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                        bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                        Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                        Hearing protection areas

                                                        136

                                                        Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                        bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                        continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                        impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                        A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                        bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                        con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                        impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                        Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                        bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                        continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                        im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                        ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                        137

                                                        138

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                        Hearing protection areas

                                                        136 (continued)

                                                        A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                        bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                        continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                        impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                        A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                        The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                        Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                        The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                        The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                        Audiometric examinations

                                                        Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                        bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                        bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                        Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                        ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                        139

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                        Audiometric eXaminations

                                                        138 (conlhued)

                                                        bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                        bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                        bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                        bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                        bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                        Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                        Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                        Education

                                                        1310

                                                        Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                        Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                        Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                        1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                        Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                        1312

                                                        141

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                        Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                        Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                        This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                        bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                        bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                        bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                        bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                        151

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                        Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                        Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                        HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                        MUST BE W O R N

                                                        ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                        EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                        M UST BE W ORN

                                                        C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                        r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                        E AH MUFFS ]

                                                        M UST BE WOAN

                                                        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                        l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                        MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                        ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                        161

                                                        162

                                                        163

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                        Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                        Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                        the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                        Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                        Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                        Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                        Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                        Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                        bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                        bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                        bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                        164

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                        Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                        FOR r shy

                                                        3

                                                        4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                        3

                                                        4 Hold

                                                        ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                        IiudeT

                                                        Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                        I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                        Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                        p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                        wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                        ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                        Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                        T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                        p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                        A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                        Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                        Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                        164 (conUnued)

                                                        -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                        ) VISUA CH CK

                                                        6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                        rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                        o ~Sati1h

                                                        s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                        Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                        bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                        171

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                        Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                        Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                        MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                        Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                        bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                        1 Toe(l __

                                                        - T 1at eI -

                                                        l

                                                        _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                        ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                        AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                        ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                        Continued on ne)( page

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                        Form PM 139

                                                        171 (continued)

                                                        ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                        Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                        5 AmeoQlITir

                                                        bull

                                                        M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                        181

                                                        and

                                                        no matter how

                                                        are trained

                                                        DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                        11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                        Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                        8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                        lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                        the response button each time one of these it is

                                                        the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                        where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                        be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                        ears with the ear and

                                                        the audiometer win

                                                        the mmr(

                                                        and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                        the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                        c~vman form

                                                        and Services in audiometric

                                                        health that attendance

                                                        Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                        recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                        ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                        such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                        it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                        If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                        after

                                                        500-8000 take no further

                                                        500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                        advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                        check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                        are

                                                        audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                        errIOIJVEeS are

                                                        take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                        IF

                                                        Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                        161 (conlinood)

                                                        should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                        ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                        civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                        retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                        The referral criteria are

                                                        a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                        is 15 dB or more at any

                                                        wax or if there is a or

                                                        thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                        The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                        191

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                        Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                        Three decibel rule

                                                        The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                        SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                        85 8 hours

                                                        88 4 hours

                                                        91 2 hours

                                                        94 1 hour

                                                        97 30 minutes

                                                        100 15 minutes

                                                        1101

                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                        Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                        Section 10 - Reference material

                                                        References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                        2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                        3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                        4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                        5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                        6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                        7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                        8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                        9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                        10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                        11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                        12 Safety signs

                                                        13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                        14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                        15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                        16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                        17 Noise awareness program

                                                        18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                        19 OHS skills development training

                                                        20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                        21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                        Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                        1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                        AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                        ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                        Related material

                                                        1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                        • Part 1
                                                        • Part 2
                                                        • Part 3
                                                        • Part 4
                                                        • PArt 5

                                                          b

                                                          a

                                                          to

                                                          Termination of Service All emDlovet~s the

                                                          Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                                          38-6

                                                          34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                                          Compensation

                                                          35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                                          Education

                                                          36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                                          37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                          Operational areas

                                                          38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                          Documentation

                                                          39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                                          Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                                          b

                                                          Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                                          1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                                          NOISE

                                                          1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                                          a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                                          shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                                          nor shall include refresher on

                                                          c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                                          d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                                          3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                                          APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                                          WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                                          ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                          EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                                          MUST BE WORN

                                                          EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                                          ANNEXBTO

                                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                          APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                                          METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                                          1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                                          a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                                          b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                          c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                                          d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                                          2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                                          3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                                          B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                                          b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                                          c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                                          (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                                          (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                                          (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                                          protection

                                                          (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                                          Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                          387-2

                                                          d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                          (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                          civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                          e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                          4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                          a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                          b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                          c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                          d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                          5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                          civilian document

                                                          Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                          APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                          3 U RULE

                                                          1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                          SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                          85 8 hours

                                                          a8 4 hours

                                                          91 2 hours

                                                          94 1 hour

                                                          97 30 minutes

                                                          100 15 minutes

                                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                          ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                          ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                          SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                          rtwIrlv

                                                          manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                          REFERENCES

                                                          1 Defence

                                                          MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                          2 Other

                                                          3 Cross Reference

                                                          4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                          Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                          AS

                                                          Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                          WELDING

                                                          SYNOPSIS

                                                          REFERENCES

                                                          1 Defence

                                                          W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                          2 Other

                                                          AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                          AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                          AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                          AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                          JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                          Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                          3 Cross Reference

                                                          1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                          5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                          7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                          ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                          FIRE SAFETY

                                                          SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                          REFERENCES

                                                          1 Defence

                                                          MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                          DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                          MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                          2 Other

                                                          AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                          AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                          AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                          AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                          AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                          AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                          AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                          AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                          3 Cross Reference

                                                          Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                          38-3

                                                          Administrative controls

                                                          17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                          Personal protective equipment

                                                          18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                          19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                          a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                          b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                          c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                          20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                          21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                          22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                          Noise assessments

                                                          23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                          24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                          a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                          b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                          c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                          d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                          Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                          11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                          THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                          SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                          environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                          REFERENCES

                                                          1 Defence

                                                          DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                          OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                          DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                          If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                          2 Other

                                                          and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                          3 Cross Reference

                                                          8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                          112

                                                          113

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                          CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                          NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                          Section 1 - Overview

                                                          Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                          Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                          Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                          Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                          Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                          Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                          bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                          bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                          bull increased health care and compensation

                                                          Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                          For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                          Continued on next page

                                                          mAinArlA he risks to

                                                          means

                                                          the

                                                          I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                          118

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                          Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                          117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                          Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                          Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                          Section Content

                                                          1 Overview

                                                          2 Specific responsibilities

                                                          3 Noise management principles

                                                          4 Impulse noise

                                                          5 Warning signs

                                                          6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                          7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                          8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                          9 The three decibel rule

                                                          10 Reference material

                                                          The fnllnwinn

                                                          124

                                                          125

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                          Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                          Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                          When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                          Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                          bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                          bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                          bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                          When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                          Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                          Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                          Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                          bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                          bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                          bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                          Training and skilling

                                                          Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                          The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                          course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                          Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                          and OHS skills

                                                          Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                          costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                          131

                                                          132

                                                          133

                                                          134

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                          Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                          Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                          Eng ineering controls

                                                          Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                          For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                          Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                          Administrative controls

                                                          Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                          Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                          Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                          The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                          bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                          bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                          bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                          Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                          Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                          Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                          135

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                          Noise assessments

                                                          Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                          Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                          bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                          bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                          bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                          bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                          Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                          Hearing protection areas

                                                          136

                                                          Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                          bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                          continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                          impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                          A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                          bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                          con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                          impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                          Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                          bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                          continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                          im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                          ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                          137

                                                          138

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                          Hearing protection areas

                                                          136 (continued)

                                                          A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                          bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                          continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                          impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                          A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                          The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                          Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                          The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                          The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                          Audiometric examinations

                                                          Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                          bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                          bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                          Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                          ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                          139

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                          Audiometric eXaminations

                                                          138 (conlhued)

                                                          bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                          bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                          bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                          bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                          bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                          Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                          Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                          Education

                                                          1310

                                                          Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                          Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                          Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                          1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                          Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                          1312

                                                          141

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                          Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                          Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                          This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                          bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                          bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                          bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                          bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                          151

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                          Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                          Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                          HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                          MUST BE W O R N

                                                          ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                          EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                          M UST BE W ORN

                                                          C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                          r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                          E AH MUFFS ]

                                                          M UST BE WOAN

                                                          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                          l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                          MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                          ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                          161

                                                          162

                                                          163

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                          Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                          Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                          the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                          Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                          Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                          Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                          Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                          Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                          bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                          bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                          bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                          164

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                          Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                          FOR r shy

                                                          3

                                                          4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                          3

                                                          4 Hold

                                                          ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                          IiudeT

                                                          Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                          I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                          Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                          p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                          wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                          ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                          Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                          T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                          p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                          A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                          Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                          Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                          164 (conUnued)

                                                          -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                          ) VISUA CH CK

                                                          6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                          rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                          o ~Sati1h

                                                          s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                          Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                          bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                          171

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                          Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                          Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                          MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                          Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                          bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                          1 Toe(l __

                                                          - T 1at eI -

                                                          l

                                                          _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                          ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                          AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                          ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                          Continued on ne)( page

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                          Form PM 139

                                                          171 (continued)

                                                          ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                          Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                          5 AmeoQlITir

                                                          bull

                                                          M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                          181

                                                          and

                                                          no matter how

                                                          are trained

                                                          DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                          11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                          Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                          8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                          lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                          the response button each time one of these it is

                                                          the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                          where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                          be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                          ears with the ear and

                                                          the audiometer win

                                                          the mmr(

                                                          and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                          the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                          c~vman form

                                                          and Services in audiometric

                                                          health that attendance

                                                          Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                          recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                          ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                          such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                          it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                          If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                          after

                                                          500-8000 take no further

                                                          500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                          advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                          check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                          are

                                                          audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                          errIOIJVEeS are

                                                          take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                          IF

                                                          Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                          161 (conlinood)

                                                          should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                          ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                          civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                          retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                          The referral criteria are

                                                          a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                          is 15 dB or more at any

                                                          wax or if there is a or

                                                          thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                          The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                          191

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                          Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                          Three decibel rule

                                                          The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                          SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                          85 8 hours

                                                          88 4 hours

                                                          91 2 hours

                                                          94 1 hour

                                                          97 30 minutes

                                                          100 15 minutes

                                                          1101

                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                          Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                          Section 10 - Reference material

                                                          References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                          2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                          3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                          4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                          5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                          6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                          7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                          8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                          9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                          10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                          11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                          12 Safety signs

                                                          13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                          14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                          15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                          16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                          17 Noise awareness program

                                                          18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                          19 OHS skills development training

                                                          20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                          21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                          Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                          1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                          AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                          ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                          Related material

                                                          1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                          • Part 1
                                                          • Part 2
                                                          • Part 3
                                                          • Part 4
                                                          • PArt 5

                                                            Defence Occupational Health and SafelY Manual

                                                            38-6

                                                            34 Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in appendix 7

                                                            Compensation

                                                            35 Audiometric surveillance may identify hearing loss or other impairments which may be attributed to the working environment Program Managers are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entiUement to compensation The audiometric report will form part of the medical documentation in relation to compensation claims

                                                            Education

                                                            36 Education on NI i an important strategy for hearing conservation Program Managers are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dBA) or 140 dB(lin) Instruction on the effects of noise NI and prevention strategies prior 10 such exposure

                                                            37 Program Managers are to ensure that employees responsible for designing or purchasing equipment processes and facilities are aware of and receive this chapter on NI and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                            Operational areas

                                                            38 Units In operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms WOrkshops and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                            Documentation

                                                            39 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is 10 be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1922 Program Managers are to issue administrative details and report ing procedures for Form PM 139 and Civilian audiometric reports

                                                            Appendixes 1 Impulse Noise 2 Waming Sign-Amber Zone 3 Warning Sign-Red Zone 4 Warning Sign-Black Zone 5 Waming Sign- Extreme Noise Zone 6 Form PM 139-Hearing Conservation Report 7 Method for Audiometric Examination (for Australian Defence Force Personnel) 8 The 3 Decibel Rule

                                                            b

                                                            Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                                            1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                                            NOISE

                                                            1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                                            a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                                            shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                                            nor shall include refresher on

                                                            c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                                            d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                                            3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                                            APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                                            WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                                            ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                            EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                                            MUST BE WORN

                                                            EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                                            ANNEXBTO

                                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                            APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                                            METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                                            1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                                            a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                                            b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                            c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                                            d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                                            2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                                            3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                                            B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                                            b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                                            c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                                            (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                                            (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                                            (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                                            protection

                                                            (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                                            Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                            387-2

                                                            d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                            (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                            civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                            e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                            4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                            a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                            b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                            c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                            d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                            5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                            civilian document

                                                            Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                            APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                            3 U RULE

                                                            1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                            SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                            85 8 hours

                                                            a8 4 hours

                                                            91 2 hours

                                                            94 1 hour

                                                            97 30 minutes

                                                            100 15 minutes

                                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                            ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                            ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                            SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                            rtwIrlv

                                                            manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                            REFERENCES

                                                            1 Defence

                                                            MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                            2 Other

                                                            3 Cross Reference

                                                            4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                            Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                            AS

                                                            Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                            WELDING

                                                            SYNOPSIS

                                                            REFERENCES

                                                            1 Defence

                                                            W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                            2 Other

                                                            AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                            AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                            AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                            AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                            JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                            Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                            3 Cross Reference

                                                            1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                            5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                            7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                            ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                            FIRE SAFETY

                                                            SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                            REFERENCES

                                                            1 Defence

                                                            MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                            DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                            MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                            2 Other

                                                            AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                            AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                            AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                            AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                            AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                            AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                            AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                            AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                            3 Cross Reference

                                                            Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                            38-3

                                                            Administrative controls

                                                            17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                            Personal protective equipment

                                                            18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                            19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                            a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                            b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                            c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                            20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                            21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                            22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                            Noise assessments

                                                            23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                            24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                            a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                            b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                            c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                            d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                            Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                            11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                            THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                            SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                            environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                            REFERENCES

                                                            1 Defence

                                                            DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                            OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                            DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                            If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                            2 Other

                                                            and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                            3 Cross Reference

                                                            8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                            112

                                                            113

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                            CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                            NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                            Section 1 - Overview

                                                            Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                            Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                            Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                            Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                            Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                            Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                            bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                            bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                            bull increased health care and compensation

                                                            Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                            For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                            Continued on next page

                                                            mAinArlA he risks to

                                                            means

                                                            the

                                                            I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                            118

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                            Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                            117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                            Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                            Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                            Section Content

                                                            1 Overview

                                                            2 Specific responsibilities

                                                            3 Noise management principles

                                                            4 Impulse noise

                                                            5 Warning signs

                                                            6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                            7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                            8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                            9 The three decibel rule

                                                            10 Reference material

                                                            The fnllnwinn

                                                            124

                                                            125

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                            Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                            Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                            When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                            Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                            bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                            bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                            bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                            When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                            Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                            Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                            Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                            bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                            bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                            bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                            Training and skilling

                                                            Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                            The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                            course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                            Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                            and OHS skills

                                                            Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                            costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                            131

                                                            132

                                                            133

                                                            134

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                            Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                            Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                            Eng ineering controls

                                                            Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                            For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                            Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                            Administrative controls

                                                            Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                            Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                            Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                            The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                            bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                            bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                            bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                            Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                            Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                            Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                            135

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                            Noise assessments

                                                            Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                            Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                            bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                            bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                            bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                            bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                            Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                            Hearing protection areas

                                                            136

                                                            Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                            bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                            continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                            impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                            A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                            bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                            con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                            impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                            Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                            bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                            continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                            im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                            ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                            137

                                                            138

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                            Hearing protection areas

                                                            136 (continued)

                                                            A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                            bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                            continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                            impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                            A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                            The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                            Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                            The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                            The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                            Audiometric examinations

                                                            Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                            bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                            bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                            Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                            ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                            139

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                            Audiometric eXaminations

                                                            138 (conlhued)

                                                            bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                            bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                            bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                            bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                            bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                            Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                            Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                            Education

                                                            1310

                                                            Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                            Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                            Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                            1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                            Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                            1312

                                                            141

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                            Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                            Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                            This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                            bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                            bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                            bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                            bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                            151

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                            Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                            Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                            HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                            MUST BE W O R N

                                                            ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                            HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                            EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                            M UST BE W ORN

                                                            C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                            r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                            E AH MUFFS ]

                                                            M UST BE WOAN

                                                            HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                            l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                            MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                            ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                            161

                                                            162

                                                            163

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                            Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                            Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                            the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                            Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                            Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                            Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                            Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                            Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                            bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                            bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                            bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                            164

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                            Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                            FOR r shy

                                                            3

                                                            4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                            3

                                                            4 Hold

                                                            ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                            IiudeT

                                                            Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                            I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                            Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                            p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                            wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                            ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                            Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                            T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                            p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                            A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                            Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                            Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                            164 (conUnued)

                                                            -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                            ) VISUA CH CK

                                                            6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                            rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                            o ~Sati1h

                                                            s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                            Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                            bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                            171

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                            Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                            Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                            MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                            Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                            bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                            1 Toe(l __

                                                            - T 1at eI -

                                                            l

                                                            _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                            ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                            AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                            ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                            Continued on ne)( page

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                            Form PM 139

                                                            171 (continued)

                                                            ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                            Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                            5 AmeoQlITir

                                                            bull

                                                            M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                            181

                                                            and

                                                            no matter how

                                                            are trained

                                                            DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                            11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                            Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                            8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                            lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                            the response button each time one of these it is

                                                            the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                            where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                            be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                            ears with the ear and

                                                            the audiometer win

                                                            the mmr(

                                                            and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                            the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                            c~vman form

                                                            and Services in audiometric

                                                            health that attendance

                                                            Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                            recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                            ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                            such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                            it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                            If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                            after

                                                            500-8000 take no further

                                                            500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                            advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                            check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                            are

                                                            audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                            errIOIJVEeS are

                                                            take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                            IF

                                                            Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                            161 (conlinood)

                                                            should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                            ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                            civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                            retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                            The referral criteria are

                                                            a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                            is 15 dB or more at any

                                                            wax or if there is a or

                                                            thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                            The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                            191

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                            Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                            Three decibel rule

                                                            The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                            SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                            85 8 hours

                                                            88 4 hours

                                                            91 2 hours

                                                            94 1 hour

                                                            97 30 minutes

                                                            100 15 minutes

                                                            1101

                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                            Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                            Section 10 - Reference material

                                                            References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                            2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                            3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                            4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                            5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                            6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                            7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                            8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                            9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                            10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                            11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                            12 Safety signs

                                                            13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                            14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                            15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                            16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                            17 Noise awareness program

                                                            18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                            19 OHS skills development training

                                                            20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                            21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                            Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                            1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                            AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                            ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                            Related material

                                                            1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                            • Part 1
                                                            • Part 2
                                                            • Part 3
                                                            • Part 4
                                                            • PArt 5

                                                              b

                                                              Defence OccUiJational Manual

                                                              1 TO ANNEiXBTO CHAPTER J

                                                              NOISE

                                                              1 This nn~lnt contains noise The Utllnwmn gtrrnrtTIIlt are to to firearm

                                                              a As a component of all ilitiei shall be demonstrated to all nArnnrllgt1

                                                              shall receive rr1lgtrtnr causes of nltgtltgt consequences

                                                              nor shall include refresher on

                                                              c static range shall wear earmuffs Personnel wear rurnnri~Ihl reted ear lhose who cannot wear ear

                                                              d All lcltnnn tgtm lt within a rad~us of 25 metres of a mound shall wear in progess

                                                              3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                                              APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                                              WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                                              ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                              EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                                              MUST BE WORN

                                                              EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                                              ANNEXBTO

                                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                              APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                                              METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                                              1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                                              a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                                              b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                              c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                                              d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                                              2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                                              3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                                              B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                                              b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                                              c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                                              (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                                              (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                                              (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                                              protection

                                                              (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                                              Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                              387-2

                                                              d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                              (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                              civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                              e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                              4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                              a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                              b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                              c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                              d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                              5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                              civilian document

                                                              Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                              APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                              3 U RULE

                                                              1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                              SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                              85 8 hours

                                                              a8 4 hours

                                                              91 2 hours

                                                              94 1 hour

                                                              97 30 minutes

                                                              100 15 minutes

                                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                              ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                              ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                              SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                              rtwIrlv

                                                              manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                              REFERENCES

                                                              1 Defence

                                                              MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                              2 Other

                                                              3 Cross Reference

                                                              4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                              Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                              AS

                                                              Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                              WELDING

                                                              SYNOPSIS

                                                              REFERENCES

                                                              1 Defence

                                                              W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                              2 Other

                                                              AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                              AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                              AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                              AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                              JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                              Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                              3 Cross Reference

                                                              1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                              5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                              7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                              ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                              FIRE SAFETY

                                                              SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                              REFERENCES

                                                              1 Defence

                                                              MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                              DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                              MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                              2 Other

                                                              AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                              AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                              AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                              AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                              AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                              AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                              AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                              AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                              3 Cross Reference

                                                              Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                              38-3

                                                              Administrative controls

                                                              17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                              Personal protective equipment

                                                              18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                              19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                              a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                              b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                              c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                              20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                              21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                              22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                              Noise assessments

                                                              23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                              24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                              a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                              b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                              c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                              d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                              Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                              11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                              THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                              SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                              environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                              REFERENCES

                                                              1 Defence

                                                              DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                              OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                              DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                              If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                              2 Other

                                                              and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                              3 Cross Reference

                                                              8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                              112

                                                              113

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                              CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                              NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                              Section 1 - Overview

                                                              Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                              Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                              Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                              Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                              Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                              Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                              bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                              bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                              bull increased health care and compensation

                                                              Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                              For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                              Continued on next page

                                                              mAinArlA he risks to

                                                              means

                                                              the

                                                              I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                              118

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                              Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                              117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                              Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                              Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                              Section Content

                                                              1 Overview

                                                              2 Specific responsibilities

                                                              3 Noise management principles

                                                              4 Impulse noise

                                                              5 Warning signs

                                                              6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                              7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                              8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                              9 The three decibel rule

                                                              10 Reference material

                                                              The fnllnwinn

                                                              124

                                                              125

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                              Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                              Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                              When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                              Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                              bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                              bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                              bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                              When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                              Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                              Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                              Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                              bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                              bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                              bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                              Training and skilling

                                                              Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                              The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                              course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                              Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                              and OHS skills

                                                              Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                              costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                              131

                                                              132

                                                              133

                                                              134

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                              Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                              Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                              Eng ineering controls

                                                              Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                              For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                              Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                              Administrative controls

                                                              Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                              Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                              Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                              The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                              bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                              bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                              bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                              Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                              Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                              Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                              135

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                              Noise assessments

                                                              Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                              Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                              bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                              bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                              bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                              bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                              Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                              Hearing protection areas

                                                              136

                                                              Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                              bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                              continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                              impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                              A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                              bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                              con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                              impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                              Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                              bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                              continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                              im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                              ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                              137

                                                              138

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                              Hearing protection areas

                                                              136 (continued)

                                                              A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                              bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                              continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                              impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                              A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                              The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                              Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                              The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                              The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                              Audiometric examinations

                                                              Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                              bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                              bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                              Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                              ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                              139

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                              Audiometric eXaminations

                                                              138 (conlhued)

                                                              bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                              bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                              bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                              bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                              bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                              Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                              Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                              Education

                                                              1310

                                                              Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                              Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                              Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                              1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                              Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                              1312

                                                              141

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                              Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                              Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                              This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                              bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                              bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                              bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                              bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                              151

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                              Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                              Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                              HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                              MUST BE W O R N

                                                              ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                              HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                              EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                              M UST BE W ORN

                                                              C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                              r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                              E AH MUFFS ]

                                                              M UST BE WOAN

                                                              HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                              l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                              MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                              ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                              161

                                                              162

                                                              163

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                              Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                              Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                              the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                              Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                              Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                              Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                              Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                              Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                              bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                              bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                              bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                              164

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                              Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                              FOR r shy

                                                              3

                                                              4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                              3

                                                              4 Hold

                                                              ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                              IiudeT

                                                              Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                              I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                              Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                              p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                              wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                              ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                              Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                              T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                              p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                              A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                              Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                              Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                              164 (conUnued)

                                                              -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                              ) VISUA CH CK

                                                              6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                              rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                              o ~Sati1h

                                                              s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                              Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                              bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                              171

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                              Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                              Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                              MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                              Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                              bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                              1 Toe(l __

                                                              - T 1at eI -

                                                              l

                                                              _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                              ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                              AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                              ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                              Continued on ne)( page

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                              Form PM 139

                                                              171 (continued)

                                                              ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                              Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                              5 AmeoQlITir

                                                              bull

                                                              M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                              181

                                                              and

                                                              no matter how

                                                              are trained

                                                              DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                              11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                              Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                              8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                              lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                              the response button each time one of these it is

                                                              the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                              where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                              be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                              ears with the ear and

                                                              the audiometer win

                                                              the mmr(

                                                              and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                              the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                              c~vman form

                                                              and Services in audiometric

                                                              health that attendance

                                                              Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                              recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                              ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                              such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                              it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                              If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                              after

                                                              500-8000 take no further

                                                              500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                              advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                              check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                              are

                                                              audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                              errIOIJVEeS are

                                                              take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                              IF

                                                              Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                              161 (conlinood)

                                                              should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                              ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                              civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                              retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                              The referral criteria are

                                                              a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                              is 15 dB or more at any

                                                              wax or if there is a or

                                                              thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                              The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                              191

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                              Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                              Three decibel rule

                                                              The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                              SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                              85 8 hours

                                                              88 4 hours

                                                              91 2 hours

                                                              94 1 hour

                                                              97 30 minutes

                                                              100 15 minutes

                                                              1101

                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                              Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                              Section 10 - Reference material

                                                              References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                              2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                              3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                              4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                              5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                              6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                              7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                              8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                              9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                              10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                              11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                              12 Safety signs

                                                              13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                              14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                              15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                              16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                              17 Noise awareness program

                                                              18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                              19 OHS skills development training

                                                              20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                              21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                              Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                              1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                              AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                              ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                              Related material

                                                              1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                              • Part 1
                                                              • Part 2
                                                              • Part 3
                                                              • Part 4
                                                              • PArt 5

                                                                3TO ANNEX TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                                                APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                                                ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                                                MUST BE WORN

                                                                EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                                                ANNEXBTO

                                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                                                1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                                                a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                                                b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                                                d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                                                2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                                                3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                                                B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                                                b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                                                c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                                                (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                                                (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                                                (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                                                protection

                                                                (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                                                Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                                387-2

                                                                d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                                (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                                e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                                4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                                a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                                b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                                d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                                5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                                civilian document

                                                                Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                                APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                                3 U RULE

                                                                1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                                85 8 hours

                                                                a8 4 hours

                                                                91 2 hours

                                                                94 1 hour

                                                                97 30 minutes

                                                                100 15 minutes

                                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                                SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                                rtwIrlv

                                                                manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                                REFERENCES

                                                                1 Defence

                                                                MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                                2 Other

                                                                3 Cross Reference

                                                                4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                                Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                                AS

                                                                Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                                WELDING

                                                                SYNOPSIS

                                                                REFERENCES

                                                                1 Defence

                                                                W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                                2 Other

                                                                AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                                AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                                AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                                AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                                JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                                Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                                3 Cross Reference

                                                                1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                                5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                                7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                FIRE SAFETY

                                                                SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                                REFERENCES

                                                                1 Defence

                                                                MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                                DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                                MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                                2 Other

                                                                AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                                AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                                AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                                AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                                AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                                AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                                AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                                AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                                3 Cross Reference

                                                                Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                38-3

                                                                Administrative controls

                                                                17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                                Personal protective equipment

                                                                18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                                19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                                b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                                20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                                21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                                22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                                Noise assessments

                                                                23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                                d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                                11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                                SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                                environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                                REFERENCES

                                                                1 Defence

                                                                DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                                DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                                If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                                2 Other

                                                                and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                                3 Cross Reference

                                                                8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                112

                                                                113

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                                NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                                Section 1 - Overview

                                                                Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                                Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                                Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                                Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                                Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                                Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                                bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                                bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                                bull increased health care and compensation

                                                                Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                                For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                                Continued on next page

                                                                mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                means

                                                                the

                                                                I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                118

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                Section Content

                                                                1 Overview

                                                                2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                3 Noise management principles

                                                                4 Impulse noise

                                                                5 Warning signs

                                                                6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                9 The three decibel rule

                                                                10 Reference material

                                                                The fnllnwinn

                                                                124

                                                                125

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                Training and skilling

                                                                Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                and OHS skills

                                                                Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                131

                                                                132

                                                                133

                                                                134

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                Eng ineering controls

                                                                Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                Administrative controls

                                                                Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                135

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                Noise assessments

                                                                Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                Hearing protection areas

                                                                136

                                                                Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                137

                                                                138

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                Hearing protection areas

                                                                136 (continued)

                                                                A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                Audiometric examinations

                                                                Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                139

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                138 (conlhued)

                                                                bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                Education

                                                                1310

                                                                Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                1312

                                                                141

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                151

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                MUST BE W O R N

                                                                ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                M UST BE W ORN

                                                                C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                M UST BE WOAN

                                                                HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                161

                                                                162

                                                                163

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                164

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                FOR r shy

                                                                3

                                                                4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                3

                                                                4 Hold

                                                                ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                IiudeT

                                                                Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                164 (conUnued)

                                                                -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                o ~Sati1h

                                                                s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                171

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                1 Toe(l __

                                                                - T 1at eI -

                                                                l

                                                                _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                Continued on ne)( page

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                Form PM 139

                                                                171 (continued)

                                                                ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                bull

                                                                M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                181

                                                                and

                                                                no matter how

                                                                are trained

                                                                DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                ears with the ear and

                                                                the audiometer win

                                                                the mmr(

                                                                and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                c~vman form

                                                                and Services in audiometric

                                                                health that attendance

                                                                Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                after

                                                                500-8000 take no further

                                                                500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                are

                                                                audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                IF

                                                                Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                161 (conlinood)

                                                                should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                The referral criteria are

                                                                a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                wax or if there is a or

                                                                thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                191

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                Three decibel rule

                                                                The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                85 8 hours

                                                                88 4 hours

                                                                91 2 hours

                                                                94 1 hour

                                                                97 30 minutes

                                                                100 15 minutes

                                                                1101

                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                12 Safety signs

                                                                13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                17 Noise awareness program

                                                                18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                19 OHS skills development training

                                                                20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                Related material

                                                                1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                • Part 1
                                                                • Part 2
                                                                • Part 3
                                                                • Part 4
                                                                • PArt 5

                                                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safely Manual

                                                                  APPENDIX 5 TO ANNEX B TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                  WARNING SIGN-EXTREME NOISE ZONE

                                                                  ( HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                  EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS ~

                                                                  MUST BE WORN

                                                                  EXTREME ZONE APPLY TIME-LIMIT ON EXPOSURE

                                                                  ANNEXBTO

                                                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                  APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                  METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                                                  1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                                                  a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                                                  b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                  c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                                                  d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                                                  2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                                                  3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                                                  B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                                                  b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                                                  c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                                                  (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                                                  (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                                                  (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                                                  protection

                                                                  (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                                                  Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                                  387-2

                                                                  d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                                  (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                  civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                                  e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                                  4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                                  a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                                  b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                  c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                                  d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                                  5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                                  civilian document

                                                                  Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                                  APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                                  3 U RULE

                                                                  1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                  SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                                  85 8 hours

                                                                  a8 4 hours

                                                                  91 2 hours

                                                                  94 1 hour

                                                                  97 30 minutes

                                                                  100 15 minutes

                                                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                  ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                  ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                                  SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                                  rtwIrlv

                                                                  manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                                  REFERENCES

                                                                  1 Defence

                                                                  MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                                  2 Other

                                                                  3 Cross Reference

                                                                  4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                                  Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                                  AS

                                                                  Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                                  WELDING

                                                                  SYNOPSIS

                                                                  REFERENCES

                                                                  1 Defence

                                                                  W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                                  2 Other

                                                                  AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                                  AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                                  AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                                  AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                                  JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                                  Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                                  3 Cross Reference

                                                                  1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                                  5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                                  7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                  ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                  FIRE SAFETY

                                                                  SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                                  REFERENCES

                                                                  1 Defence

                                                                  MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                                  DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                                  MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                                  2 Other

                                                                  AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                                  AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                                  AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                                  AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                                  AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                                  AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                                  AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                                  AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                                  3 Cross Reference

                                                                  Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                  38-3

                                                                  Administrative controls

                                                                  17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                                  Personal protective equipment

                                                                  18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                                  19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                  a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                                  b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                  c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                                  20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                                  21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                                  22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                                  Noise assessments

                                                                  23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                  24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                  a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                  b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                  c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                                  d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                  Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                                  11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                  THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                                  SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                                  environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                                  REFERENCES

                                                                  1 Defence

                                                                  DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                  OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                                  DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                                  If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                                  2 Other

                                                                  and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                                  3 Cross Reference

                                                                  8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                  112

                                                                  113

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                  CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                                  NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                                  Section 1 - Overview

                                                                  Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                                  Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                                  Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                                  Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                                  Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                                  Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                                  bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                                  bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                                  bull increased health care and compensation

                                                                  Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                                  For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                                  Continued on next page

                                                                  mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                  means

                                                                  the

                                                                  I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                  118

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                  Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                  117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                  Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                  Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                  Section Content

                                                                  1 Overview

                                                                  2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                  3 Noise management principles

                                                                  4 Impulse noise

                                                                  5 Warning signs

                                                                  6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                  7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                  8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                  9 The three decibel rule

                                                                  10 Reference material

                                                                  The fnllnwinn

                                                                  124

                                                                  125

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                  Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                  Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                  When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                  Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                  bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                  bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                  bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                  When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                  Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                  Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                  Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                  bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                  bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                  bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                  Training and skilling

                                                                  Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                  The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                  course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                  Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                  and OHS skills

                                                                  Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                  costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                  131

                                                                  132

                                                                  133

                                                                  134

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                  Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                  Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                  Eng ineering controls

                                                                  Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                  For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                  Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                  Administrative controls

                                                                  Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                  Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                  Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                  The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                  bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                  bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                  bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                  Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                  Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                  Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                  135

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                  Noise assessments

                                                                  Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                  Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                  bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                  bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                  bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                  bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                  Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                  Hearing protection areas

                                                                  136

                                                                  Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                  bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                  continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                  impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                  A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                  bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                  con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                  impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                  Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                  bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                  continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                  im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                  ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                  137

                                                                  138

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                  Hearing protection areas

                                                                  136 (continued)

                                                                  A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                  bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                  continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                  impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                  A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                  The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                  Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                  The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                  The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                  Audiometric examinations

                                                                  Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                  bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                  bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                  Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                  ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                  139

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                  Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                  138 (conlhued)

                                                                  bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                  bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                  bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                  bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                  bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                  Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                  Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                  Education

                                                                  1310

                                                                  Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                  Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                  Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                  1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                  Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                  1312

                                                                  141

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                  Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                  Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                  This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                  bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                  bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                  bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                  bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                  151

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                  Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                  Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                  HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                  MUST BE W O R N

                                                                  ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                  HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                  EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                  M UST BE W ORN

                                                                  C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                  r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                  E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                  M UST BE WOAN

                                                                  HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                  l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                  MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                  ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                  161

                                                                  162

                                                                  163

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                  Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                  Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                  the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                  Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                  Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                  Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                  Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                  Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                  bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                  bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                  bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                  164

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                  Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                  FOR r shy

                                                                  3

                                                                  4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                  3

                                                                  4 Hold

                                                                  ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                  IiudeT

                                                                  Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                  I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                  Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                  p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                  wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                  ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                  Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                  T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                  p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                  A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                  Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                  Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                  164 (conUnued)

                                                                  -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                  ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                  6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                  rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                  o ~Sati1h

                                                                  s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                  Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                  bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                  171

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                  Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                  Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                  MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                  Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                  bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                  1 Toe(l __

                                                                  - T 1at eI -

                                                                  l

                                                                  _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                  ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                  AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                  ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                  Continued on ne)( page

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                  Form PM 139

                                                                  171 (continued)

                                                                  ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                  Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                  5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                  bull

                                                                  M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                  181

                                                                  and

                                                                  no matter how

                                                                  are trained

                                                                  DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                  11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                  Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                  8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                  lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                  the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                  the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                  where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                  be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                  ears with the ear and

                                                                  the audiometer win

                                                                  the mmr(

                                                                  and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                  the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                  c~vman form

                                                                  and Services in audiometric

                                                                  health that attendance

                                                                  Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                  recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                  ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                  such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                  it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                  If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                  after

                                                                  500-8000 take no further

                                                                  500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                  advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                  check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                  are

                                                                  audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                  errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                  take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                  IF

                                                                  Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                  161 (conlinood)

                                                                  should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                  ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                  civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                  retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                  The referral criteria are

                                                                  a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                  is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                  wax or if there is a or

                                                                  thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                  The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                  191

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                  Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                  Three decibel rule

                                                                  The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                  SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                  85 8 hours

                                                                  88 4 hours

                                                                  91 2 hours

                                                                  94 1 hour

                                                                  97 30 minutes

                                                                  100 15 minutes

                                                                  1101

                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                  Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                  Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                  References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                  2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                  3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                  4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                  5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                  6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                  7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                  8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                  9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                  10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                  11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                  12 Safety signs

                                                                  13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                  14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                  15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                  16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                  17 Noise awareness program

                                                                  18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                  19 OHS skills development training

                                                                  20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                  21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                  Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                  1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                  AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                  ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                  Related material

                                                                  1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                  • Part 1
                                                                  • Part 2
                                                                  • Part 3
                                                                  • Part 4
                                                                  • PArt 5

                                                                    ANNEXBTO

                                                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                    APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                    METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                                                    1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                                                    a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                                                    b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                    c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                                                    d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                                                    2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                                                    3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                                                    B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                                                    b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                                                    c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                                                    (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                                                    (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                                                    (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                                                    protection

                                                                    (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                                                    Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                                    387-2

                                                                    d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                                    (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                    civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                                    e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                                    4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                                    a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                                    b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                    c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                                    d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                                    5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                                    civilian document

                                                                    Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                                    APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                                    3 U RULE

                                                                    1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                    SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                                    85 8 hours

                                                                    a8 4 hours

                                                                    91 2 hours

                                                                    94 1 hour

                                                                    97 30 minutes

                                                                    100 15 minutes

                                                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                    ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                    ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                                    SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                                    rtwIrlv

                                                                    manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                                    REFERENCES

                                                                    1 Defence

                                                                    MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                                    2 Other

                                                                    3 Cross Reference

                                                                    4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                                    Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                                    AS

                                                                    Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                                    WELDING

                                                                    SYNOPSIS

                                                                    REFERENCES

                                                                    1 Defence

                                                                    W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                                    2 Other

                                                                    AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                                    AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                                    AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                                    AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                                    JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                                    Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                                    3 Cross Reference

                                                                    1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                                    5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                                    7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                    ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                    FIRE SAFETY

                                                                    SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                                    REFERENCES

                                                                    1 Defence

                                                                    MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                                    DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                                    MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                                    2 Other

                                                                    AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                                    AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                                    AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                                    AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                                    AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                                    AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                                    AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                                    AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                                    3 Cross Reference

                                                                    Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                                    Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                    38-3

                                                                    Administrative controls

                                                                    17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                                    Personal protective equipment

                                                                    18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                                    19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                    a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                                    b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                    c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                                    20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                                    21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                                    22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                                    Noise assessments

                                                                    23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                    24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                    a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                    b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                    c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                                    d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                    Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                                    11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                    THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                                    SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                                    environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                                    REFERENCES

                                                                    1 Defence

                                                                    DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                    OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                                    DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                                    If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                                    2 Other

                                                                    and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                                    3 Cross Reference

                                                                    8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                    112

                                                                    113

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                    CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                                    NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                                    Section 1 - Overview

                                                                    Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                                    Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                                    Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                                    Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                                    Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                                    Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                                    bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                                    bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                                    bull increased health care and compensation

                                                                    Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                                    For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                                    Continued on next page

                                                                    mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                    means

                                                                    the

                                                                    I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                    118

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                    Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                    117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                    Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                    Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                    Section Content

                                                                    1 Overview

                                                                    2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                    3 Noise management principles

                                                                    4 Impulse noise

                                                                    5 Warning signs

                                                                    6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                    7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                    8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                    9 The three decibel rule

                                                                    10 Reference material

                                                                    The fnllnwinn

                                                                    124

                                                                    125

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                    Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                    Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                    When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                    Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                    bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                    bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                    bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                    When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                    Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                    Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                    Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                    bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                    bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                    bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                    Training and skilling

                                                                    Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                    The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                    course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                    Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                    and OHS skills

                                                                    Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                    costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                    131

                                                                    132

                                                                    133

                                                                    134

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                    Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                    Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                    Eng ineering controls

                                                                    Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                    For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                    Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                    Administrative controls

                                                                    Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                    Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                    Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                    The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                    bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                    bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                    bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                    Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                    Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                    Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                    135

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                    Noise assessments

                                                                    Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                    Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                    bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                    bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                    bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                    bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                    Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                    Hearing protection areas

                                                                    136

                                                                    Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                    bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                    continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                    impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                    A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                    bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                    con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                    impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                    Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                    bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                    continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                    im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                    ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                    137

                                                                    138

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                    Hearing protection areas

                                                                    136 (continued)

                                                                    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                    bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                    continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                    impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                    The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                    Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                    The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                    The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                    Audiometric examinations

                                                                    Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                    bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                    bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                    Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                    ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                    139

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                    Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                    138 (conlhued)

                                                                    bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                    bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                    bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                    bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                    bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                    Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                    Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                    Education

                                                                    1310

                                                                    Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                    Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                    Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                    1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                    Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                    1312

                                                                    141

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                    Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                    Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                    This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                    bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                    bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                    bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                    bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                    151

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                    Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                    Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                    HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                    MUST BE W O R N

                                                                    ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                    EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                    M UST BE W ORN

                                                                    C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                    r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                    E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                    M UST BE WOAN

                                                                    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                    l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                    MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                    ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                    161

                                                                    162

                                                                    163

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                    Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                    Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                    the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                    Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                    Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                    Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                    Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                    Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                    bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                    bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                    bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                    164

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                    Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                    FOR r shy

                                                                    3

                                                                    4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                    3

                                                                    4 Hold

                                                                    ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                    IiudeT

                                                                    Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                    I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                    Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                    p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                    wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                    ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                    Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                    T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                    p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                    A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                    Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                    Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                    164 (conUnued)

                                                                    -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                    ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                    6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                    rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                    o ~Sati1h

                                                                    s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                    Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                    bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                    171

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                    Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                    Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                    MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                    Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                    bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                    1 Toe(l __

                                                                    - T 1at eI -

                                                                    l

                                                                    _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                    ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                    AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                    ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                    Continued on ne)( page

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                    Form PM 139

                                                                    171 (continued)

                                                                    ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                    Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                    5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                    bull

                                                                    M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                    181

                                                                    and

                                                                    no matter how

                                                                    are trained

                                                                    DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                    11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                    Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                    8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                    lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                    the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                    the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                    where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                    be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                    ears with the ear and

                                                                    the audiometer win

                                                                    the mmr(

                                                                    and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                    the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                    c~vman form

                                                                    and Services in audiometric

                                                                    health that attendance

                                                                    Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                    recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                    ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                    such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                    it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                    If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                    after

                                                                    500-8000 take no further

                                                                    500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                    advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                    check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                    are

                                                                    audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                    errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                    take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                    IF

                                                                    Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                    161 (conlinood)

                                                                    should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                    ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                    civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                    retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                    The referral criteria are

                                                                    a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                    is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                    wax or if there is a or

                                                                    thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                    The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                    191

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                    Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                    Three decibel rule

                                                                    The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                    SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                    85 8 hours

                                                                    88 4 hours

                                                                    91 2 hours

                                                                    94 1 hour

                                                                    97 30 minutes

                                                                    100 15 minutes

                                                                    1101

                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                    Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                    Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                    References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                    2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                    3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                    4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                    5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                    6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                    7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                    8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                    9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                    10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                    11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                    12 Safety signs

                                                                    13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                    14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                    15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                    16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                    17 Noise awareness program

                                                                    18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                    19 OHS skills development training

                                                                    20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                    21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                    Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                    1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                    AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                    ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                    Related material

                                                                    1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                    • Part 1
                                                                    • Part 2
                                                                    • Part 3
                                                                    • Part 4
                                                                    • PArt 5

                                                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                      APPENDIX 7 TO ANNEX 8 TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                      METHOD FOR A UDIOMETRIC EXAMINATION (FOR AUSTRALIAN DEFENCE FORCE PERSONNEL)

                                                                      1 Wherever possible audiograms are to be performed in automatic mode Where an audiometer does not have an automatic function the audiogram is to be performed manually Manual testing is to follow the method detailed in AS 1269-1989 and in addition 8000 Hz is to be tested Automatic testing is to be performed on all frequencies 500 Hz to 8000 Hz The testing proced ure is as (ollows

                                                                      a Inform the employees being tested that they are going to hear a series of sounds through the earphones and instruct them to listen carefully and signal by pressing and releasing the response button each time they hear one of these sounds no matter how faInt it is

                                                                      b The earphones are placed firmly over the ears with the red phone over the right ear and blue phone over the left The earphones should be level with the entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                      c Where one ear is known to be significantly beller than Ihe other the test is commenced with the better ear If there is no significant difference between the ears begin wilh the right ear

                                                                      d The audiometer will perform the test automatica lly and the manufacturers instructions must be fo llowed All frequencies from 500 to 8000 Hz are to be tested and recorded on the members Form PM 139--Hearing Conservation Report or equivalent civilian form

                                                                      2 The respective Programs are to ensure that personnel conducting procedures are trained in audiometric testing Each employee attending for an audiometric assessment is to take their HPD fo r examination by appropriately trained health personnel during that attendance

                                                                      3 The respective Director-Generals of Health Services are to ensure that when employees are found to have a Significant threshold shift compared to their most recent reference audiogram standard review procedures and actions are undertaken as defined by Program Managers Recommended procedures are as follows

                                                                      B Ensure that no transient condition exists that could account for the hearing loss such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condition exists defer action and retest as soon as possible after remission of the symptoms

                                                                      b If no condition exists repeat the audiogram within 24 hours or as soon as possible thereafter after 16 hours in quiet conditions Average the results from the two alJdiograms If the average loss from the re ference audiogram is 15 dB or less in all frequencies 500-8000 Hz take no further action

                                                                      c Should there be at any frequency 500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or greater from lhe reference audiogram

                                                                      (1) advise the employee of the test results

                                                                      (2) check the employees nOise exposure history since the last aUdiogram was performed

                                                                      (3) check the suitability and condition of the employees hearing eqUipment the technique of fi tting and frequency of use and

                                                                      protection

                                                                      (4) take appropriate corrective action eg reissue of PPE relocation 10 a quiet work area

                                                                      Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                                      387-2

                                                                      d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                                      (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                      civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                                      e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                                      4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                                      a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                                      b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                      c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                                      d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                                      5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                                      civilian document

                                                                      Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                                      APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                                      3 U RULE

                                                                      1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                      SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                                      85 8 hours

                                                                      a8 4 hours

                                                                      91 2 hours

                                                                      94 1 hour

                                                                      97 30 minutes

                                                                      100 15 minutes

                                                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                      ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                      ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                                      SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                                      rtwIrlv

                                                                      manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                                      REFERENCES

                                                                      1 Defence

                                                                      MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                                      2 Other

                                                                      3 Cross Reference

                                                                      4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                                      Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                                      AS

                                                                      Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                                      WELDING

                                                                      SYNOPSIS

                                                                      REFERENCES

                                                                      1 Defence

                                                                      W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                                      2 Other

                                                                      AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                                      AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                                      AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                                      AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                                      JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                                      Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                                      3 Cross Reference

                                                                      1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                                      5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                                      7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                      ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                      FIRE SAFETY

                                                                      SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                                      REFERENCES

                                                                      1 Defence

                                                                      MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                                      DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                                      MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                                      2 Other

                                                                      AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                                      AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                                      AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                                      AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                                      AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                                      AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                                      AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                                      AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                                      3 Cross Reference

                                                                      Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                                      Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                      38-3

                                                                      Administrative controls

                                                                      17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                                      Personal protective equipment

                                                                      18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                                      19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                      a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                                      b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                      c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                                      20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                                      21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                                      22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                                      Noise assessments

                                                                      23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                      24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                      a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                      b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                      c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                                      d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                      Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                                      11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                      THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                                      SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                                      environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                                      REFERENCES

                                                                      1 Defence

                                                                      DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                      OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                                      DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                                      If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                                      2 Other

                                                                      and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                                      3 Cross Reference

                                                                      8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                      112

                                                                      113

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                      CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                                      NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                                      Section 1 - Overview

                                                                      Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                                      Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                                      Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                                      Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                                      Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                                      Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                                      bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                                      bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                                      bull increased health care and compensation

                                                                      Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                                      For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                                      Continued on next page

                                                                      mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                      means

                                                                      the

                                                                      I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                      118

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                      Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                      117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                      Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                      Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                      Section Content

                                                                      1 Overview

                                                                      2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                      3 Noise management principles

                                                                      4 Impulse noise

                                                                      5 Warning signs

                                                                      6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                      7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                      8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                      9 The three decibel rule

                                                                      10 Reference material

                                                                      The fnllnwinn

                                                                      124

                                                                      125

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                      Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                      Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                      When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                      Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                      bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                      bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                      bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                      When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                      Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                      Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                      Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                      bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                      bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                      bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                      Training and skilling

                                                                      Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                      The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                      course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                      Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                      and OHS skills

                                                                      Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                      costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                      131

                                                                      132

                                                                      133

                                                                      134

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                      Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                      Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                      Eng ineering controls

                                                                      Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                      For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                      Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                      Administrative controls

                                                                      Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                      Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                      Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                      The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                      bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                      bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                      bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                      Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                      Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                      Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                      135

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                      Noise assessments

                                                                      Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                      Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                      bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                      bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                      bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                      bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                      Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                      Hearing protection areas

                                                                      136

                                                                      Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                      bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                      continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                      impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                      A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                      bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                      con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                      impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                      Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                      bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                      continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                      im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                      ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                      137

                                                                      138

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                      Hearing protection areas

                                                                      136 (continued)

                                                                      A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                      bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                      continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                      impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                      A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                      The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                      Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                      The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                      The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                      Audiometric examinations

                                                                      Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                      bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                      bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                      Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                      ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                      139

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                      Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                      138 (conlhued)

                                                                      bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                      bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                      bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                      bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                      bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                      Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                      Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                      Education

                                                                      1310

                                                                      Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                      Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                      Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                      1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                      Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                      1312

                                                                      141

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                      Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                      Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                      This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                      bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                      bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                      bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                      bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                      151

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                      Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                      Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                      HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                      MUST BE W O R N

                                                                      ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                      EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                      M UST BE W ORN

                                                                      C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                      r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                      E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                      M UST BE WOAN

                                                                      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                      l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                      MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                      ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                      161

                                                                      162

                                                                      163

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                      Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                      Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                      the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                      Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                      Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                      Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                      Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                      Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                      bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                      bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                      bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                      164

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                      Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                      FOR r shy

                                                                      3

                                                                      4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                      3

                                                                      4 Hold

                                                                      ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                      IiudeT

                                                                      Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                      I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                      Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                      p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                      wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                      ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                      Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                      T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                      p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                      A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                      Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                      Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                      164 (conUnued)

                                                                      -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                      ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                      6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                      rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                      o ~Sati1h

                                                                      s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                      Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                      bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                      171

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                      Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                      Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                      MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                      Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                      bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                      1 Toe(l __

                                                                      - T 1at eI -

                                                                      l

                                                                      _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                      ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                      AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                      ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                      Continued on ne)( page

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                      Form PM 139

                                                                      171 (continued)

                                                                      ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                      Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                      5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                      bull

                                                                      M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                      181

                                                                      and

                                                                      no matter how

                                                                      are trained

                                                                      DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                      11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                      Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                      8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                      lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                      the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                      the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                      where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                      be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                      ears with the ear and

                                                                      the audiometer win

                                                                      the mmr(

                                                                      and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                      the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                      c~vman form

                                                                      and Services in audiometric

                                                                      health that attendance

                                                                      Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                      recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                      ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                      such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                      it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                      If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                      after

                                                                      500-8000 take no further

                                                                      500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                      advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                      check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                      are

                                                                      audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                      errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                      take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                      IF

                                                                      Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                      161 (conlinood)

                                                                      should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                      ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                      civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                      retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                      The referral criteria are

                                                                      a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                      is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                      wax or if there is a or

                                                                      thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                      The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                      191

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                      Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                      Three decibel rule

                                                                      The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                      SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                      85 8 hours

                                                                      88 4 hours

                                                                      91 2 hours

                                                                      94 1 hour

                                                                      97 30 minutes

                                                                      100 15 minutes

                                                                      1101

                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                      Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                      Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                      References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                      2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                      3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                      4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                      5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                      6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                      7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                      8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                      9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                      10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                      11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                      12 Safety signs

                                                                      13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                      14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                      15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                      16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                      17 Noise awareness program

                                                                      18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                      19 OHS skills development training

                                                                      20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                      21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                      Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                      1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                      AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                      ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                      Related material

                                                                      1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                      • Part 1
                                                                      • Part 2
                                                                      • Part 3
                                                                      • Part 4
                                                                      • PArt 5

                                                                        Defence UCCUI)aIO1al Manual

                                                                        387-2

                                                                        d Should any of the medical referral detailed in gtIgt1h 4 be met

                                                                        (1 ) ADF are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                        civHian errml()lIles are to be referred 10 an for review and advice

                                                                        e Relest the Flr1r in six months

                                                                        4 Tile referral crlleria are

                                                                        a a innjfi~t threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any ltiLl 500-8000 Hz

                                                                        b loss difference between both ears is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                        c mrn from an ear occlusion of the ear canal wax or if Ihere is a or

                                                                        d other reason that tre tester considers - for medical olticelJalidi()~JjSI

                                                                        5 The results of the aUljlolJraim will be included on the medical form and termination be annotated on Form PM 139 or an

                                                                        civilian document

                                                                        Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                                        APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                                        3 U RULE

                                                                        1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                        SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                                        85 8 hours

                                                                        a8 4 hours

                                                                        91 2 hours

                                                                        94 1 hour

                                                                        97 30 minutes

                                                                        100 15 minutes

                                                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                        ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                        ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                                        SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                                        rtwIrlv

                                                                        manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                                        REFERENCES

                                                                        1 Defence

                                                                        MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                                        2 Other

                                                                        3 Cross Reference

                                                                        4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                                        Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                                        AS

                                                                        Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                                        WELDING

                                                                        SYNOPSIS

                                                                        REFERENCES

                                                                        1 Defence

                                                                        W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                                        2 Other

                                                                        AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                                        AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                                        AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                                        AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                                        JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                                        Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                                        3 Cross Reference

                                                                        1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                                        5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                                        7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                        ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                        FIRE SAFETY

                                                                        SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                                        REFERENCES

                                                                        1 Defence

                                                                        MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                                        DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                                        MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                                        2 Other

                                                                        AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                                        AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                                        AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                                        AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                                        AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                                        AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                                        AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                                        AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                                        3 Cross Reference

                                                                        Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                                        Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                        38-3

                                                                        Administrative controls

                                                                        17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                                        Personal protective equipment

                                                                        18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                                        19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                        a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                                        b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                        c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                                        20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                                        21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                                        22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                                        Noise assessments

                                                                        23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                        24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                        a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                        b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                        c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                                        d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                        Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                                        11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                        THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                                        SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                                        environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                                        REFERENCES

                                                                        1 Defence

                                                                        DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                        OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                                        DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                                        If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                                        2 Other

                                                                        and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                                        3 Cross Reference

                                                                        8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                        112

                                                                        113

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                        CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                                        NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                                        Section 1 - Overview

                                                                        Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                                        Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                                        Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                                        Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                                        Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                                        Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                                        bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                                        bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                                        bull increased health care and compensation

                                                                        Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                                        For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                                        Continued on next page

                                                                        mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                        means

                                                                        the

                                                                        I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                        118

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                        Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                        117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                        Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                        Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                        Section Content

                                                                        1 Overview

                                                                        2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                        3 Noise management principles

                                                                        4 Impulse noise

                                                                        5 Warning signs

                                                                        6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                        7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                        8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                        9 The three decibel rule

                                                                        10 Reference material

                                                                        The fnllnwinn

                                                                        124

                                                                        125

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                        Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                        Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                        When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                        Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                        bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                        bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                        bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                        When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                        Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                        Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                        Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                        bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                        bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                        bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                        Training and skilling

                                                                        Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                        The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                        course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                        Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                        and OHS skills

                                                                        Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                        costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                        131

                                                                        132

                                                                        133

                                                                        134

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                        Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                        Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                        Eng ineering controls

                                                                        Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                        For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                        Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                        Administrative controls

                                                                        Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                        Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                        Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                        The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                        bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                        bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                        bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                        Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                        Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                        Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                        135

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                        Noise assessments

                                                                        Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                        Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                        bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                        bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                        bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                        bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                        Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                        Hearing protection areas

                                                                        136

                                                                        Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                        bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                        continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                        impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                        A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                        bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                        con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                        impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                        Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                        bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                        continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                        im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                        ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                        137

                                                                        138

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                        Hearing protection areas

                                                                        136 (continued)

                                                                        A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                        bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                        continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                        impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                        A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                        The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                        Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                        The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                        The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                        Audiometric examinations

                                                                        Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                        bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                        bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                        Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                        ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                        139

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                        Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                        138 (conlhued)

                                                                        bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                        bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                        bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                        bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                        bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                        Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                        Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                        Education

                                                                        1310

                                                                        Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                        Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                        Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                        1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                        Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                        1312

                                                                        141

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                        Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                        Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                        This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                        bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                        bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                        bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                        bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                        151

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                        Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                        Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                        HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                        MUST BE W O R N

                                                                        ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                        EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                        M UST BE W ORN

                                                                        C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                        r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                        E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                        M UST BE WOAN

                                                                        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                        l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                        MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                        ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                        161

                                                                        162

                                                                        163

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                        Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                        Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                        the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                        Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                        Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                        Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                        Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                        Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                        bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                        bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                        bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                        164

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                        Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                        FOR r shy

                                                                        3

                                                                        4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                        3

                                                                        4 Hold

                                                                        ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                        IiudeT

                                                                        Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                        I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                        Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                        p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                        wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                        ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                        Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                        T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                        p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                        A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                        Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                        Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                        164 (conUnued)

                                                                        -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                        ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                        6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                        rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                        o ~Sati1h

                                                                        s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                        Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                        bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                        171

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                        Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                        Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                        MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                        Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                        bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                        1 Toe(l __

                                                                        - T 1at eI -

                                                                        l

                                                                        _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                        ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                        AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                        ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                        Continued on ne)( page

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                        Form PM 139

                                                                        171 (continued)

                                                                        ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                        Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                        5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                        bull

                                                                        M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                        181

                                                                        and

                                                                        no matter how

                                                                        are trained

                                                                        DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                        11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                        Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                        8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                        lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                        the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                        the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                        where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                        be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                        ears with the ear and

                                                                        the audiometer win

                                                                        the mmr(

                                                                        and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                        the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                        c~vman form

                                                                        and Services in audiometric

                                                                        health that attendance

                                                                        Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                        recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                        ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                        such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                        it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                        If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                        after

                                                                        500-8000 take no further

                                                                        500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                        advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                        check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                        are

                                                                        audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                        errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                        take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                        IF

                                                                        Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                        161 (conlinood)

                                                                        should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                        ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                        civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                        retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                        The referral criteria are

                                                                        a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                        is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                        wax or if there is a or

                                                                        thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                        The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                        191

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                        Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                        Three decibel rule

                                                                        The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                        SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                        85 8 hours

                                                                        88 4 hours

                                                                        91 2 hours

                                                                        94 1 hour

                                                                        97 30 minutes

                                                                        100 15 minutes

                                                                        1101

                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                        Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                        Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                        References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                        2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                        3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                        4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                        5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                        6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                        7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                        8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                        9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                        10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                        11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                        12 Safety signs

                                                                        13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                        14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                        15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                        16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                        17 Noise awareness program

                                                                        18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                        19 OHS skills development training

                                                                        20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                        21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                        Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                        1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                        AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                        ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                        Related material

                                                                        1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                        • Part 1
                                                                        • Part 2
                                                                        • Part 3
                                                                        • Part 4
                                                                        • PArt 5

                                                                          Defence OCl~lIpationaf Health and Manual

                                                                          APPENDIX 8 TO ANNEXBTO CHAPTER 3

                                                                          3 U RULE

                                                                          1 The 3 dB rule a for the length of time to slate noise hazards a normal recovery below 75 dB essence for every 3 increase in the sound level the ~ime is halved This means Ihat a 3 increase is a of the sound The below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                          SPL (dB(A)) of

                                                                          85 8 hours

                                                                          a8 4 hours

                                                                          91 2 hours

                                                                          94 1 hour

                                                                          97 30 minutes

                                                                          100 15 minutes

                                                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                          ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                          ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                                          SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                                          rtwIrlv

                                                                          manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                                          REFERENCES

                                                                          1 Defence

                                                                          MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                                          2 Other

                                                                          3 Cross Reference

                                                                          4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                                          Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                                          AS

                                                                          Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                                          WELDING

                                                                          SYNOPSIS

                                                                          REFERENCES

                                                                          1 Defence

                                                                          W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                                          2 Other

                                                                          AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                                          AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                                          AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                                          AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                                          JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                                          Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                                          3 Cross Reference

                                                                          1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                                          5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                                          7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                          ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                          FIRE SAFETY

                                                                          SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                                          REFERENCES

                                                                          1 Defence

                                                                          MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                                          DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                                          MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                                          2 Other

                                                                          AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                                          AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                                          AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                                          AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                                          AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                                          AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                                          AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                                          AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                                          3 Cross Reference

                                                                          Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                                          Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                          38-3

                                                                          Administrative controls

                                                                          17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                                          Personal protective equipment

                                                                          18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                                          19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                          a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                                          b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                          c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                                          20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                                          21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                                          22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                                          Noise assessments

                                                                          23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                          24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                          a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                          b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                          c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                                          d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                          Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                                          11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                          THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                                          SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                                          environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                                          REFERENCES

                                                                          1 Defence

                                                                          DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                          OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                                          DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                                          If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                                          2 Other

                                                                          and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                                          3 Cross Reference

                                                                          8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                          112

                                                                          113

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                          CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                                          NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                                          Section 1 - Overview

                                                                          Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                                          Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                                          Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                                          Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                                          Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                                          Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                                          bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                                          bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                                          bull increased health care and compensation

                                                                          Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                                          For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                                          Continued on next page

                                                                          mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                          means

                                                                          the

                                                                          I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                          118

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                          Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                          117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                          Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                          Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                          Section Content

                                                                          1 Overview

                                                                          2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                          3 Noise management principles

                                                                          4 Impulse noise

                                                                          5 Warning signs

                                                                          6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                          7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                          8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                          9 The three decibel rule

                                                                          10 Reference material

                                                                          The fnllnwinn

                                                                          124

                                                                          125

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                          Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                          Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                          When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                          Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                          bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                          bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                          bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                          When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                          Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                          Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                          Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                          bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                          bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                          bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                          Training and skilling

                                                                          Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                          The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                          course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                          Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                          and OHS skills

                                                                          Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                          costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                          131

                                                                          132

                                                                          133

                                                                          134

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                          Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                          Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                          Eng ineering controls

                                                                          Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                          For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                          Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                          Administrative controls

                                                                          Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                          Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                          Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                          The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                          bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                          bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                          bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                          Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                          Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                          Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                          135

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                          Noise assessments

                                                                          Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                          Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                          bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                          bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                          bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                          bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                          Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                          Hearing protection areas

                                                                          136

                                                                          Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                          bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                          continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                          impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                          A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                          bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                          con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                          impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                          Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                          bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                          continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                          im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                          ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                          137

                                                                          138

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                          Hearing protection areas

                                                                          136 (continued)

                                                                          A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                          bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                          continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                          impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                          A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                          The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                          Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                          The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                          The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                          Audiometric examinations

                                                                          Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                          bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                          bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                          Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                          ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                          139

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                          Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                          138 (conlhued)

                                                                          bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                          bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                          bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                          bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                          bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                          Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                          Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                          Education

                                                                          1310

                                                                          Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                          Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                          Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                          1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                          Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                          1312

                                                                          141

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                          Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                          Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                          This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                          bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                          bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                          bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                          bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                          151

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                          Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                          Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                          HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                          MUST BE W O R N

                                                                          ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                          EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                          M UST BE W ORN

                                                                          C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                          r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                          E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                          M UST BE WOAN

                                                                          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                          l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                          MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                          ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                          161

                                                                          162

                                                                          163

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                          Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                          Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                          the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                          Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                          Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                          Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                          Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                          Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                          bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                          bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                          bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                          164

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                          Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                          FOR r shy

                                                                          3

                                                                          4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                          3

                                                                          4 Hold

                                                                          ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                          IiudeT

                                                                          Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                          I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                          Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                          p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                          wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                          ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                          Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                          T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                          p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                          A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                          Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                          Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                          164 (conUnued)

                                                                          -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                          ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                          6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                          rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                          o ~Sati1h

                                                                          s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                          Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                          bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                          171

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                          Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                          Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                          MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                          Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                          bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                          1 Toe(l __

                                                                          - T 1at eI -

                                                                          l

                                                                          _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                          ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                          AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                          ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                          Continued on ne)( page

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                          Form PM 139

                                                                          171 (continued)

                                                                          ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                          Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                          5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                          bull

                                                                          M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                          181

                                                                          and

                                                                          no matter how

                                                                          are trained

                                                                          DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                          11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                          Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                          8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                          lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                          the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                          the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                          where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                          be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                          ears with the ear and

                                                                          the audiometer win

                                                                          the mmr(

                                                                          and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                          the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                          c~vman form

                                                                          and Services in audiometric

                                                                          health that attendance

                                                                          Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                          recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                          ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                          such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                          it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                          If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                          after

                                                                          500-8000 take no further

                                                                          500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                          advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                          check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                          are

                                                                          audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                          errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                          take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                          IF

                                                                          Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                          161 (conlinood)

                                                                          should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                          ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                          civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                          retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                          The referral criteria are

                                                                          a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                          is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                          wax or if there is a or

                                                                          thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                          The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                          191

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                          Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                          Three decibel rule

                                                                          The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                          SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                          85 8 hours

                                                                          88 4 hours

                                                                          91 2 hours

                                                                          94 1 hour

                                                                          97 30 minutes

                                                                          100 15 minutes

                                                                          1101

                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                          Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                          Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                          References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                          2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                          3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                          4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                          5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                          6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                          7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                          8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                          9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                          10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                          11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                          12 Safety signs

                                                                          13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                          14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                          15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                          16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                          17 Noise awareness program

                                                                          18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                          19 OHS skills development training

                                                                          20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                          21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                          Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                          1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                          AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                          ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                          Related material

                                                                          1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                          • Part 1
                                                                          • Part 2
                                                                          • Part 3
                                                                          • Part 4
                                                                          • PArt 5

                                                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                            ANNEXC TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                            ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

                                                                            SYNOPSIS This annex contains the safety measures applicable to electronic and electrical hazards The electrical of and is inherent in its

                                                                            rtwIrlv

                                                                            manufacture installation and maintenance and where these carried out there is little risk to or employees

                                                                            REFERENCES

                                                                            1 Defence

                                                                            MOHS-A chapter 39 Electronic and Electrical Hazards

                                                                            2 Other

                                                                            3 Cross Reference

                                                                            4 annex A-Ionising Radiation Hazards

                                                                            Chapter 4 annex Radiation

                                                                            AS

                                                                            Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                                            WELDING

                                                                            SYNOPSIS

                                                                            REFERENCES

                                                                            1 Defence

                                                                            W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                                            2 Other

                                                                            AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                                            AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                                            AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                                            AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                                            JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                                            Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                                            3 Cross Reference

                                                                            1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                                            5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                                            7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                            ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                            FIRE SAFETY

                                                                            SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                                            REFERENCES

                                                                            1 Defence

                                                                            MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                                            DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                                            MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                                            2 Other

                                                                            AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                                            AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                                            AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                                            AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                                            AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                                            AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                                            AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                                            AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                                            3 Cross Reference

                                                                            Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                                            Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                            38-3

                                                                            Administrative controls

                                                                            17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                                            Personal protective equipment

                                                                            18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                                            19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                            a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                                            b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                            c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                                            20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                                            21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                                            22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                                            Noise assessments

                                                                            23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                            24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                            a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                            b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                            c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                                            d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                            Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                                            11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                            THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                                            SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                                            environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                                            REFERENCES

                                                                            1 Defence

                                                                            DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                            OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                                            DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                                            If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                                            2 Other

                                                                            and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                                            3 Cross Reference

                                                                            8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                            112

                                                                            113

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                            CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                                            NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                                            Section 1 - Overview

                                                                            Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                                            Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                                            Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                                            Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                                            Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                                            Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                                            bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                                            bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                                            bull increased health care and compensation

                                                                            Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                                            For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                                            Continued on next page

                                                                            mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                            means

                                                                            the

                                                                            I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                            118

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                            Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                            117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                            Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                            Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                            Section Content

                                                                            1 Overview

                                                                            2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                            3 Noise management principles

                                                                            4 Impulse noise

                                                                            5 Warning signs

                                                                            6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                            7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                            8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                            9 The three decibel rule

                                                                            10 Reference material

                                                                            The fnllnwinn

                                                                            124

                                                                            125

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                            Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                            Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                            When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                            Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                            bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                            bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                            bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                            When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                            Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                            Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                            Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                            bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                            bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                            bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                            Training and skilling

                                                                            Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                            The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                            course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                            Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                            and OHS skills

                                                                            Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                            costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                            131

                                                                            132

                                                                            133

                                                                            134

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                            Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                            Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                            Eng ineering controls

                                                                            Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                            For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                            Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                            Administrative controls

                                                                            Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                            Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                            Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                            The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                            bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                            bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                            bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                            Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                            Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                            Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                            135

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                            Noise assessments

                                                                            Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                            Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                            bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                            bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                            bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                            bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                            Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                            Hearing protection areas

                                                                            136

                                                                            Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                            bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                            continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                            impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                            A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                            bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                            con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                            impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                            Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                            bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                            continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                            im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                            ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                            137

                                                                            138

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                            Hearing protection areas

                                                                            136 (continued)

                                                                            A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                            bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                            continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                            impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                            A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                            The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                            Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                            The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                            The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                            Audiometric examinations

                                                                            Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                            bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                            bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                            Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                            ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                            139

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                            Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                            138 (conlhued)

                                                                            bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                            bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                            bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                            bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                            bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                            Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                            Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                            Education

                                                                            1310

                                                                            Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                            Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                            Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                            1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                            Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                            1312

                                                                            141

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                            Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                            Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                            This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                            bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                            bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                            bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                            bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                            151

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                            Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                            Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                            HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                            MUST BE W O R N

                                                                            ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                            HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                            EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                            M UST BE W ORN

                                                                            C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                            r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                            E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                            M UST BE WOAN

                                                                            HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                            l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                            MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                            ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                            161

                                                                            162

                                                                            163

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                            Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                            Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                            the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                            Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                            Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                            Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                            Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                            Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                            bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                            bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                            bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                            164

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                            Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                            FOR r shy

                                                                            3

                                                                            4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                            3

                                                                            4 Hold

                                                                            ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                            IiudeT

                                                                            Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                            I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                            Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                            p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                            wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                            ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                            Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                            T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                            p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                            A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                            Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                            Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                            164 (conUnued)

                                                                            -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                            ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                            6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                            rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                            o ~Sati1h

                                                                            s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                            Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                            bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                            171

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                            Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                            Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                            MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                            Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                            bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                            1 Toe(l __

                                                                            - T 1at eI -

                                                                            l

                                                                            _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                            ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                            AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                            ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                            Continued on ne)( page

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                            Form PM 139

                                                                            171 (continued)

                                                                            ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                            Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                            5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                            bull

                                                                            M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                            181

                                                                            and

                                                                            no matter how

                                                                            are trained

                                                                            DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                            11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                            Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                            8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                            lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                            the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                            the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                            where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                            be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                            ears with the ear and

                                                                            the audiometer win

                                                                            the mmr(

                                                                            and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                            the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                            c~vman form

                                                                            and Services in audiometric

                                                                            health that attendance

                                                                            Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                            recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                            ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                            such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                            it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                            If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                            after

                                                                            500-8000 take no further

                                                                            500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                            advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                            check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                            are

                                                                            audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                            errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                            take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                            IF

                                                                            Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                            161 (conlinood)

                                                                            should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                            ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                            civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                            retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                            The referral criteria are

                                                                            a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                            is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                            wax or if there is a or

                                                                            thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                            The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                            191

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                            Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                            Three decibel rule

                                                                            The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                            SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                            85 8 hours

                                                                            88 4 hours

                                                                            91 2 hours

                                                                            94 1 hour

                                                                            97 30 minutes

                                                                            100 15 minutes

                                                                            1101

                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                            Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                            Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                            References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                            2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                            3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                            4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                            5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                            6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                            7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                            8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                            9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                            10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                            11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                            12 Safety signs

                                                                            13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                            14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                            15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                            16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                            17 Noise awareness program

                                                                            18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                            19 OHS skills development training

                                                                            20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                            21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                            Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                            1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                            AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                            ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                            Related material

                                                                            1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                            • Part 1
                                                                            • Part 2
                                                                            • Part 3
                                                                            • Part 4
                                                                            • PArt 5

                                                                              AS

                                                                              Defence UCCU)8110nal Health and Manual

                                                                              WELDING

                                                                              SYNOPSIS

                                                                              REFERENCES

                                                                              1 Defence

                                                                              W 411ir nnrrn~ tin

                                                                              2 Other

                                                                              AS 1338 Parts 1-3-Filters for eye ProctlJsstils Part 1-Flre Precautions

                                                                              AS 1558-Protective Jirn for weldars

                                                                              AS 3853-Fuma from welt1IrlO and allied processes

                                                                              AS t-trzt1$lmlf1lnn screens and curtains for w trtU1in OjrJfJfammS

                                                                              JuJIflnD Gas reticulation v~rm

                                                                              Worksafe Australte GUijdEl-WE~ldlna Fumes and Gases

                                                                              3 Cross Reference

                                                                              1 annex 1S--KeQIJlaUor and Cones of Practice

                                                                              5 annex A~Hazardous Substances

                                                                              7 annex K-Personal Protective Equipment

                                                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                              ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                              FIRE SAFETY

                                                                              SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                                              REFERENCES

                                                                              1 Defence

                                                                              MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                                              DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                                              MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                                              2 Other

                                                                              AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                                              AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                                              AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                                              AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                                              AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                                              AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                                              AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                                              AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                                              3 Cross Reference

                                                                              Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                                              Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                              38-3

                                                                              Administrative controls

                                                                              17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                                              Personal protective equipment

                                                                              18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                                              19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                              a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                                              b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                              c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                                              20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                                              21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                                              22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                                              Noise assessments

                                                                              23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                              24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                              a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                              b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                              c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                                              d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                              Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                                              11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                              THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                                              SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                                              environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                                              REFERENCES

                                                                              1 Defence

                                                                              DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                              OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                                              DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                                              If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                                              2 Other

                                                                              and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                                              3 Cross Reference

                                                                              8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                              112

                                                                              113

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                              CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                                              NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                                              Section 1 - Overview

                                                                              Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                                              Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                                              Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                                              Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                                              Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                                              Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                                              bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                                              bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                                              bull increased health care and compensation

                                                                              Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                                              For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                                              Continued on next page

                                                                              mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                              means

                                                                              the

                                                                              I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                              118

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                              Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                              117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                              Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                              Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                              Section Content

                                                                              1 Overview

                                                                              2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                              3 Noise management principles

                                                                              4 Impulse noise

                                                                              5 Warning signs

                                                                              6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                              7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                              8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                              9 The three decibel rule

                                                                              10 Reference material

                                                                              The fnllnwinn

                                                                              124

                                                                              125

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                              Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                              Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                              When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                              Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                              bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                              bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                              bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                              When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                              Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                              Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                              Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                              bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                              bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                              bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                              Training and skilling

                                                                              Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                              The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                              course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                              Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                              and OHS skills

                                                                              Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                              costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                              131

                                                                              132

                                                                              133

                                                                              134

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                              Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                              Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                              Eng ineering controls

                                                                              Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                              For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                              Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                              Administrative controls

                                                                              Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                              Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                              Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                              The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                              bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                              bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                              bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                              Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                              Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                              Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                              135

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                              Noise assessments

                                                                              Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                              Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                              bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                              bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                              bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                              bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                              Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                              Hearing protection areas

                                                                              136

                                                                              Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                              bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                              continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                              impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                              A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                              bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                              con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                              impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                              Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                              bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                              continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                              im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                              ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                              137

                                                                              138

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                              Hearing protection areas

                                                                              136 (continued)

                                                                              A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                              bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                              continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                              impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                              A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                              The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                              Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                              The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                              The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                              Audiometric examinations

                                                                              Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                              bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                              bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                              Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                              ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                              139

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                              Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                              138 (conlhued)

                                                                              bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                              bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                              bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                              bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                              bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                              Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                              Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                              Education

                                                                              1310

                                                                              Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                              Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                              Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                              1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                              Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                              1312

                                                                              141

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                              Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                              Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                              This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                              bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                              bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                              bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                              bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                              151

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                              Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                              Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                              HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                              MUST BE W O R N

                                                                              ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                              HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                              EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                              M UST BE W ORN

                                                                              C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                              r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                              E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                              M UST BE WOAN

                                                                              HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                              l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                              MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                              ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                              161

                                                                              162

                                                                              163

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                              Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                              Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                              the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                              Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                              Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                              Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                              Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                              Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                              bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                              bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                              bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                              164

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                              Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                              FOR r shy

                                                                              3

                                                                              4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                              3

                                                                              4 Hold

                                                                              ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                              IiudeT

                                                                              Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                              I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                              Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                              p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                              wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                              ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                              Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                              T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                              p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                              A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                              Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                              Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                              164 (conUnued)

                                                                              -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                              ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                              6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                              rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                              o ~Sati1h

                                                                              s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                              Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                              bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                              171

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                              Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                              Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                              MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                              Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                              bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                              1 Toe(l __

                                                                              - T 1at eI -

                                                                              l

                                                                              _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                              ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                              AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                              ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                              Continued on ne)( page

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                              Form PM 139

                                                                              171 (continued)

                                                                              ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                              Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                              5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                              bull

                                                                              M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                              181

                                                                              and

                                                                              no matter how

                                                                              are trained

                                                                              DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                              11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                              Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                              8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                              lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                              the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                              the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                              where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                              be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                              ears with the ear and

                                                                              the audiometer win

                                                                              the mmr(

                                                                              and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                              the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                              c~vman form

                                                                              and Services in audiometric

                                                                              health that attendance

                                                                              Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                              recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                              ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                              such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                              it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                              If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                              after

                                                                              500-8000 take no further

                                                                              500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                              advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                              check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                              are

                                                                              audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                              errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                              take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                              IF

                                                                              Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                              161 (conlinood)

                                                                              should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                              ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                              civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                              retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                              The referral criteria are

                                                                              a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                              is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                              wax or if there is a or

                                                                              thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                              The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                              191

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                              Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                              Three decibel rule

                                                                              The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                              SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                              85 8 hours

                                                                              88 4 hours

                                                                              91 2 hours

                                                                              94 1 hour

                                                                              97 30 minutes

                                                                              100 15 minutes

                                                                              1101

                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                              Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                              Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                              References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                              2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                              3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                              4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                              5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                              6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                              7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                              8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                              9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                              10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                              11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                              12 Safety signs

                                                                              13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                              14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                              15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                              16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                              17 Noise awareness program

                                                                              18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                              19 OHS skills development training

                                                                              20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                              21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                              Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                              1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                              AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                              ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                              Related material

                                                                              1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                              • Part 1
                                                                              • Part 2
                                                                              • Part 3
                                                                              • Part 4
                                                                              • PArt 5

                                                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                                ANNEX E TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                                FIRE SAFETY

                                                                                SYNOPSIS This annex directs Defence Programs to implement the administrative procedures outlined in MFPE-Manual of Fire Protection Engineering which is the primary source of policy on emergency procedures within the Defence Organisation

                                                                                REFERENCES

                                                                                1 Defence

                                                                                MOHS-A chapter 43-Fire Prevention

                                                                                DCM No 7992-Fire Safety

                                                                                MFPE chapter 2-Fire and Emergency Training

                                                                                2 Other

                                                                                AS 1266-Fire Control Plans for Ships

                                                                                AS 16031-Fire Detection Automatic

                                                                                AS 18411-Fire Extinguishers Portable

                                                                                AS 3504-Fire Blankets

                                                                                AS 4067-Firefighters Helmets-Specification

                                                                                AS 4067-Fire Prevention

                                                                                AS 1851-Fire Protection Equipment Maintenance of

                                                                                AS 2375- Guide to Selection Care and Use of CI(Jlhing for Protection Against Heat and Fire

                                                                                3 Cross Reference

                                                                                Chapter 7 annex J-Emergency Procedures

                                                                                Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                                38-3

                                                                                Administrative controls

                                                                                17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                                                Personal protective equipment

                                                                                18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                                                19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                                a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                                                b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                                c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                                                20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                                                21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                                                22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                                                Noise assessments

                                                                                23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                                24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                                a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                                b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                                c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                                                d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                                Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                                                11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                                THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                                                SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                                                environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                                                REFERENCES

                                                                                1 Defence

                                                                                DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                                OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                                                DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                                                If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                                                2 Other

                                                                                and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                                                3 Cross Reference

                                                                                8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                                112

                                                                                113

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                                                NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                                                Section 1 - Overview

                                                                                Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                                                Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                                                Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                                                Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                                                Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                                                Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                                                bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                                                bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                                                bull increased health care and compensation

                                                                                Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                                                For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                                                Continued on next page

                                                                                mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                                means

                                                                                the

                                                                                I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                                118

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                                Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                                117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                                Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                                Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                                Section Content

                                                                                1 Overview

                                                                                2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                                3 Noise management principles

                                                                                4 Impulse noise

                                                                                5 Warning signs

                                                                                6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                                9 The three decibel rule

                                                                                10 Reference material

                                                                                The fnllnwinn

                                                                                124

                                                                                125

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                                Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                                Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                                When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                                Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                                bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                                bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                                bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                                When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                                Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                                Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                                Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                                bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                                bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                                bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                                Training and skilling

                                                                                Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                                The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                                course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                                Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                                and OHS skills

                                                                                Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                                costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                                131

                                                                                132

                                                                                133

                                                                                134

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                                Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                                Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                                Eng ineering controls

                                                                                Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                                For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                                Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                                Administrative controls

                                                                                Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                                Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                                Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                                The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                                bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                                bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                                bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                                Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                                Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                                Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                                135

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                Noise assessments

                                                                                Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                                Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                                bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                                bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                                bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                                bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                                Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                Hearing protection areas

                                                                                136

                                                                                Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                                bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                                continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                                A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                                bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                                con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                                Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                                continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                                im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                                ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                                137

                                                                                138

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                Hearing protection areas

                                                                                136 (continued)

                                                                                A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                                continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                                impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                                A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                                The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                                The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                                The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                                Audiometric examinations

                                                                                Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                                bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                                bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                                Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                                ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                                139

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                                138 (conlhued)

                                                                                bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                                bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                                bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                                bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                                bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                                Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                                Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                                Education

                                                                                1310

                                                                                Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                                Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                                Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                                1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                                Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                                1312

                                                                                141

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                151

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                161

                                                                                162

                                                                                163

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                164

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                FOR r shy

                                                                                3

                                                                                4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                3

                                                                                4 Hold

                                                                                ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                IiudeT

                                                                                Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                164 (conUnued)

                                                                                -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                o ~Sati1h

                                                                                s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                171

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                1 Toe(l __

                                                                                - T 1at eI -

                                                                                l

                                                                                _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                Form PM 139

                                                                                171 (continued)

                                                                                ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                bull

                                                                                M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                181

                                                                                and

                                                                                no matter how

                                                                                are trained

                                                                                DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                ears with the ear and

                                                                                the audiometer win

                                                                                the mmr(

                                                                                and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                c~vman form

                                                                                and Services in audiometric

                                                                                health that attendance

                                                                                Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                after

                                                                                500-8000 take no further

                                                                                500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                are

                                                                                audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                IF

                                                                                Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                161 (conlinood)

                                                                                should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                The referral criteria are

                                                                                a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                wax or if there is a or

                                                                                thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                191

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                Three decibel rule

                                                                                The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                85 8 hours

                                                                                88 4 hours

                                                                                91 2 hours

                                                                                94 1 hour

                                                                                97 30 minutes

                                                                                100 15 minutes

                                                                                1101

                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                12 Safety signs

                                                                                13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                Related material

                                                                                1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                • Part 1
                                                                                • Part 2
                                                                                • Part 3
                                                                                • Part 4
                                                                                • PArt 5

                                                                                  Defence Occupational Health and Safety Manual

                                                                                  38-3

                                                                                  Administrative controls

                                                                                  17 Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Program Managers are to ensure that administrative COl troiS are to be applied to reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls include the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties 10 work areas

                                                                                  Personal protective equipment

                                                                                  18 Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls have fai led or where It is not practicable (e9 some weapon systems) to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from Australian Standard (AS) 1269 or the National Acoustic Laboratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of Hearing Protectors

                                                                                  19 The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                                  a guidelines and Instruction on equipment selection LIse and maintenance

                                                                                  b education of employees (edLlcation is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a HPA or the Introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                                  c regular audiometric examinations (refer to paragraph 32)

                                                                                  20 HPD can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electroni circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the wearer

                                                                                  21 Personnel are to wear appropriate personal HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is issued with a HPD has a personal responsibility for ensuring that the HPD fits properly is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wilfuOy fail to wear issued HPO may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative action being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impairment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPO may be provided

                                                                                  22 Commandersmanagers are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fu lly serviceable HPD

                                                                                  Noise assessments

                                                                                  23 Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not (ess than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 d8(A) Also noise assessments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                                  24 Program Managers are to ensure that noise assessment of Defence establishments and facilities are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 d8(l1n) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                                  a identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                                  b obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                                  c evaluate the effectiveness of nOise control measures and

                                                                                  d provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                                  Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                                                  11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                                  THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                                                  SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                                                  environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                                                  REFERENCES

                                                                                  1 Defence

                                                                                  DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                                  OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                                                  DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                                                  If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                                                  2 Other

                                                                                  and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                                                  3 Cross Reference

                                                                                  8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                                  112

                                                                                  113

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                                                  NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                                                  Section 1 - Overview

                                                                                  Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                                                  Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                                                  Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                                                  Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                                                  Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                                                  Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                                                  bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                                                  bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                                                  bull increased health care and compensation

                                                                                  Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                                                  For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                                                  Continued on next page

                                                                                  mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                                  means

                                                                                  the

                                                                                  I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                                  118

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                                  Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                                  117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                                  Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                                  Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                                  Section Content

                                                                                  1 Overview

                                                                                  2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                                  3 Noise management principles

                                                                                  4 Impulse noise

                                                                                  5 Warning signs

                                                                                  6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                  7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                  8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                                  9 The three decibel rule

                                                                                  10 Reference material

                                                                                  The fnllnwinn

                                                                                  124

                                                                                  125

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                                  Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                                  When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                                  Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                                  bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                                  bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                                  bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                                  When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                                  Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                                  Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                                  Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                                  bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                                  bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                                  bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                                  Training and skilling

                                                                                  Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                                  The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                                  course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                                  Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                                  and OHS skills

                                                                                  Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                                  costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                                  131

                                                                                  132

                                                                                  133

                                                                                  134

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                                  Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                                  Eng ineering controls

                                                                                  Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                                  For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                                  Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                                  Administrative controls

                                                                                  Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                                  Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                                  Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                                  The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                                  bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                                  bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                                  bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                                  Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                                  Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                                  Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                                  135

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  Noise assessments

                                                                                  Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                                  Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                                  bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                                  bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                                  bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                                  bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                                  Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                  Hearing protection areas

                                                                                  136

                                                                                  Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                                  bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                                  continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                  impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                                  A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                                  bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                                  con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                  impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                                  Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                  bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                                  continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                                  im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                                  ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                                  137

                                                                                  138

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  Hearing protection areas

                                                                                  136 (continued)

                                                                                  A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                  bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                                  continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                                  impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                                  A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                                  The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                  Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                                  The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                                  The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                                  Audiometric examinations

                                                                                  Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                                  bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                                  bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                                  Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                                  ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                                  139

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                                  138 (conlhued)

                                                                                  bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                                  bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                                  bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                                  bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                                  bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                                  Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                                  Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                                  Education

                                                                                  1310

                                                                                  Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                                  Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                                  Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                                  1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                                  Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                                  1312

                                                                                  141

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                  Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                  Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                  This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                  bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                  bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                  bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                  bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                  151

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                  Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                  HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                  MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                  ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                  HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                  EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                  M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                  C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                  r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                  E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                  M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                  HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                  l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                  MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                  ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                  161

                                                                                  162

                                                                                  163

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                  Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                  the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                  Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                  Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                  Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                  Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                  Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                  bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                  bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                  bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                  164

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                  FOR r shy

                                                                                  3

                                                                                  4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                  3

                                                                                  4 Hold

                                                                                  ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                  IiudeT

                                                                                  Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                  I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                  Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                  p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                  wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                  ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                  Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                  T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                  p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                  A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                  Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                  Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                  164 (conUnued)

                                                                                  -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                  ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                  6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                  rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                  o ~Sati1h

                                                                                  s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                  Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                  bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                  171

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                  Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                  MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                  Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                  bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                  1 Toe(l __

                                                                                  - T 1at eI -

                                                                                  l

                                                                                  _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                  ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                  AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                  ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                  Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  Form PM 139

                                                                                  171 (continued)

                                                                                  ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                  Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                  5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                  bull

                                                                                  M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                  181

                                                                                  and

                                                                                  no matter how

                                                                                  are trained

                                                                                  DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                  Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                  8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                  lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                  the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                  the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                  where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                  be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                  ears with the ear and

                                                                                  the audiometer win

                                                                                  the mmr(

                                                                                  and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                  the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                  c~vman form

                                                                                  and Services in audiometric

                                                                                  health that attendance

                                                                                  Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                  recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                  ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                  such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                  it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                  If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                  after

                                                                                  500-8000 take no further

                                                                                  500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                  advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                  check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                  are

                                                                                  audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                  errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                  take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                  IF

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                  161 (conlinood)

                                                                                  should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                  ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                  civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                  retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                  The referral criteria are

                                                                                  a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                  is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                  wax or if there is a or

                                                                                  thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                  The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                  191

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                  Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                  Three decibel rule

                                                                                  The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                  SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                  85 8 hours

                                                                                  88 4 hours

                                                                                  91 2 hours

                                                                                  94 1 hour

                                                                                  97 30 minutes

                                                                                  100 15 minutes

                                                                                  1101

                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                  Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                  Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                  References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                  2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                  3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                  4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                  5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                  6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                  7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                  8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                  9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                  10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                  11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                  12 Safety signs

                                                                                  13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                  14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                  15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                  16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                  17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                  18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                  19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                  20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                  21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                  Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                  1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                  AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                  ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                  Related material

                                                                                  1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                  • Part 1
                                                                                  • Part 2
                                                                                  • Part 3
                                                                                  • Part 4
                                                                                  • PArt 5

                                                                                    Defence OCCIJI)aliIOnal Health and Manual

                                                                                    11414tAF TO CHAPTER 3

                                                                                    THERMAL CONDITIONS

                                                                                    SYNOPSIS factors determine whether thermal extremes will Ur~V and health at work This annex rt~ 1gt11

                                                                                    environmental conaitions should be a safe so that eli fnrl Of thermal stress adverse environmental mnn can be eliminated or minimised

                                                                                    REFERENCES

                                                                                    1 Defence

                                                                                    DI(G) PERS 16-9-Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                                    OHSMAN 1 ~hnlr Thermal Conditions

                                                                                    DCMNo wOrlmla In Hot Conditions 17 1995

                                                                                    If-lIl--AJrcflnrJJt(1ntlrl and Thermal Comforl in Australian Public Service VllrCIgt

                                                                                    2 Other

                                                                                    and Thermal Comfort in Australian Public Service Offices--An information and 1994

                                                                                    3 Cross Reference

                                                                                    8 annex A~Prevention of Heat Related Illness and

                                                                                    112

                                                                                    113

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                                                    NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                                                    Section 1 - Overview

                                                                                    Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                                                    Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                                                    Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                                                    Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                                                    Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                                                    Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                                                    bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                                                    bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                                                    bull increased health care and compensation

                                                                                    Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                                                    For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                                                    Continued on next page

                                                                                    mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                                    means

                                                                                    the

                                                                                    I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                                    118

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                                    Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                                    117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                                    Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                                    Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                                    Section Content

                                                                                    1 Overview

                                                                                    2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                                    3 Noise management principles

                                                                                    4 Impulse noise

                                                                                    5 Warning signs

                                                                                    6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                    7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                    8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                                    9 The three decibel rule

                                                                                    10 Reference material

                                                                                    The fnllnwinn

                                                                                    124

                                                                                    125

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                                    Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                                    When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                                    Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                                    bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                                    bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                                    bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                                    When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                                    Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                                    Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                                    Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                                    bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                                    bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                                    bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                                    Training and skilling

                                                                                    Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                                    The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                                    course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                                    Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                                    and OHS skills

                                                                                    Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                                    costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                                    131

                                                                                    132

                                                                                    133

                                                                                    134

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                                    Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                                    Eng ineering controls

                                                                                    Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                                    For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                                    Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                                    Administrative controls

                                                                                    Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                                    Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                                    Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                                    The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                                    bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                                    bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                                    bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                                    Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                                    Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                                    Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                                    135

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    Noise assessments

                                                                                    Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                                    Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                                    bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                                    bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                                    bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                                    bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                                    Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                    Hearing protection areas

                                                                                    136

                                                                                    Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                                    bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                                    continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                    impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                                    A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                                    bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                                    con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                    impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                                    Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                    bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                                    continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                                    im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                                    ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                                    137

                                                                                    138

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    Hearing protection areas

                                                                                    136 (continued)

                                                                                    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                    bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                                    continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                                    impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                                    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                                    The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                    Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                                    The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                                    The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                                    Audiometric examinations

                                                                                    Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                                    bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                                    bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                                    Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                                    ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                                    139

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                                    138 (conlhued)

                                                                                    bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                                    bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                                    bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                                    bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                                    bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                                    Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                                    Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                                    Education

                                                                                    1310

                                                                                    Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                                    Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                                    Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                                    1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                                    Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                                    1312

                                                                                    141

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                    Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                    Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                    This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                    bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                    bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                    bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                    bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                    151

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                    Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                    HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                    MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                    ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                    EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                    M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                    C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                    r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                    E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                    M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                    l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                    MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                    ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                    161

                                                                                    162

                                                                                    163

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                    Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                    the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                    Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                    Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                    Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                    Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                    Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                    bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                    bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                    bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                    164

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                    FOR r shy

                                                                                    3

                                                                                    4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                    3

                                                                                    4 Hold

                                                                                    ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                    IiudeT

                                                                                    Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                    I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                    Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                    p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                    wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                    ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                    Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                    T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                    p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                    A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                    Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                    Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                    164 (conUnued)

                                                                                    -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                    ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                    6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                    rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                    o ~Sati1h

                                                                                    s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                    Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                    bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                    171

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                    Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                    MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                    Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                    bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                    1 Toe(l __

                                                                                    - T 1at eI -

                                                                                    l

                                                                                    _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                    ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                    AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                    ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                    Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    Form PM 139

                                                                                    171 (continued)

                                                                                    ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                    Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                    5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                    bull

                                                                                    M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                    181

                                                                                    and

                                                                                    no matter how

                                                                                    are trained

                                                                                    DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                    Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                    8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                    lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                    the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                    the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                    where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                    be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                    ears with the ear and

                                                                                    the audiometer win

                                                                                    the mmr(

                                                                                    and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                    the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                    c~vman form

                                                                                    and Services in audiometric

                                                                                    health that attendance

                                                                                    Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                    recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                    ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                    such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                    it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                    If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                    after

                                                                                    500-8000 take no further

                                                                                    500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                    advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                    check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                    are

                                                                                    audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                    errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                    take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                    IF

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                    161 (conlinood)

                                                                                    should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                    ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                    civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                    retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                    The referral criteria are

                                                                                    a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                    is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                    wax or if there is a or

                                                                                    thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                    The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                    191

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                    Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                    Three decibel rule

                                                                                    The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                    SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                    85 8 hours

                                                                                    88 4 hours

                                                                                    91 2 hours

                                                                                    94 1 hour

                                                                                    97 30 minutes

                                                                                    100 15 minutes

                                                                                    1101

                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                    Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                    Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                    References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                    2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                    3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                    4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                    5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                    6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                    7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                    8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                    9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                    10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                    11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                    12 Safety signs

                                                                                    13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                    14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                    15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                    16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                    17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                    18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                    19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                    20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                    21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                    Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                    1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                    AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                    ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                    Related material

                                                                                    1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                    • Part 1
                                                                                    • Part 2
                                                                                    • Part 3
                                                                                    • Part 4
                                                                                    • PArt 5

                                                                                      112

                                                                                      113

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      CHAPTER 1 FOI 1301314 Serial 2

                                                                                      NOISE MANAGEMENT IN DEFENCE

                                                                                      Section 1 - Overview

                                                                                      Policy Defence has a duty of care under the Occupstlonal Health and Safety Act statement 1991 (OHS Act) and Occupational Health and Safety Standards (Safety

                                                                                      Standards) Regulatlons 1994 - Part 3 - Occupationa Noise (Safety Standards 111 Regulations) to ensure employees (ADF and APS) contractors and other affected persons are not subjected to noIse in excess of the mandated exposure standard See section 10 for references

                                                                                      Additionally Defenco (as an employer) must take all reasonably pra(ficabe steps to ftnsure that employees contractors and other affected persons do not suffer Nose Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) as a result of Defence worle or actiVities

                                                                                      Background Employees may be exposed in their work to noise emanating from a wide variety of sources such as aircraft engines modem weapons vehicles workshop machinery and portable power tools Under the OHS Act Groups and Services have a duty of care to prevent NIHL

                                                                                      Noise may be annoying and interfere with concentration and if loud enough it may cause hearing loss in an exposed person Frequent exposure to even moderately high-levels of noise without suitable protective measures may cause permanent hearing loss In addition excessive noise can cause temporary loss of hearing interfere with speech and disrupt concentration sleep and relaxation

                                                                                      Occupational NIHL is a major health risk for employees in the workplace The condition is irreversible and can lead to degradation of an employees quality of life due to communication difficulties Exposure to excessive noise can also result in costs to Defence including

                                                                                      bull increased employee absenteeism and turnover

                                                                                      bull lowered performance and increased accidents and

                                                                                      bull increased health care and compensation

                                                                                      Introduction Hearing Protection Areas (HPA) cannot always be identified in operational tactical or field situations Individual items of plant or equipment may be designated as HPA for the protection of the operatoruser (eg artillery weapons vehicles small arms etc) For the remaining situations Groups and Services are to develop risk assessment techniques to quantify the degree of risk associated with managing these noise hazards

                                                                                      For the purposes of the Safety Standards Regulations the exposure standard for noise in the occupational environment IS an eight hour equivalent continuous Ashyweighted sound pressure level LAaq Bh of 85 dB(A) For peak noise the exposure standard is a C-weighted peak sound pressure level Lcpeale of 140 dBC) The exposure to noise s measured at the employees ear position without taking into account any hearing protection Repeated exposure to noise between 75 and 85 dB(A) over long periods may be a small risk to some people The risk becomes greater with progressively increa sing levels Therefore workplace noise levels lower than the National Standard for Occupational Noise [NOHSC 1007(2000)] are desirable section 10 references refers

                                                                                      Continued on next page

                                                                                      mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                                      means

                                                                                      the

                                                                                      I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                                      118

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                                      Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                                      117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                                      Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                                      Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                                      Section Content

                                                                                      1 Overview

                                                                                      2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                                      3 Noise management principles

                                                                                      4 Impulse noise

                                                                                      5 Warning signs

                                                                                      6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                      7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                      8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                                      9 The three decibel rule

                                                                                      10 Reference material

                                                                                      The fnllnwinn

                                                                                      124

                                                                                      125

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                                      Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                                      When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                                      Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                                      bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                                      bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                                      bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                                      When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                                      Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                                      Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                                      Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                                      bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                                      bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                                      bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                                      Training and skilling

                                                                                      Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                                      The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                                      course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                                      Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                                      and OHS skills

                                                                                      Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                                      costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                                      131

                                                                                      132

                                                                                      133

                                                                                      134

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                                      Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                                      Eng ineering controls

                                                                                      Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                                      For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                                      Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                                      Administrative controls

                                                                                      Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                                      Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                                      Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                                      The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                                      bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                                      bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                                      bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                                      Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                                      Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                                      Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                                      135

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      Noise assessments

                                                                                      Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                                      Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                                      bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                                      bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                                      bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                                      bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                                      Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                      Hearing protection areas

                                                                                      136

                                                                                      Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                                      bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                                      continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                      impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                                      A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                                      bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                                      con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                      impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                                      Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                      bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                                      continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                                      im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                                      ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                                      137

                                                                                      138

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      Hearing protection areas

                                                                                      136 (continued)

                                                                                      A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                      bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                                      continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                                      impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                                      A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                                      The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                      Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                                      The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                                      The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                                      Audiometric examinations

                                                                                      Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                                      bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                                      bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                                      Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                                      ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                                      139

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                                      138 (conlhued)

                                                                                      bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                                      bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                                      bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                                      bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                                      bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                                      Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                                      Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                                      Education

                                                                                      1310

                                                                                      Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                                      Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                                      Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                                      1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                                      Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                                      1312

                                                                                      141

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                      Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                      Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                      This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                      bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                      bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                      bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                      bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                      151

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                      Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                      HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                      MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                      ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                      EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                      M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                      C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                      r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                      E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                      M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                      l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                      MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                      ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                      161

                                                                                      162

                                                                                      163

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                      Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                      the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                      Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                      Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                      Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                      Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                      Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                      bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                      bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                      bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                      164

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                      FOR r shy

                                                                                      3

                                                                                      4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                      3

                                                                                      4 Hold

                                                                                      ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                      IiudeT

                                                                                      Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                      I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                      Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                      p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                      wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                      ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                      Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                      T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                      p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                      A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                      Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                      Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                      164 (conUnued)

                                                                                      -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                      ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                      6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                      rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                      o ~Sati1h

                                                                                      s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                      Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                      bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                      171

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                      Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                      MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                      Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                      bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                      1 Toe(l __

                                                                                      - T 1at eI -

                                                                                      l

                                                                                      _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                      ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                      AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                      ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                      Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      Form PM 139

                                                                                      171 (continued)

                                                                                      ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                      Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                      5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                      bull

                                                                                      M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                      181

                                                                                      and

                                                                                      no matter how

                                                                                      are trained

                                                                                      DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                      Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                      8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                      lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                      the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                      the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                      where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                      be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                      ears with the ear and

                                                                                      the audiometer win

                                                                                      the mmr(

                                                                                      and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                      the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                      c~vman form

                                                                                      and Services in audiometric

                                                                                      health that attendance

                                                                                      Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                      recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                      ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                      such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                      it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                      If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                      after

                                                                                      500-8000 take no further

                                                                                      500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                      advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                      check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                      are

                                                                                      audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                      errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                      take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                      IF

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                      161 (conlinood)

                                                                                      should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                      ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                      civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                      retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                      The referral criteria are

                                                                                      a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                      is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                      wax or if there is a or

                                                                                      thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                      The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                      191

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                      Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                      Three decibel rule

                                                                                      The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                      SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                      85 8 hours

                                                                                      88 4 hours

                                                                                      91 2 hours

                                                                                      94 1 hour

                                                                                      97 30 minutes

                                                                                      100 15 minutes

                                                                                      1101

                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                      Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                      Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                      References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                      2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                      3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                      4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                      5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                      6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                      7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                      8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                      9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                      10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                      11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                      12 Safety signs

                                                                                      13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                      14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                      15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                      16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                      17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                      18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                      19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                      20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                      21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                      Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                      1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                      AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                      ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                      Related material

                                                                                      1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                      • Part 1
                                                                                      • Part 2
                                                                                      • Part 3
                                                                                      • Part 4
                                                                                      • PArt 5

                                                                                        mAinArlA he risks to

                                                                                        means

                                                                                        the

                                                                                        I1RIIIrlrlll and the

                                                                                        118

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                                        Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                                        117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                                        Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                                        Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                                        Section Content

                                                                                        1 Overview

                                                                                        2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                                        3 Noise management principles

                                                                                        4 Impulse noise

                                                                                        5 Warning signs

                                                                                        6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                        7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                        8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                                        9 The three decibel rule

                                                                                        10 Reference material

                                                                                        The fnllnwinn

                                                                                        124

                                                                                        125

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                                        Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                                        Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                                        When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                                        Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                                        bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                                        bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                                        bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                                        When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                                        Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                                        Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                                        Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                                        bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                                        bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                                        bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                                        Training and skilling

                                                                                        Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                                        The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                                        course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                                        Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                                        and OHS skills

                                                                                        Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                                        costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                                        131

                                                                                        132

                                                                                        133

                                                                                        134

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                                        Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                                        Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                                        Eng ineering controls

                                                                                        Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                                        For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                                        Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                                        Administrative controls

                                                                                        Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                                        Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                                        Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                                        The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                                        bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                                        bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                                        bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                                        Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                                        Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                                        Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                                        135

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                        Noise assessments

                                                                                        Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                                        Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                                        bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                                        bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                                        bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                                        bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                                        Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                        Hearing protection areas

                                                                                        136

                                                                                        Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                                        bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                                        continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                        impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                                        A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                                        bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                                        con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                        impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                                        Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                        bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                                        continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                                        im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                                        ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                                        137

                                                                                        138

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                        Hearing protection areas

                                                                                        136 (continued)

                                                                                        A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                        bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                                        continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                                        impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                                        A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                                        The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                        Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                                        The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                                        The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                                        Audiometric examinations

                                                                                        Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                                        bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                                        bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                                        Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                                        ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                                        139

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                        Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                                        138 (conlhued)

                                                                                        bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                                        bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                                        bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                                        bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                                        bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                                        Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                                        Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                                        Education

                                                                                        1310

                                                                                        Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                                        Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                                        Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                                        1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                                        Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                                        1312

                                                                                        141

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                        Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                        Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                        This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                        bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                        bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                        bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                        bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                        151

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                        Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                        Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                        HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                        MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                        ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                        EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                        M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                        C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                        r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                        E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                        M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                        l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                        MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                        ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                        161

                                                                                        162

                                                                                        163

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                        Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                        Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                        the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                        Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                        Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                        Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                        Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                        Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                        bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                        bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                        bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                        164

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                        Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                        FOR r shy

                                                                                        3

                                                                                        4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                        3

                                                                                        4 Hold

                                                                                        ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                        IiudeT

                                                                                        Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                        I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                        Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                        p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                        wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                        ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                        Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                        T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                        p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                        A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                        Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                        Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                        164 (conUnued)

                                                                                        -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                        ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                        6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                        rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                        o ~Sati1h

                                                                                        s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                        Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                        bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                        171

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                        Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                        Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                        MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                        Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                        bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                        1 Toe(l __

                                                                                        - T 1at eI -

                                                                                        l

                                                                                        _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                        ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                        AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                        ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                        Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                        Form PM 139

                                                                                        171 (continued)

                                                                                        ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                        Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                        5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                        bull

                                                                                        M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                        181

                                                                                        and

                                                                                        no matter how

                                                                                        are trained

                                                                                        DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                        11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                        Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                        8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                        lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                        the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                        the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                        where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                        be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                        ears with the ear and

                                                                                        the audiometer win

                                                                                        the mmr(

                                                                                        and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                        the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                        c~vman form

                                                                                        and Services in audiometric

                                                                                        health that attendance

                                                                                        Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                        recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                        ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                        such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                        it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                        If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                        after

                                                                                        500-8000 take no further

                                                                                        500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                        advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                        check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                        are

                                                                                        audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                        errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                        take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                        IF

                                                                                        Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                        161 (conlinood)

                                                                                        should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                        ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                        civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                        retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                        The referral criteria are

                                                                                        a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                        is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                        wax or if there is a or

                                                                                        thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                        The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                        191

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                        Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                        Three decibel rule

                                                                                        The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                        SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                        85 8 hours

                                                                                        88 4 hours

                                                                                        91 2 hours

                                                                                        94 1 hour

                                                                                        97 30 minutes

                                                                                        100 15 minutes

                                                                                        1101

                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                        Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                        Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                        References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                        2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                        3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                        4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                        5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                        6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                        7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                        8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                        9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                        10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                        11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                        12 Safety signs

                                                                                        13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                        14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                        15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                        16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                        17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                        18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                        19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                        20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                        21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                        Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                        1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                        AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                        ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                        Related material

                                                                                        1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                        • Part 1
                                                                                        • Part 2
                                                                                        • Part 3
                                                                                        • Part 4
                                                                                        • PArt 5

                                                                                          118

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter I

                                                                                          Policy providing personal Hearing Protection Devic s (HPD) to all employees principles working in HPA as well as operational tacUcal and field areas and

                                                                                          117 (continued) identifying employees with IHL by comparing reference audiograms with monitoring audlograms performed during the period of employment

                                                                                          Noise management principles and guidance on impulse noise is contained In sections 3 and 4

                                                                                          Contents This chapter contains the following sections

                                                                                          Section Content

                                                                                          1 Overview

                                                                                          2 Specific responsibilities

                                                                                          3 Noise management principles

                                                                                          4 Impulse noise

                                                                                          5 Warning signs

                                                                                          6 The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                          7 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                          8 Method for audiometric examination (for Australian Defence Force members)

                                                                                          9 The three decibel rule

                                                                                          10 Reference material

                                                                                          The fnllnwinn

                                                                                          124

                                                                                          125

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                                          Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                                          Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                                          When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                                          Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                                          bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                                          bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                                          bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                                          When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                                          Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                                          Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                                          Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                                          bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                                          bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                                          bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                                          Training and skilling

                                                                                          Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                                          The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                                          course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                                          Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                                          and OHS skills

                                                                                          Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                                          costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                                          131

                                                                                          132

                                                                                          133

                                                                                          134

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                                          Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                                          Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                                          Eng ineering controls

                                                                                          Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                                          For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                                          Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                                          Administrative controls

                                                                                          Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                                          Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                                          Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                                          The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                                          bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                                          bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                                          bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                                          Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                                          Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                                          Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                                          135

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                          Noise assessments

                                                                                          Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                                          Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                                          bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                                          bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                                          bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                                          bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                                          Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                          Hearing protection areas

                                                                                          136

                                                                                          Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                                          bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                                          continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                          impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                                          A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                                          bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                                          con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                          impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                                          Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                          bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                                          continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                                          im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                                          ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                                          137

                                                                                          138

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                          Hearing protection areas

                                                                                          136 (continued)

                                                                                          A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                          bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                                          continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                                          impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                                          A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                                          The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                          Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                                          The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                                          The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                                          Audiometric examinations

                                                                                          Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                                          bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                                          bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                                          Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                                          ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                                          139

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                          Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                                          138 (conlhued)

                                                                                          bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                                          bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                                          bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                                          bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                                          bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                                          Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                                          Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                                          Education

                                                                                          1310

                                                                                          Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                                          Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                                          Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                                          1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                                          Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                                          1312

                                                                                          141

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                          Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                          Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                          This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                          bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                          bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                          bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                          bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                          151

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                          Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                          Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                          HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                          MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                          ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                          EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                          M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                          C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                          r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                          E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                          M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                          l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                          MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                          ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                          161

                                                                                          162

                                                                                          163

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                          Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                          Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                          the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                          Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                          Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                          Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                          Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                          Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                          bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                          bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                          bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                          164

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                          Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                          FOR r shy

                                                                                          3

                                                                                          4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                          3

                                                                                          4 Hold

                                                                                          ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                          IiudeT

                                                                                          Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                          I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                          Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                          p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                          wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                          ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                          Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                          T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                          p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                          A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                          Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                          Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                          164 (conUnued)

                                                                                          -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                          ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                          6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                          rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                          o ~Sati1h

                                                                                          s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                          Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                          bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                          171

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                          Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                          Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                          MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                          Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                          bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                          1 Toe(l __

                                                                                          - T 1at eI -

                                                                                          l

                                                                                          _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                          ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                          AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                          ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                          Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                          Form PM 139

                                                                                          171 (continued)

                                                                                          ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                          Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                          5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                          bull

                                                                                          M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                          181

                                                                                          and

                                                                                          no matter how

                                                                                          are trained

                                                                                          DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                          11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                          Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                          8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                          lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                          the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                          the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                          where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                          be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                          ears with the ear and

                                                                                          the audiometer win

                                                                                          the mmr(

                                                                                          and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                          the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                          c~vman form

                                                                                          and Services in audiometric

                                                                                          health that attendance

                                                                                          Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                          recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                          ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                          such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                          it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                          If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                          after

                                                                                          500-8000 take no further

                                                                                          500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                          advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                          check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                          are

                                                                                          audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                          errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                          take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                          IF

                                                                                          Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                          161 (conlinood)

                                                                                          should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                          ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                          civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                          retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                          The referral criteria are

                                                                                          a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                          is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                          wax or if there is a or

                                                                                          thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                          The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                          191

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                          Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                          Three decibel rule

                                                                                          The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                          SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                          85 8 hours

                                                                                          88 4 hours

                                                                                          91 2 hours

                                                                                          94 1 hour

                                                                                          97 30 minutes

                                                                                          100 15 minutes

                                                                                          1101

                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                          Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                          Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                          References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                          2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                          3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                          4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                          5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                          6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                          7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                          8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                          9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                          10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                          11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                          12 Safety signs

                                                                                          13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                          14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                          15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                          16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                          17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                          18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                          19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                          20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                          21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                          Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                          1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                          AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                          ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                          Related material

                                                                                          1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                          • Part 1
                                                                                          • Part 2
                                                                                          • Part 3
                                                                                          • Part 4
                                                                                          • PArt 5

                                                                                            The fnllnwinn

                                                                                            124

                                                                                            125

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                                            Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                                            Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                                            When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                                            Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                                            bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                                            bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                                            bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                                            When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                                            Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                                            Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                                            Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                                            bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                                            bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                                            bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                                            Training and skilling

                                                                                            Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                                            The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                                            course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                                            Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                                            and OHS skills

                                                                                            Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                                            costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                                            131

                                                                                            132

                                                                                            133

                                                                                            134

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                                            Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                                            Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                                            Eng ineering controls

                                                                                            Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                                            For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                                            Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                                            Administrative controls

                                                                                            Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                                            Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                                            Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                                            The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                                            bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                                            bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                                            bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                                            Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                                            Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                                            Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                                            135

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                            Noise assessments

                                                                                            Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                                            Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                                            bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                                            bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                                            bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                                            bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                                            Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                            Hearing protection areas

                                                                                            136

                                                                                            Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                                            bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                                            continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                            impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                                            A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                                            bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                                            con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                            impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                                            Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                            bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                                            continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                                            im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                                            ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                                            137

                                                                                            138

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                            Hearing protection areas

                                                                                            136 (continued)

                                                                                            A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                            bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                                            continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                                            impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                                            A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                                            The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                            Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                                            The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                                            The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                                            Audiometric examinations

                                                                                            Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                                            bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                                            bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                                            Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                                            ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                                            139

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                            Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                                            138 (conlhued)

                                                                                            bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                                            bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                                            bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                                            bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                                            bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                                            Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                                            Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                                            Education

                                                                                            1310

                                                                                            Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                                            Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                                            Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                                            1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                                            Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                                            1312

                                                                                            141

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                            Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                            Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                            This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                            bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                            bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                            bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                            bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                            151

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                            Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                            Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                            HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                            MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                            ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                            HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                            EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                            M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                            C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                            r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                            E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                            M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                            HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                            l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                            MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                            ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                            161

                                                                                            162

                                                                                            163

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                            Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                            Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                            the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                            Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                            Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                            Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                            Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                            Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                            bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                            bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                            bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                            164

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                            Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                            FOR r shy

                                                                                            3

                                                                                            4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                            3

                                                                                            4 Hold

                                                                                            ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                            IiudeT

                                                                                            Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                            I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                            Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                            p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                            wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                            ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                            Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                            T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                            p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                            A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                            Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                            Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                            164 (conUnued)

                                                                                            -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                            ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                            6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                            rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                            o ~Sati1h

                                                                                            s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                            Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                            bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                            171

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                            Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                            Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                            MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                            Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                            bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                            1 Toe(l __

                                                                                            - T 1at eI -

                                                                                            l

                                                                                            _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                            ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                            AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                            ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                            Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                            Form PM 139

                                                                                            171 (continued)

                                                                                            ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                            Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                            5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                            bull

                                                                                            M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                            181

                                                                                            and

                                                                                            no matter how

                                                                                            are trained

                                                                                            DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                            11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                            Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                            8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                            lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                            the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                            the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                            where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                            be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                            ears with the ear and

                                                                                            the audiometer win

                                                                                            the mmr(

                                                                                            and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                            the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                            c~vman form

                                                                                            and Services in audiometric

                                                                                            health that attendance

                                                                                            Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                            recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                            ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                            such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                            it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                            If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                            after

                                                                                            500-8000 take no further

                                                                                            500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                            advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                            check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                            are

                                                                                            audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                            errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                            take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                            IF

                                                                                            Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                            161 (conlinood)

                                                                                            should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                            ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                            civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                            retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                            The referral criteria are

                                                                                            a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                            is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                            wax or if there is a or

                                                                                            thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                            The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                            191

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                            Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                            Three decibel rule

                                                                                            The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                            SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                            85 8 hours

                                                                                            88 4 hours

                                                                                            91 2 hours

                                                                                            94 1 hour

                                                                                            97 30 minutes

                                                                                            100 15 minutes

                                                                                            1101

                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                            Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                            Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                            References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                            2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                            3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                            4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                            5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                            6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                            7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                            8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                            9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                            10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                            11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                            12 Safety signs

                                                                                            13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                            14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                            15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                            16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                            17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                            18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                            19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                            20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                            21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                            Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                            1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                            AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                            ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                            Related material

                                                                                            1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                            • Part 1
                                                                                            • Part 2
                                                                                            • Part 3
                                                                                            • Part 4
                                                                                            • PArt 5

                                                                                              124

                                                                                              125

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pat 4 chapter 1

                                                                                              Individual The following table describes the responsibilities for Defence individuals responsibilities

                                                                                              Individual Responsibilities Service Chiefs Service Chiefs and Group Heads are to plan and establ ish a NMP incorporating the and Group requirements of this policy to ensure compliance with legislative requirements Heads

                                                                                              When conducti ng annual OHS audits activities in relation to noise management should be considered and the audit reports forwarded to Director General OHS by 30 March each year

                                                                                              Commanders Commanders and Executives are responsible for ensuring and Executives

                                                                                              bull employees are aware of this policy and their obligations under it

                                                                                              bull employees are not subjected to noi e in excess of the mandated exposurestandard and

                                                                                              bull risk management processes are implemented to eliminate (or if it is not reasonably practicable minimise) the risks to ensure employees do not suffer Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

                                                                                              When conducting annual OHS intemal audits the responsible Commanders and Executives are to ensure noise manaQement related activities are included

                                                                                              Managers and Managers and Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the requIrements provided In Supervisors the sections of this pol icy are implemented and maintained

                                                                                              Managers and Supervisors are required to conduct workplace inspections periodically to identify OHS hazards assess the associated risks and apply aDDr~iate risk control measures in relation to noise management

                                                                                              Employees Employees are responsible for

                                                                                              bull nol creating a risk or increasing an existing risk to their health and safety or to other persons at or near the workplace

                                                                                              bull complying with workplace instructions and requirements related to the prevention of NIHL and

                                                                                              bull complying with workplace safety instructions in relation to noise management and usllg the safety equipment provided

                                                                                              Training and skilling

                                                                                              Groups and Services are responsible for ensuring all personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise in excess of the mandated exposure standard are provided with information on the effects of NIHL and appropriate prevention strategies

                                                                                              The Defence OHS website provides information on the Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) references)

                                                                                              course and the Noise awareness program (see section 10

                                                                                              Defences mandatory OHS awareness training requirements development training can be located in section 10 references

                                                                                              and OHS skills

                                                                                              Financial In accordance with The Defence occupational health and safety policy framework implications (see section 10 references) Groups and Services are responsible for the finanCial

                                                                                              costs and expenditure in relation to the implementation of this policy 126

                                                                                              131

                                                                                              132

                                                                                              133

                                                                                              134

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                                              Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                                              Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                                              Eng ineering controls

                                                                                              Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                                              For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                                              Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                                              Administrative controls

                                                                                              Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                                              Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                                              Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                                              The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                                              bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                                              bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                                              bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                                              Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                                              Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                                              Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                                              135

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                              Noise assessments

                                                                                              Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                                              Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                                              bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                                              bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                                              bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                                              bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                                              Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                              Hearing protection areas

                                                                                              136

                                                                                              Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                                              bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                                              continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                              impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                                              A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                                              bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                                              con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                              impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                                              Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                              bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                                              continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                                              im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                                              ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                                              137

                                                                                              138

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                              Hearing protection areas

                                                                                              136 (continued)

                                                                                              A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                              bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                                              continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                                              impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                                              A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                                              The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                              Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                                              The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                                              The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                                              Audiometric examinations

                                                                                              Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                                              bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                                              bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                                              Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                                              ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                                              139

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                              Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                                              138 (conlhued)

                                                                                              bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                                              bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                                              bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                                              bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                                              bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                                              Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                                              Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                                              Education

                                                                                              1310

                                                                                              Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                                              Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                                              Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                                              1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                                              Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                                              1312

                                                                                              141

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                              Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                              Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                              This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                              bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                              bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                              bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                              bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                              151

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                              Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                              Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                              HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                              MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                              ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                              HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                              EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                              M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                              C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                              r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                              E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                              M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                              HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                              l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                              MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                              ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                              161

                                                                                              162

                                                                                              163

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                              Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                              Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                              the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                              Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                              Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                              Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                              Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                              Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                              bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                              bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                              bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                              164

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                              Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                              FOR r shy

                                                                                              3

                                                                                              4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                              3

                                                                                              4 Hold

                                                                                              ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                              IiudeT

                                                                                              Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                              I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                              Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                              p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                              wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                              ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                              Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                              T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                              p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                              A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                              Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                              Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                              164 (conUnued)

                                                                                              -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                              ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                              6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                              rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                              o ~Sati1h

                                                                                              s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                              Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                              bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                              171

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                              Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                              Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                              MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                              Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                              bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                              1 Toe(l __

                                                                                              - T 1at eI -

                                                                                              l

                                                                                              _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                              ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                              AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                              ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                              Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                              Form PM 139

                                                                                              171 (continued)

                                                                                              ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                              Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                              5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                              bull

                                                                                              M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                              181

                                                                                              and

                                                                                              no matter how

                                                                                              are trained

                                                                                              DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                              11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                              Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                              8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                              lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                              the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                              the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                              where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                              be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                              ears with the ear and

                                                                                              the audiometer win

                                                                                              the mmr(

                                                                                              and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                              the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                              c~vman form

                                                                                              and Services in audiometric

                                                                                              health that attendance

                                                                                              Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                              recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                              ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                              such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                              it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                              If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                              after

                                                                                              500-8000 take no further

                                                                                              500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                              advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                              check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                              are

                                                                                              audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                              errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                              take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                              IF

                                                                                              Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                              161 (conlinood)

                                                                                              should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                              ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                              civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                              retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                              The referral criteria are

                                                                                              a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                              is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                              wax or if there is a or

                                                                                              thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                              The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                              191

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                              Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                              Three decibel rule

                                                                                              The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                              SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                              85 8 hours

                                                                                              88 4 hours

                                                                                              91 2 hours

                                                                                              94 1 hour

                                                                                              97 30 minutes

                                                                                              100 15 minutes

                                                                                              1101

                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                              Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                              Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                              References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                              2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                              3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                              4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                              5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                              6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                              7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                              8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                              9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                              10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                              11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                              12 Safety signs

                                                                                              13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                              14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                              15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                              16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                              17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                              18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                              19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                              20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                              21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                              Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                              1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                              AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                              ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                              Related material

                                                                                              1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                              • Part 1
                                                                                              • Part 2
                                                                                              • Part 3
                                                                                              • Part 4
                                                                                              • PArt 5

                                                                                                131

                                                                                                132

                                                                                                133

                                                                                                134

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 pan 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                Section 3 - Noise management principles

                                                                                                Noise exposure The noise exposure of a person is determined by the level and duration of noise they are exposed to per working day This noise exposure In conjunction with other factors can be used to develop noise management practices

                                                                                                Eng ineering controls

                                                                                                Groups and Services are to ensure thai noise is controled by engineering ltlesign methods such as el imination enclosure and isolation These methods are to be applied in the planning and design and prior to the procurement stages of new buildings equipment and work processes

                                                                                                For continuous nOise the occupational exposure limit is a maximum of 85 dB(A) as averaged over an eight hour working day For impulse noise the occupatonal exposure limit is a maximum of 140 dB(C) Peak Sound Pressure Level (SPL) at any time

                                                                                                Where pract icable appropriate engineering measures are to be taken to limit the nOise levels to whic personnel may be exposed Engineering controls shou ld also be applied to existing eqUipment and processes which create noise beyond the recommended limits contained in this policy

                                                                                                Administrative controls

                                                                                                Where the application of engineering controls is not reasonably practicable Groups and Services are to ensure that administrative controls are to be applied 10 reduce the noise exposure of personnel and third parties so that noise exposure limits are not exceeded Administrative controls tnclude the scheduling of work job rotation observance of quiet work practices and limiting the entry of personnel and third parties to work areas

                                                                                                Personal Personal hearing protection is required when engineering and administrative controls Protective have failed or where it is not practicable (eg some weapon systems) to reduce Equipment noise exposure to recommended levels Guidance in selecting and fitting of Personal

                                                                                                Protective Equipment (PPE) can be obtained from AS 12692005 - Occupational Noise Management or the National Acoustic L boratories (NAL) publication Attenuation of hearing protectors

                                                                                                The use of PPE must be supported by a comprehensive program which includes

                                                                                                bull guidelines and instruction on equipment selection use and maintenance

                                                                                                bull education of employees (education is to be provided prior to employees commencing work in a Hearing Protection Area (HPA) or the introduction of new types of PPE) and

                                                                                                bull regular audiometric examinations

                                                                                                Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) can be passive or active Passive HPD (eg normal earmuffs or earplugs) are to have Standards Australia approval Active HPD are devices in the form of earmuffs which include electronic circuitry to reduce the noise at the ear of the Wllcll er

                                                                                                Personnel are to wear appropriate persona HPD while working in or visiting a HPA Each employee who is Issued with a HPD has a personal responsib lity for ensuring that the HPD fi ts properly Is clean and is fully serviceable The wearing of HPD in HPA is mandatory Employees who wil fully fail 10 wear issued HPD may be liable to disciplinary or appropriate administrative aclion being taken against them If employees have any medical or other impa irment that would interfere with their use of a particular type of HPD they are to advise their supervisor so that alternative HPD may be provided

                                                                                                Commanders and Executives are to ensure thai visitors are provided with clean and fully serviceable HPD

                                                                                                135

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                Noise assessments

                                                                                                Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                                                Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                                                bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                                                bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                                                bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                                                bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                                                Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                                Hearing protection areas

                                                                                                136

                                                                                                Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                                                bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                                                continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                                impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                                                A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                                                bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                                                con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                                impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                                                Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                                bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                                                continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                                                im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                                                ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                                                137

                                                                                                138

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                Hearing protection areas

                                                                                                136 (continued)

                                                                                                A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                                bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                                                continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                                                impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                                                A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                                                The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                                Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                                                The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                                                The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                                                Audiometric examinations

                                                                                                Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                                                bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                                                bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                                                Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                                                ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                                                139

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                                                138 (conlhued)

                                                                                                bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                                                bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                                                bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                                                bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                                                bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                                                Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                                                Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                                                Education

                                                                                                1310

                                                                                                Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                                                Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                                                Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                                                1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                                                Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                                                1312

                                                                                                141

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                                Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                                Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                                This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                                bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                                bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                                bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                                bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                                151

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                                Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                                HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                                MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                                ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                                HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                                M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                                C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                                r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                                M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                                HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                                MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                                ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                                161

                                                                                                162

                                                                                                163

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                                Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                                the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                                Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                                Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                                Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                                Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                                Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                                bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                                bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                                bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                                164

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                                FOR r shy

                                                                                                3

                                                                                                4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                                3

                                                                                                4 Hold

                                                                                                ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                                IiudeT

                                                                                                Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                                I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                                Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                                p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                                wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                                ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                                Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                                T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                                p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                                A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                                Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                                Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                                164 (conUnued)

                                                                                                -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                                ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                                6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                                rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                                o ~Sati1h

                                                                                                s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                                Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                                bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                                171

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                                Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                                MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                                Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                                bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                                1 Toe(l __

                                                                                                - T 1at eI -

                                                                                                l

                                                                                                _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                                ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                                AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                                ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                                Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                Form PM 139

                                                                                                171 (continued)

                                                                                                ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                                Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                                5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                                bull

                                                                                                M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                                181

                                                                                                and

                                                                                                no matter how

                                                                                                are trained

                                                                                                DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                                Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                                8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                                lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                                the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                                the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                                where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                                be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                                ears with the ear and

                                                                                                the audiometer win

                                                                                                the mmr(

                                                                                                and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                                the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                                c~vman form

                                                                                                and Services in audiometric

                                                                                                health that attendance

                                                                                                Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                                recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                                ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                                such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                                it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                                If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                                after

                                                                                                500-8000 take no further

                                                                                                500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                                advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                                check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                                are

                                                                                                audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                                errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                                take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                                IF

                                                                                                Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                The referral criteria are

                                                                                                a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                191

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                Three decibel rule

                                                                                                The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                85 8 hours

                                                                                                88 4 hours

                                                                                                91 2 hours

                                                                                                94 1 hour

                                                                                                97 30 minutes

                                                                                                100 15 minutes

                                                                                                1101

                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                12 Safety signs

                                                                                                13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                Related material

                                                                                                1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                • Part 1
                                                                                                • Part 2
                                                                                                • Part 3
                                                                                                • Part 4
                                                                                                • PArt 5

                                                                                                  135

                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                  Defence WHS 4anual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                  Noise assessments

                                                                                                  Noise assessments involve the measurement and analysis of noise sources Groups and Services are to ensure that noise assessments are performed at regular intervals but not I 55 than once every five years at all Defence establishments where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) Also noise asses ments are to be conducted when changes are made to equipment or processes within the working area

                                                                                                  Groups and Se ices are to ensure that noise assessments of Defence establishments and facili ties are conducted where noise levels are expected to exceed 85 dB(A) for continuous noise or 140 dB(C) for impulse noise The objectives of noise assessments are to

                                                                                                  bull identify areas where personnel and third parties are likely to be exposed to noise levels above the specified limits

                                                                                                  bull obtain information on the characteristics of the noise to determine appropriate control measures

                                                                                                  bull evaluate the effectiveness of noise control measures and

                                                                                                  bull provide information for the selection of appropriate hearing protection measures

                                                                                                  Occupational noise assessments are to be conducted by qualified Defence personnel such as Environmental Health Officers or Australian Defence Force Academy (ADFA) Noise course graduates or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                                  Hearing protection areas

                                                                                                  136

                                                                                                  Where engineering controls cannot reasonably reduce occupational noise exposure to elow the prescribed limit of 85 dB(A) and 140 dB(C the area is to be classified as a HPA To ensure that appropriate HPD are p~escribed four discreet noise zones have been deSignated for use within the Defence The octave band method Is to be used for assessing HPD used in Red Black and Extreme noise zones The noise zones are

                                                                                                  bull Amber Zone An Amber Zone is designated where

                                                                                                  continuous noise is at or above 85 dB(A) but below 100 dB(A) for a total of 15 minutes or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                                  impulse noise is at or above 140 dB(C) but below 150 dB(C) at any tiole

                                                                                                  A choice of suitably rated earmuffs or earplugs is to be worn in an Amber Zone The correct class of HPD is to be selected by referring to the table in appendix A of ASNZS 12693 2005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program depending on the level of noise encountered

                                                                                                  bull Red Zone A Red Zone is deSignated where

                                                                                                  con tinuous noise is at or above 100 dB(A) but below 11 5dB(A) for a total of 30 seconds or more in a normal working day or

                                                                                                  impulse noise is at or above 150 dB(C) but below 160 dB(C) It any ti me

                                                                                                  Suitably rated earmuffs are to be worn in a Red Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                                  bull Black Zone A Black Zone is designated where at any ti me

                                                                                                  continuous noise is at or above either 115 dB(A) or 115 dB(C) but below both 120 dB(A) and 120 dB(C) or

                                                                                                  im pulse noise is at or above 160 dB(C) but below 166 dB(C)

                                                                                                  ConllmJ8o orl next page

                                                                                                  137

                                                                                                  138

                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                  Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                  Hearing protection areas

                                                                                                  136 (continued)

                                                                                                  A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                                  bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                                                  continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                                                  impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                                                  A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                                                  The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                                  Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                                                  The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                                                  The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                                                  Audiometric examinations

                                                                                                  Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                                                  bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                                                  bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                                                  Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                                                  ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                                                  139

                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                  Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                                                  138 (conlhued)

                                                                                                  bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                                                  bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                                                  bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                                                  bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                                                  bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                                                  Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                                                  Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                                                  Education

                                                                                                  1310

                                                                                                  Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                                                  Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                                                  Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                                                  1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                                                  Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                                                  1312

                                                                                                  141

                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                  Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                                  Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                                  Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                                  This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                                  bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                                  bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                                  bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                                  bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                                  151

                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                  Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                                  Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                                  HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                                  MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                                  ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                                  HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                  EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                                  M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                                  C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                                  r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                  E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                                  M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                                  HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                  l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                                  MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                                  ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                                  161

                                                                                                  162

                                                                                                  163

                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                  Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                                  Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                                  the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                                  Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                                  Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                                  Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                                  Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                                  Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                                  bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                                  bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                                  bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                                  164

                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                  Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                                  FOR r shy

                                                                                                  3

                                                                                                  4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                                  3

                                                                                                  4 Hold

                                                                                                  ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                                  IiudeT

                                                                                                  Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                                  I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                                  Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                                  p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                                  wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                                  ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                                  Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                                  T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                                  p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                                  A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                                  Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                                  Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                                  164 (conUnued)

                                                                                                  -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                                  ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                                  6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                                  rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                                  o ~Sati1h

                                                                                                  s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                                  Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                                  bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                                  171

                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                  Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                                  Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                                  MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                                  Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                                  bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                                  1 Toe(l __

                                                                                                  - T 1at eI -

                                                                                                  l

                                                                                                  _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                                  ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                                  AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                                  ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                                  Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                  Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                  Form PM 139

                                                                                                  171 (continued)

                                                                                                  ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                                  Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                                  5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                                  bull

                                                                                                  M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                                  181

                                                                                                  and

                                                                                                  no matter how

                                                                                                  are trained

                                                                                                  DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                  11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                                  Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                                  8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                                  lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                                  the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                                  the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                                  where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                                  be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                                  ears with the ear and

                                                                                                  the audiometer win

                                                                                                  the mmr(

                                                                                                  and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                                  the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                                  c~vman form

                                                                                                  and Services in audiometric

                                                                                                  health that attendance

                                                                                                  Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                                  recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                                  ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                                  such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                                  it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                                  If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                                  after

                                                                                                  500-8000 take no further

                                                                                                  500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                                  advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                                  check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                                  are

                                                                                                  audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                                  errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                                  take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                                  IF

                                                                                                  Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                  161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                  should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                  ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                  civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                  retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                  The referral criteria are

                                                                                                  a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                  is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                  wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                  thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                  The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                  191

                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                  Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                  Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                  Three decibel rule

                                                                                                  The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                  SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                  85 8 hours

                                                                                                  88 4 hours

                                                                                                  91 2 hours

                                                                                                  94 1 hour

                                                                                                  97 30 minutes

                                                                                                  100 15 minutes

                                                                                                  1101

                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                  Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                  Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                  References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                  2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                  3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                  4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                  5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                  6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                  7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                  8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                  9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                  10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                  11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                  12 Safety signs

                                                                                                  13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                  14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                  15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                  16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                  17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                  18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                  19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                  20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                  21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                  Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                  1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                  AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                  ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                  Related material

                                                                                                  1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                  • Part 1
                                                                                                  • Part 2
                                                                                                  • Part 3
                                                                                                  • Part 4
                                                                                                  • PArt 5

                                                                                                    137

                                                                                                    138

                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                    Derence WHS Manual lIoIume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                    Hearing protection areas

                                                                                                    136 (continued)

                                                                                                    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs is to be worn n a 81ack Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band mpthod Ie select the most appropriate HPD refer to appendix A of ASNZS 126932005

                                                                                                    bull Extreme Zone An Extreme Zone is desig ated where at any time

                                                                                                    continuous noise is al or above either 120 d8(A) or 120 d8(e) or

                                                                                                    impulse noise is at or above 166 d8(C)

                                                                                                    A combination of suitably rated earmuffs and earplugs Is to be wom in an Extreme Zone For guidance on how to use the octave band method to select the most appropria te HPD refer to Appendix A of ASNZS 126932005 In addition limitations on employee exposure-time as defined by qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants fe to be pplied

                                                                                                    The maximum SPI produced in the work area is to be used as the reference when determining noise zones Advice on selection of suitable HPD shoUld be obtained from qualified Defence personnel (see 135) or appropriately qualified civilian consultants

                                                                                                    Warning signs Groups and Services are to ensure that warning signs are posted and maintained at the entrance of HPA informing personnel and third parties entering these areas that hearing prolection i required

                                                                                                    The sign is to denote the colour code of the area and the type of hearing protection device(s) required AI signs are to be in English and supplemented with signs in any other language which is used as a primary language by personnel who normally work in the area

                                                                                                    The design of HPA signs are detailed in section 5 ConSideration should be given to the material from vhich the HPA signs are constructed Outdoor HPA signs should be robust weather proof fade proof and produced on a suitable backing material such as aluminium or plastic Indoof signs do not normally require an aluminium back ng and where appropriate should be manufactured from less expensive cardboard or paper material HPA signs should be of a size appropriate to their location and must be clearly visible from a distance of 25 metres For additional information on the lise of Safety Signs see section 10 references

                                                                                                    Audiometric examinations

                                                                                                    Groups and Services are to ensure that the hearing of employees who work in areas where the steady state noise levels are above 85 d8(A) or where impulse noise is above 140 d8(C) is monitored by regular audiometric examinations The results of audiograms are to be analysed to determine the effectiveness of the Noise Management Program (NMP) Types of audiograms are as follows

                                                                                                    bull Reference audiogram This is either the original audiogram performed on ADF members either at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment or the initial audiogram performed on civilians conducted eith r prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment The reference audiogram will be updated on direction by a medical officeraudiologist should there be a significant and permanent threshold shift in hearing detected on the monitOring audiogram The monitoring audiogram will then become the reference audiogram and

                                                                                                    bull Monitoring audiogram This is the term given to all other survey audiograms performed on employees during their employment A monitoring audiogram is usually valid for a period of 12 months

                                                                                                    Where the steady state noise levels exceed 85 dB(A) or where impulse noise exceeds 140 d8(C) Groups and Services a e to ensure that as a minimum audiometric examinations are performed as follows

                                                                                                    ConUnued on neltt PltI9Iil

                                                                                                    139

                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                    Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                                                    138 (conlhued)

                                                                                                    bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                                                    bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                                                    bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                                                    bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                                                    bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                                                    Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                                                    Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                                                    Education

                                                                                                    1310

                                                                                                    Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                                                    Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                                                    Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                                                    1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                                                    Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                                                    1312

                                                                                                    141

                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                    Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                                    Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                                    Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                                    This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                                    bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                                    bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                                    bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                                    bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                                    151

                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                    Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                                    Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                                    HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                                    MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                                    ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                                    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                    EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                                    M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                                    C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                                    r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                    E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                                    M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                                    HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                    l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                                    MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                                    ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                                    161

                                                                                                    162

                                                                                                    163

                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                    Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                                    Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                                    the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                                    Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                                    Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                                    Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                                    Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                                    Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                                    bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                                    bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                                    bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                                    164

                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                    Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                                    FOR r shy

                                                                                                    3

                                                                                                    4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                                    3

                                                                                                    4 Hold

                                                                                                    ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                                    IiudeT

                                                                                                    Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                                    I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                                    Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                                    p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                                    wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                                    ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                                    Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                                    T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                                    p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                                    A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                                    Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                                    Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                                    164 (conUnued)

                                                                                                    -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                                    ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                                    6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                                    rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                                    o ~Sati1h

                                                                                                    s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                                    Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                                    bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                                    171

                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                    Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                                    Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                                    MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                                    Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                                    bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                                    1 Toe(l __

                                                                                                    - T 1at eI -

                                                                                                    l

                                                                                                    _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                                    ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                                    AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                                    ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                                    Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                    Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                    Form PM 139

                                                                                                    171 (continued)

                                                                                                    ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                                    Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                                    5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                                    bull

                                                                                                    M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                                    181

                                                                                                    and

                                                                                                    no matter how

                                                                                                    are trained

                                                                                                    DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                    11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                                    Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                                    8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                                    lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                                    the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                                    the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                                    where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                                    be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                                    ears with the ear and

                                                                                                    the audiometer win

                                                                                                    the mmr(

                                                                                                    and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                                    the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                                    c~vman form

                                                                                                    and Services in audiometric

                                                                                                    health that attendance

                                                                                                    Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                                    recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                                    ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                                    such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                                    it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                                    If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                                    after

                                                                                                    500-8000 take no further

                                                                                                    500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                                    advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                                    check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                                    are

                                                                                                    audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                                    errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                                    take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                                    IF

                                                                                                    Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                    161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                    should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                    ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                    civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                    retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                    The referral criteria are

                                                                                                    a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                    is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                    wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                    thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                    The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                    191

                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                    Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                    Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                    Three decibel rule

                                                                                                    The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                    SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                    85 8 hours

                                                                                                    88 4 hours

                                                                                                    91 2 hours

                                                                                                    94 1 hour

                                                                                                    97 30 minutes

                                                                                                    100 15 minutes

                                                                                                    1101

                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                    Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                    Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                    References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                    2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                    3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                    4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                    5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                    6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                    7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                    8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                    9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                    10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                    11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                    12 Safety signs

                                                                                                    13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                    14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                    15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                    16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                    17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                    18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                    19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                    20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                    21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                    Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                    1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                    AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                    ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                    Related material

                                                                                                    1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                    • Part 1
                                                                                                    • Part 2
                                                                                                    • Part 3
                                                                                                    • Part 4
                                                                                                    • PArt 5

                                                                                                      139

                                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                      Audiometric eXaminations

                                                                                                      138 (conlhued)

                                                                                                      bull On commencement of Service ADF members are to have an audiometric examination performed at the recruiting medical examination or shortly after enlistment or appointment Civilian employees are to have an examination prior to or within 90 days of commencement of employment but this testing is only necessary when it is known that the employee Is to work in a noise hazardous jobwork area

                                                                                                      bull Annually All employees working in an Amber Red or Black HPA are to have an audiometric exam ination annually

                                                                                                      bull Six-monthly Employees working in an Extreme Noise HPA are to have an audiometric examination at least once every six months

                                                                                                      bull Requests Audiometric examinations should be provided 0 any employee who requests such an examination or to any employee who (during the course of their employment) has been deemed to be exposed to occupational noise and

                                                                                                      bull On termination of Service All employees are to have an audiometric examination performed during the last three months before their termination of employment

                                                                                                      Procedures for the conduct of audiometric examinations are in section 8

                                                                                                      Compensation Audiometric iurveillance may identify hearing loss or uUler im~airments which may be attributed to the working environment Groups and Services are to ensure that affected employees are informed of their entitlement to compensation The audiometric report wil l form part of the medical documentation in relatJon to compensation claims

                                                                                                      Education

                                                                                                      1310

                                                                                                      Education on Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) is an important strategy for hearing conservation Groups and Services are to provide to personnel who are likely to be exposed to noise levels above 85 dB(A) or 140 dB(C) instruction on the effects of noise NIHL and prevention strategies prior to such exposure

                                                                                                      Groups and Services are to ensure that employees responsible for design ing or purchasing equipment processes and facili ties are informed 0 this policy and methods for controlling noise at the source Such instruction is to be provided prior to or as soon as possible after being posted to a position with such responsibility

                                                                                                      Operational Units in operational areas are to establish a NMP Areas declared as provisional areas HPA should be surveyed within one month Tarmac areas engine rooms workshops

                                                                                                      1311 and research facilities are to be regarded as provisional HPA until they have been surveyed

                                                                                                      Documentation Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (see section 7) or equivalent for civilian employees is part of an individuals occupational health record and is to be managed as such in accordance with section 16 of the OHS Act the Privacy Act 1988 and the Public Service Act 1999 Groups and services are to issue administrative details and reporting procedures for Form PM 139 and civilian audiometric reports

                                                                                                      1312

                                                                                                      141

                                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                      Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                                      Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                                      Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                                      This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                                      bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                                      bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                                      bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                                      bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                                      151

                                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                      Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                                      Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                                      HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                                      MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                                      ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                                      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                      EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                                      M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                                      C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                                      r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                      E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                                      M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                                      HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                      l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                                      MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                                      ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                                      161

                                                                                                      162

                                                                                                      163

                                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                      Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                                      Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                                      the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                                      Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                                      Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                                      Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                                      Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                                      Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                                      bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                                      bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                                      bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                                      164

                                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                      Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                                      FOR r shy

                                                                                                      3

                                                                                                      4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                                      3

                                                                                                      4 Hold

                                                                                                      ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                                      IiudeT

                                                                                                      Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                                      I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                                      Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                                      p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                                      wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                                      ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                                      Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                                      T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                                      p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                                      A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                                      Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                                      Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                                      164 (conUnued)

                                                                                                      -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                                      ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                                      6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                                      rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                                      o ~Sati1h

                                                                                                      s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                                      Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                                      bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                                      171

                                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                      Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                                      Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                                      MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                                      Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                                      bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                                      1 Toe(l __

                                                                                                      - T 1at eI -

                                                                                                      l

                                                                                                      _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                                      ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                                      AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                                      ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                                      Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                      Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                      Form PM 139

                                                                                                      171 (continued)

                                                                                                      ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                                      Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                                      5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                                      bull

                                                                                                      M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                                      181

                                                                                                      and

                                                                                                      no matter how

                                                                                                      are trained

                                                                                                      DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                      11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                                      Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                                      8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                                      lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                                      the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                                      the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                                      where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                                      be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                                      ears with the ear and

                                                                                                      the audiometer win

                                                                                                      the mmr(

                                                                                                      and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                                      the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                                      c~vman form

                                                                                                      and Services in audiometric

                                                                                                      health that attendance

                                                                                                      Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                                      recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                                      ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                                      such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                                      it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                                      If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                                      after

                                                                                                      500-8000 take no further

                                                                                                      500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                                      advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                                      check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                                      are

                                                                                                      audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                                      errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                                      take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                                      IF

                                                                                                      Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                      161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                      should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                      ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                      civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                      retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                      The referral criteria are

                                                                                                      a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                      is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                      wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                      thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                      The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                      191

                                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                      Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                      Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                      Three decibel rule

                                                                                                      The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                      SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                      85 8 hours

                                                                                                      88 4 hours

                                                                                                      91 2 hours

                                                                                                      94 1 hour

                                                                                                      97 30 minutes

                                                                                                      100 15 minutes

                                                                                                      1101

                                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                      Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                      Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                      References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                      2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                      3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                      4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                      5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                      6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                      7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                      8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                      9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                      10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                      11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                      12 Safety signs

                                                                                                      13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                      14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                      15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                      16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                      17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                      18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                      19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                      20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                      21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                      Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                      1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                      AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                      ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                      Related material

                                                                                                      1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                      • Part 1
                                                                                                      • Part 2
                                                                                                      • Part 3
                                                                                                      • Part 4
                                                                                                      • PArt 5

                                                                                                        141

                                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                        Defence WHS Manlal volume 2 part chapter 1

                                                                                                        Section 4 -Impulse noise

                                                                                                        Arrangements for firearm trainirlg

                                                                                                        This section contains guidance on impulse noise The following arrangements are to apply to firearm training

                                                                                                        bull as a component of all initial training courses the correct use of Hearing Protection Devices (HPD) shall be demonstrated to all personnel req ired to participate In firearm training Such personnel shall receive proper instruction regarding the workings of HPD causes of hearing damage and the associated consequences

                                                                                                        bull before eact) firearm practice the Range Supervisor shall include refresher training on the correct wearing of HPD

                                                                                                        bull personnel part icipating in static range practices shall wear earmuffs Personnel participating in field fi ring practices are to wear HPD appropriately rated to the levels of noise generated by the nature of the firearm training The Range Supervisor is responsible for ensuring there are sufficient approprialffiy rated HPD available for all participants and

                                                                                                        bull all personnel employed within a radius of 25 metres of a firing mound shall wear earmuffs when firing is in progress

                                                                                                        151

                                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                        Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                                        Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                                        HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                                        MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                                        ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                                        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                        EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                                        M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                                        C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                                        r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                        E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                                        M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                                        HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                        l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                                        MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                                        ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                                        161

                                                                                                        162

                                                                                                        163

                                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                        Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                                        Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                                        the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                                        Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                                        Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                                        Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                                        Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                                        Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                                        bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                                        bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                                        bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                                        164

                                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                        Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                                        FOR r shy

                                                                                                        3

                                                                                                        4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                                        3

                                                                                                        4 Hold

                                                                                                        ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                                        IiudeT

                                                                                                        Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                                        I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                                        Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                                        p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                                        wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                                        ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                                        Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                                        T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                                        p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                                        A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                                        Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                                        Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                                        164 (conUnued)

                                                                                                        -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                                        ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                                        6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                                        rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                                        o ~Sati1h

                                                                                                        s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                                        Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                                        bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                                        171

                                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                        Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                                        Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                                        MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                                        Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                                        bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                                        1 Toe(l __

                                                                                                        - T 1at eI -

                                                                                                        l

                                                                                                        _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                                        ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                                        AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                                        ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                                        Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                        Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                        Form PM 139

                                                                                                        171 (continued)

                                                                                                        ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                                        Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                                        5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                                        bull

                                                                                                        M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                                        181

                                                                                                        and

                                                                                                        no matter how

                                                                                                        are trained

                                                                                                        DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                        11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                                        Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                                        8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                                        lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                                        the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                                        the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                                        where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                                        be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                                        ears with the ear and

                                                                                                        the audiometer win

                                                                                                        the mmr(

                                                                                                        and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                                        the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                                        c~vman form

                                                                                                        and Services in audiometric

                                                                                                        health that attendance

                                                                                                        Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                                        recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                                        ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                                        such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                                        it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                                        If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                                        after

                                                                                                        500-8000 take no further

                                                                                                        500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                                        advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                                        check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                                        are

                                                                                                        audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                                        errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                                        take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                                        IF

                                                                                                        Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                        161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                        should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                        ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                        civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                        retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                        The referral criteria are

                                                                                                        a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                        is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                        wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                        thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                        The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                        191

                                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                        Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                        Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                        Three decibel rule

                                                                                                        The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                        SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                        85 8 hours

                                                                                                        88 4 hours

                                                                                                        91 2 hours

                                                                                                        94 1 hour

                                                                                                        97 30 minutes

                                                                                                        100 15 minutes

                                                                                                        1101

                                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                        Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                        Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                        References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                        2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                        3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                        4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                        5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                        6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                        7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                        8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                        9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                        10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                        11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                        12 Safety signs

                                                                                                        13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                        14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                        15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                        16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                        17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                        18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                        19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                        20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                        21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                        Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                        1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                        AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                        ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                        Related material

                                                                                                        1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                        • Part 1
                                                                                                        • Part 2
                                                                                                        • Part 3
                                                                                                        • Part 4
                                                                                                        • PArt 5

                                                                                                          151

                                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual ~olume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                          Section 5 - Warning signs

                                                                                                          Noise zone Diagrams of noise zone warning signs are provided below warning signs

                                                                                                          HEARIN G ~ P~CTION~~I

                                                                                                          MUST BE W O R N

                                                                                                          ( A MBER ZONE)

                                                                                                          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                          EAR MUFfS A ND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                                          M UST BE W ORN

                                                                                                          C__B_L_ A_ C_K_Z_O_N_ E_ J

                                                                                                          r~- HEARINGshyPROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                          E AH MUFFS ]

                                                                                                          M UST BE WOAN

                                                                                                          HEARING PROTECTION AREA

                                                                                                          l EAR MUFFS AND EAR PLUGS

                                                                                                          MUST BE WORN - - ---- -

                                                                                                          ~~T~~~~-ZN ~21l~~~_ J ___ __ _ J

                                                                                                          161

                                                                                                          162

                                                                                                          163

                                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                          Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                                          Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                                          the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                                          Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                                          Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                                          Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                                          Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                                          Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                                          bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                                          bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                                          bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                                          164

                                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                          Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                                          FOR r shy

                                                                                                          3

                                                                                                          4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                                          3

                                                                                                          4 Hold

                                                                                                          ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                                          IiudeT

                                                                                                          Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                                          I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                                          Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                                          p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                                          wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                                          ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                                          Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                                          T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                                          p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                                          A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                                          Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                                          Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                                          164 (conUnued)

                                                                                                          -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                                          ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                                          6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                                          rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                                          o ~Sati1h

                                                                                                          s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                                          Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                                          bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                                          171

                                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                          Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                                          Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                                          MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                                          Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                                          bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                                          1 Toe(l __

                                                                                                          - T 1at eI -

                                                                                                          l

                                                                                                          _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                                          ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                                          AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                                          ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                                          Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                          Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                          Form PM 139

                                                                                                          171 (continued)

                                                                                                          ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                                          Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                                          5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                                          bull

                                                                                                          M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                                          181

                                                                                                          and

                                                                                                          no matter how

                                                                                                          are trained

                                                                                                          DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                          11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                                          Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                                          8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                                          lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                                          the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                                          the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                                          where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                                          be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                                          ears with the ear and

                                                                                                          the audiometer win

                                                                                                          the mmr(

                                                                                                          and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                                          the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                                          c~vman form

                                                                                                          and Services in audiometric

                                                                                                          health that attendance

                                                                                                          Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                                          recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                                          ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                                          such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                                          it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                                          If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                                          after

                                                                                                          500-8000 take no further

                                                                                                          500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                                          advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                                          check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                                          are

                                                                                                          audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                                          errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                                          take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                                          IF

                                                                                                          Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                          161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                          should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                          ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                          civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                          retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                          The referral criteria are

                                                                                                          a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                          is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                          wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                          thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                          The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                          191

                                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                          Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                          Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                          Three decibel rule

                                                                                                          The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                          SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                          85 8 hours

                                                                                                          88 4 hours

                                                                                                          91 2 hours

                                                                                                          94 1 hour

                                                                                                          97 30 minutes

                                                                                                          100 15 minutes

                                                                                                          1101

                                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                          Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                          Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                          References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                          2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                          3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                          4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                          5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                          6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                          7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                          8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                          9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                          10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                          11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                          12 Safety signs

                                                                                                          13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                          14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                          15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                          16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                          17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                          18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                          19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                          20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                          21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                          Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                          1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                          AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                          ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                          Related material

                                                                                                          1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                          • Part 1
                                                                                                          • Part 2
                                                                                                          • Part 3
                                                                                                          • Part 4
                                                                                                          • PArt 5

                                                                                                            161

                                                                                                            162

                                                                                                            163

                                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                            Section 6 - The use of foam earplugs

                                                                                                            Use of foam When using foam earplugs to provide the level of noise protection specified by earplugs the manufacturer foam earplugs must be inserted correctly Failing to insert

                                                                                                            the earplugs deep enough or nol creating an adequate seal may result in the earplugs providing a levei of attenuation below Ihe specified Noise Reduction Raling

                                                                                                            Training for correct insertion of foam earplugs

                                                                                                            Where personal hearing protection (or PPE) is required to reduce noise exposure to recommended levels (where engineenng and administrative control have failed or are not practicable) the use of PPE must be supported by adequate training

                                                                                                            Formal training such as small -group trami 9 provided by a recognised slJbject matter expert or Instructional OVD are recommended However where this Is impractical earmuffs should be used

                                                                                                            Note Groups and Services are responsible for arrang n9 and funding training

                                                                                                            Recommendations To miligate the potential increased risks to health and safety managers and supervisors are to ensure that all personnel who use foam earplugs

                                                                                                            bull are provided with the manufacturers written instructions

                                                                                                            bull are provided with fonnal training to ensure correct fitting and

                                                                                                            bull use double hearing protection (earplugs with over-the-head earmuffs) if possible or where required 10 reduce noise exposure to recommended levels

                                                                                                            164

                                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                            Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                                            FOR r shy

                                                                                                            3

                                                                                                            4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                                            3

                                                                                                            4 Hold

                                                                                                            ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                                            IiudeT

                                                                                                            Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                                            I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                                            Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                                            p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                                            wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                                            ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                                            Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                                            T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                                            p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                                            A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                                            Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                                            Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                                            164 (conUnued)

                                                                                                            -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                                            ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                                            6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                                            rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                                            o ~Sati1h

                                                                                                            s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                                            Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                                            bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                                            171

                                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                            Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                                            Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                                            MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                                            Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                                            bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                                            1 Toe(l __

                                                                                                            - T 1at eI -

                                                                                                            l

                                                                                                            _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                                            ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                                            AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                                            ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                                            Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                            Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                            Form PM 139

                                                                                                            171 (continued)

                                                                                                            ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                                            Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                                            5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                                            bull

                                                                                                            M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                                            181

                                                                                                            and

                                                                                                            no matter how

                                                                                                            are trained

                                                                                                            DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                            11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                                            Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                                            8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                                            lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                                            the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                                            the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                                            where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                                            be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                                            ears with the ear and

                                                                                                            the audiometer win

                                                                                                            the mmr(

                                                                                                            and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                                            the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                                            c~vman form

                                                                                                            and Services in audiometric

                                                                                                            health that attendance

                                                                                                            Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                                            recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                                            ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                                            such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                                            it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                                            If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                                            after

                                                                                                            500-8000 take no further

                                                                                                            500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                                            advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                                            check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                                            are

                                                                                                            audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                                            errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                                            take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                                            IF

                                                                                                            Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                            161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                            should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                            ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                            civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                            retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                            The referral criteria are

                                                                                                            a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                            is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                            wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                            thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                            The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                            191

                                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                            Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                            Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                            Three decibel rule

                                                                                                            The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                            SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                            85 8 hours

                                                                                                            88 4 hours

                                                                                                            91 2 hours

                                                                                                            94 1 hour

                                                                                                            97 30 minutes

                                                                                                            100 15 minutes

                                                                                                            1101

                                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                            Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                            Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                            References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                            2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                            3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                            4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                            5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                            6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                            7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                            8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                            9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                            10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                            11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                            12 Safety signs

                                                                                                            13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                            14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                            15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                            16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                            17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                            18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                            19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                            20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                            21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                            Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                            1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                            AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                            ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                            Related material

                                                                                                            1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                            • Part 1
                                                                                                            • Part 2
                                                                                                            • Part 3
                                                                                                            • Part 4
                                                                                                            • PArt 5

                                                                                                              164

                                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                              Instructions for The fo llowing instructions for correctly inserting foam earplugs are provided by Inserting foam the Instrtule of Aviation Medicine earplugs

                                                                                                              FOR r shy

                                                                                                              3

                                                                                                              4 Hold II f fully_ncis

                                                                                                              3

                                                                                                              4 Hold

                                                                                                              ERTIoiC FO_ [ EARPL G RoD tL ear plllr hlro a DiU

                                                                                                              IiudeT

                                                                                                              Rollin- the iQ~ lZll~ 0 lhu ~-lUIdradnct u ~ lllcmla II tltgt 5t ismgt bull ~md ~llld e1--y It ~~~ the f~ illo lnI tid ur pl to be nuud utly Uto the en ~l IT p1u- shDuld be lu1t

                                                                                                              I Cl~ C2u I0WlO middot - -=-ru the UI pluamp- mel llta iDo tia u

                                                                                                              Jba ur ~l~ WI ~Irl l r it = ~ -gt~d~ Gily ner _ ur p~ deeply ~o the an = The ClIZIII _ be ~1aihtGledby ciwllruowui b - of the ~d h tho ret JuDd hcLdie m u md ~~ II ~ poundgtd Ind f au to ~ We c2IUl au) ~mt tIl aT

                                                                                                              p =DOI be~ Q1HtId duply mDUh =0 W 11=

                                                                                                              wen the ~ pin DUO WI or CluraquoL

                                                                                                              ED plup lIut be dHply IJl4fted JlIomiddot ur TO pr010W etICi- pro ml from DO~t _ middotohe enGIY i I~ by tIa propoJtum of We f~ eM p l du ~l1m W ur ~ fon n~ izparux- a WNrm to of tht fo ur pl~ lDotlu u~u~cn=l

                                                                                                              Hold lth e e r p lUC unril ir ~Ioud

                                                                                                              T1 bull ill ~ the 1 p~ ~o eocpmd mod od w pbC2 deep dun the ear cuul IW ould rab 10D(ar ~O HCOD b If pu n talC beld in llJ~e t Etpmd the ~cllOl1 cm U~ pu~ to ~ urudad - D1 dw ur =tUl - lduc-u~ the omaunr oI~ t1 em ut1UlD (bee~ I ~ i=m ll n m cuW) or ~ Ua GY

                                                                                                              p~ 0 bKnDl ltfup ~

                                                                                                              A~IED Rcpor 1h 009

                                                                                                              Continuod 0 next Pa(O

                                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                                              Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                                              164 (conUnued)

                                                                                                              -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                                              ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                                              6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                                              rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                                              o ~Sati1h

                                                                                                              s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                                              Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                                              bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                                              171

                                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                              Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                                              Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                                              MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                                              Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                                              bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                                              1 Toe(l __

                                                                                                              - T 1at eI -

                                                                                                              l

                                                                                                              _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                                              ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                                              AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                                              ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                                              Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                              Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                              Form PM 139

                                                                                                              171 (continued)

                                                                                                              ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                                              Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                                              5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                                              bull

                                                                                                              M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                                              181

                                                                                                              and

                                                                                                              no matter how

                                                                                                              are trained

                                                                                                              DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                              11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                                              Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                                              8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                                              lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                                              the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                                              the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                                              where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                                              be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                                              ears with the ear and

                                                                                                              the audiometer win

                                                                                                              the mmr(

                                                                                                              and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                                              the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                                              c~vman form

                                                                                                              and Services in audiometric

                                                                                                              health that attendance

                                                                                                              Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                                              recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                                              ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                                              such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                                              it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                                              If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                                              after

                                                                                                              500-8000 take no further

                                                                                                              500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                                              advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                                              check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                                              are

                                                                                                              audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                                              errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                                              take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                                              IF

                                                                                                              Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                              161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                              should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                              ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                              civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                              retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                              The referral criteria are

                                                                                                              a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                              is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                              wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                              thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                              The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                              191

                                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                              Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                              Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                              Three decibel rule

                                                                                                              The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                              SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                              85 8 hours

                                                                                                              88 4 hours

                                                                                                              91 2 hours

                                                                                                              94 1 hour

                                                                                                              97 30 minutes

                                                                                                              100 15 minutes

                                                                                                              1101

                                                                                                              UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                              Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                              Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                              References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                              2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                              3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                              4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                              5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                              6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                              7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                              8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                              9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                              10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                              11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                              12 Safety signs

                                                                                                              13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                              14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                              15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                              16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                              17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                              18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                              19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                              20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                              21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                              Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                              1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                              AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                              ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                              Related material

                                                                                                              1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                              • Part 1
                                                                                                              • Part 2
                                                                                                              • Part 3
                                                                                                              • Part 4
                                                                                                              • PArt 5

                                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapleT 1

                                                                                                                Instructions for insert ing foam earplugs

                                                                                                                164 (conUnued)

                                                                                                                -IteJ inselrin eill plugs tbe user mnst c eck har rbey 11 n been inerted co ectly

                                                                                                                ) VISUA CH CK

                                                                                                                6 ACOUSTIC CHECK

                                                                                                                rar ICore inf IDlIIOOn p e ~e COll ct

                                                                                                                o ~Sati1h

                                                                                                                s~ A UUGl 1edc1l Onr bull Aml) amm of AlUlQDgtlllmiddot

                                                                                                                Im3ger U~ lIh p~UOD Sperum PrOlecno Augttrlllia

                                                                                                                bull VfpoundD tepa bull0 _009

                                                                                                                171

                                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                                                Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                                                MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                                                Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                                                bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                                                1 Toe(l __

                                                                                                                - T 1at eI -

                                                                                                                l

                                                                                                                _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                                                ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                                                AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                                                ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                                                Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                Form PM 139

                                                                                                                171 (continued)

                                                                                                                ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                                                Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                                                5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                                                bull

                                                                                                                M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                                                181

                                                                                                                and

                                                                                                                no matter how

                                                                                                                are trained

                                                                                                                DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                                                Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                                                8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                                                lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                                                the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                                                the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                                                where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                                                be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                                                ears with the ear and

                                                                                                                the audiometer win

                                                                                                                the mmr(

                                                                                                                and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                                                the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                                                c~vman form

                                                                                                                and Services in audiometric

                                                                                                                health that attendance

                                                                                                                Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                                                recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                                                ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                                                such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                                                it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                                                If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                                                after

                                                                                                                500-8000 take no further

                                                                                                                500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                                                advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                                                check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                                                are

                                                                                                                audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                                                errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                                                take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                                                IF

                                                                                                                Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                                161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                                should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                                ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                                civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                                retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                                The referral criteria are

                                                                                                                a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                                is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                                wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                                thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                                The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                                191

                                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                                Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                                Three decibel rule

                                                                                                                The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                                SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                                85 8 hours

                                                                                                                88 4 hours

                                                                                                                91 2 hours

                                                                                                                94 1 hour

                                                                                                                97 30 minutes

                                                                                                                100 15 minutes

                                                                                                                1101

                                                                                                                UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                                Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                                References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                                2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                                3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                                4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                                5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                                6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                                7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                                8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                                9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                                10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                                11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                                12 Safety signs

                                                                                                                13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                                16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                                17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                                18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                                19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                                20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                                21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                                Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                                1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                                AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                                ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                                Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                Related material

                                                                                                                1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                                • Part 1
                                                                                                                • Part 2
                                                                                                                • Part 3
                                                                                                                • Part 4
                                                                                                                • PArt 5

                                                                                                                  171

                                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                  Section 1 - Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report

                                                                                                                  Fonn PM 139 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report is also available on the Defence Web Forms System

                                                                                                                  MtDI AL-J - ONFIDE C (AIIflnr fllt) n or Ot( co

                                                                                                                  Hearing Conservation Report --------------------~

                                                                                                                  bull Use only bl ck pen ndlor stllmps

                                                                                                                  1 Toe(l __

                                                                                                                  - T 1at eI -

                                                                                                                  l

                                                                                                                  _~__ L-~~ ishy

                                                                                                                  ~IIIENT ___iIamplsect d_~

                                                                                                                  AnI_ rWwnot ~ - I I~ad~

                                                                                                                  ~~ ]-middot 10middot ~ shy- N--_ amp~ MEDICAL-IN-CONFlDpoundNCE fAft- flrort ntTy)

                                                                                                                  Continued on ne)( page

                                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                  Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                  Form PM 139

                                                                                                                  171 (continued)

                                                                                                                  ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                                                  Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                                                  5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                                                  bull

                                                                                                                  M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                                                  181

                                                                                                                  and

                                                                                                                  no matter how

                                                                                                                  are trained

                                                                                                                  DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                  11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                                                  Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                                                  8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                                                  lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                                                  the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                                                  the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                                                  where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                                                  be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                                                  ears with the ear and

                                                                                                                  the audiometer win

                                                                                                                  the mmr(

                                                                                                                  and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                                                  the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                                                  c~vman form

                                                                                                                  and Services in audiometric

                                                                                                                  health that attendance

                                                                                                                  Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                                                  recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                                                  ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                                                  such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                                                  it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                                                  If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                                                  after

                                                                                                                  500-8000 take no further

                                                                                                                  500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                                                  advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                                                  check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                                                  are

                                                                                                                  audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                                                  errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                                                  take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                                                  IF

                                                                                                                  Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                                  161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                                  should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                                  ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                                  civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                                  retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                                  The referral criteria are

                                                                                                                  a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                                  is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                                  wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                                  thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                                  The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                                  191

                                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                  Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                                  Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                                  Three decibel rule

                                                                                                                  The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                                  SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                                  85 8 hours

                                                                                                                  88 4 hours

                                                                                                                  91 2 hours

                                                                                                                  94 1 hour

                                                                                                                  97 30 minutes

                                                                                                                  100 15 minutes

                                                                                                                  1101

                                                                                                                  UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                  Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                                  Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                                  References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                                  2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                                  3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                                  4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                                  5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                                  6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                                  7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                                  8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                                  9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                                  10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                                  11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                                  12 Safety signs

                                                                                                                  13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                  14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                  15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                                  16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                                  17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                                  18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                                  19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                                  20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                                  21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                                  Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                                  1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                                  AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                                  ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                                  Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                  Related material

                                                                                                                  1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                                  • Part 1
                                                                                                                  • Part 2
                                                                                                                  • Part 3
                                                                                                                  • Part 4
                                                                                                                  • PArt 5

                                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                    Defence WPS Manual volume 2 part 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                    Form PM 139

                                                                                                                    171 (continued)

                                                                                                                    ~clV1lmcnt of lin

                                                                                                                    Hearing Conservation Report Instruction for campi tlon

                                                                                                                    5 AmeoQlITir

                                                                                                                    bull

                                                                                                                    M or _ menc hOlatIIg _

                                                                                                                    181

                                                                                                                    and

                                                                                                                    no matter how

                                                                                                                    are trained

                                                                                                                    DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                    11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                                                    Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                                                    8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                                                    lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                                                    the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                                                    the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                                                    where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                                                    be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                                                    ears with the ear and

                                                                                                                    the audiometer win

                                                                                                                    the mmr(

                                                                                                                    and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                                                    the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                                                    c~vman form

                                                                                                                    and Services in audiometric

                                                                                                                    health that attendance

                                                                                                                    Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                                                    recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                                                    ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                                                    such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                                                    it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                                                    If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                                                    after

                                                                                                                    500-8000 take no further

                                                                                                                    500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                                                    advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                                                    check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                                                    are

                                                                                                                    audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                                                    errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                                                    take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                                                    IF

                                                                                                                    Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                                    161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                                    should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                                    ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                                    civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                                    retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                                    The referral criteria are

                                                                                                                    a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                                    is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                                    wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                                    thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                                    The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                                    191

                                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                    Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                                    Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                                    Three decibel rule

                                                                                                                    The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                                    SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                                    85 8 hours

                                                                                                                    88 4 hours

                                                                                                                    91 2 hours

                                                                                                                    94 1 hour

                                                                                                                    97 30 minutes

                                                                                                                    100 15 minutes

                                                                                                                    1101

                                                                                                                    UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                    Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                                    Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                                    References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                                    2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                                    3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                                    4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                                    5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                                    6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                                    7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                                    8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                                    9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                                    10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                                    11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                                    12 Safety signs

                                                                                                                    13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                    14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                    15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                                    16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                                    17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                                    18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                                    19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                                    20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                                    21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                                    Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                                    1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                                    AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                                    ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                                    Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                    Related material

                                                                                                                    1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                                    • Part 1
                                                                                                                    • Part 2
                                                                                                                    • Part 3
                                                                                                                    • Part 4
                                                                                                                    • PArt 5

                                                                                                                      181

                                                                                                                      and

                                                                                                                      no matter how

                                                                                                                      are trained

                                                                                                                      DfenceWHS volume 2 JJM 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                      11 in automatic mode Where an the is to be inrm

                                                                                                                      Australian Standards to follow the method detailed Ooru~)atJOni91 noise m6mafJelnent

                                                                                                                      8000 Hz is to tested Automatic 8000 Hz The

                                                                                                                      lested that are to helllr a series of sounds instruct them to listen and by

                                                                                                                      the response button each time one of these it is

                                                                                                                      the over the ears with the red over the ear over the left The should be level with entrance to the ear canal and the headset should be secure

                                                                                                                      where one ear is known to commenced with the better ear

                                                                                                                      be -nifirn better than the other the test is difference between the

                                                                                                                      ears with the ear and

                                                                                                                      the audiometer win

                                                                                                                      the mmr(

                                                                                                                      and the 500 to BODO Hz are

                                                                                                                      the manufacturers Instructions must be followed All to be tested and recorded on conservation

                                                                                                                      c~vman form

                                                                                                                      and Services in audiometric

                                                                                                                      health that attendance

                                                                                                                      Directors Genera of Health Services are to ensure that when found to have a threshold shift to their most

                                                                                                                      recent reference standard review and actions are undertaken as defined by and Service managers Recommended are as follows

                                                                                                                      ensure that no transient condition exists that eQuid account for Ihe h gtrirI

                                                                                                                      such as a cold earache or recent noise exposure If such a condltion defer action and retest as soon as after remission of the

                                                                                                                      it no condition exists the within 24 hours or as soon as hours in conditions the results from

                                                                                                                      If the average loss from the reference is 15 dB or

                                                                                                                      after

                                                                                                                      500-8000 take no further

                                                                                                                      500-8000 Hz a threshold shift of 15 dB or

                                                                                                                      advise the rrIrHfV of the test results

                                                                                                                      check the noise exposure since the last was

                                                                                                                      are

                                                                                                                      audiometric assessment is to take their HPD for examination

                                                                                                                      errIOIJVEeS are

                                                                                                                      take IrniFlrt corrective 199 reissue of PPE relocation to a work area

                                                                                                                      IF

                                                                                                                      Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                                      161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                                      should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                                      ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                                      civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                                      retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                                      The referral criteria are

                                                                                                                      a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                                      is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                                      wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                                      thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                                      The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                                      191

                                                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                      Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                                      Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                                      Three decibel rule

                                                                                                                      The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                                      SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                                      85 8 hours

                                                                                                                      88 4 hours

                                                                                                                      91 2 hours

                                                                                                                      94 1 hour

                                                                                                                      97 30 minutes

                                                                                                                      100 15 minutes

                                                                                                                      1101

                                                                                                                      UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                      Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                                      Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                                      References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                                      2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                                      3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                                      4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                                      5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                                      6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                                      7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                                      8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                                      9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                                      10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                                      11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                                      12 Safety signs

                                                                                                                      13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                      14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                      15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                                      16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                                      17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                                      18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                                      19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                                      20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                                      21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                                      Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                                      1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                                      AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                                      ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                                      Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                      Related material

                                                                                                                      1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                                      • Part 1
                                                                                                                      • Part 2
                                                                                                                      • Part 3
                                                                                                                      • Part 4
                                                                                                                      • PArt 5

                                                                                                                        IF

                                                                                                                        Defence WHS Manllal volume 2 pan 4 chapler 1

                                                                                                                        161 (conlinood)

                                                                                                                        should 8ny of the medical referral criteria be met

                                                                                                                        ADF 111 are to be referred to a medical officer for review and advice or

                                                                                                                        civilian emIOI(lVEes are to be referred to an audiologlist for review and advice

                                                                                                                        retest the Tlnt in six months

                                                                                                                        The referral criteria are

                                                                                                                        a ~itnjfirIt threshold shift of 15 dB or more at any 500-8000

                                                                                                                        is 15 dB or more at any

                                                                                                                        wax or if there is a or

                                                                                                                        thaI the tester considers for medictill officerl review

                                                                                                                        The results of the will be included on the medical form and termination aU(110(Jrams are to be annotated on Form PM 139 or an civilian document

                                                                                                                        191

                                                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                        Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                                        Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                                        Three decibel rule

                                                                                                                        The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                                        SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                                        85 8 hours

                                                                                                                        88 4 hours

                                                                                                                        91 2 hours

                                                                                                                        94 1 hour

                                                                                                                        97 30 minutes

                                                                                                                        100 15 minutes

                                                                                                                        1101

                                                                                                                        UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                        Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                                        Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                                        References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                                        2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                                        3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                                        4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                                        5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                                        6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                                        7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                                        8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                                        9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                                        10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                                        11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                                        12 Safety signs

                                                                                                                        13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                        14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                        15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                                        16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                                        17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                                        18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                                        19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                                        20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                                        21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                                        Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                                        1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                                        AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                                        ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                                        Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                        Related material

                                                                                                                        1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                                        • Part 1
                                                                                                                        • Part 2
                                                                                                                        • Part 3
                                                                                                                        • Part 4
                                                                                                                        • PArt 5

                                                                                                                          191

                                                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                          Otfence WHS Manual volume 2 part ltI chapter 1

                                                                                                                          Section 9 - The three decibel rule

                                                                                                                          Three decibel rule

                                                                                                                          The 3 dB rule provides a guide for the length of time personnel may be exposed to steady state noise ha7arri (assuming a normal recovery period below 75 dB each day) In essence for every 3 dB(A) increase in the sound level the exposure time is halved This means thal a 3 dB(A) increase is a doubling of the sound Intensity The table below illustrates the 3 dB rule

                                                                                                                          SPL dB(A) Length of Exposure

                                                                                                                          85 8 hours

                                                                                                                          88 4 hours

                                                                                                                          91 2 hours

                                                                                                                          94 1 hour

                                                                                                                          97 30 minutes

                                                                                                                          100 15 minutes

                                                                                                                          1101

                                                                                                                          UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                          Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                                          Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                                          References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                                          2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                                          3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                                          4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                                          5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                                          6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                                          7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                                          8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                                          9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                                          10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                                          11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                                          12 Safety signs

                                                                                                                          13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                          14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                          15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                                          16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                                          17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                                          18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                                          19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                                          20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                                          21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                                          Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                                          1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                                          AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                                          ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                                          Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                          Related material

                                                                                                                          1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                                          • Part 1
                                                                                                                          • Part 2
                                                                                                                          • Part 3
                                                                                                                          • Part 4
                                                                                                                          • PArt 5

                                                                                                                            1101

                                                                                                                            UNCONTROLLED IF PRINTED

                                                                                                                            Oefence WHS Manual volume 2 part 4 c~apter 1

                                                                                                                            Section 10 - Reference material

                                                                                                                            References 1 Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991

                                                                                                                            2 Occupational Health and Safety (Safety Standards) Regulations 1994

                                                                                                                            3 National Standard for Occupational NOise [NOHSC 1007 (2000)]

                                                                                                                            4 Occupational Health and Safety Code of Practice 2008

                                                                                                                            5 AS 13191994 - Safety signs for the ocoupational environment

                                                                                                                            6 AS IEC 61672 1 2004 - Electroacoustics - Sound level meters - Specifications

                                                                                                                            7 ASNZS 126902005 - Occupational noise management - Overview and general requirements

                                                                                                                            8 ASJNZS 12691 2005 - Occupational noise management - Measurement and assessment of noise mmission and exposure

                                                                                                                            9 ASNZS 126922005 - Occupational noise management - Noise control management

                                                                                                                            10 ASNZS 126932005 - Occupational noise management - Hearing protector program

                                                                                                                            11 ASNZS 126942005 - Occupational noise management - Auditory assessment

                                                                                                                            12 Safety signs

                                                                                                                            13 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 10 - Assurance of Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                            14 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 7 - Risk management in Defence occupational health and safety

                                                                                                                            15 AC 563 - OHS incident reporting

                                                                                                                            16 Defence occupational noise officer (DONO) course

                                                                                                                            17 Noise awareness program

                                                                                                                            18 OHS awareness training (Defence online Campus)

                                                                                                                            19 OHS skills development training

                                                                                                                            20 SAFETYMAN volume 1 part 1 chapter 1 - Defence occupational health and safety policy framework

                                                                                                                            21 Form PM 139 - Hearing conservation report (Defence Web Forms System)

                                                                                                                            Related National Code of Practice for NOise Management and Protection of Hearing at Work material [NOHSC 2009 (2004))

                                                                                                                            1102 Control Guide Management of Noise at Work (NOHSC 2004 (1991 )]

                                                                                                                            AS 125911990 - Acoustics - Sound level meters - Non-integrating

                                                                                                                            ConlinueltlOl) nAJtI flags

                                                                                                                            Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                            Related material

                                                                                                                            1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                                            • Part 1
                                                                                                                            • Part 2
                                                                                                                            • Part 3
                                                                                                                            • Part 4
                                                                                                                            • PArt 5

                                                                                                                              Defence WHS Manual volume 2 Irt 4 chapter 1

                                                                                                                              Related material

                                                                                                                              1102 (ool1linuen)

                                                                                                                              • Part 1
                                                                                                                              • Part 2
                                                                                                                              • Part 3
                                                                                                                              • Part 4
                                                                                                                              • PArt 5

                                                                                                                                top related